The definitive SKETCHUP course. From beginner to total expert

1. Presentation: Hello everyone. I'm welcome to this sketch up course. My name is Manuel Perez. I am an architect and three D designer. And throughout my career I have worked for different architectural studios in charge of the realization of three D models in a sketch. In addition, I've been teaching sketch up in different creative schools for several years. And as a result of all of that experience, I've created this online course in which I've tried to synthesize all that accumulated knowledge in the best possible way in this course. Therefore, maybe you will start as a beginner, but without exceleration, you will finish it as an expert, of course, As long as you are able to finish the course, because it is a long course where we will immerse ourselves in the program. But I can assure you that it is a very fun course too. We will study each of the programs tools through theory and various practical exercise at different scales. We will combine academic exercise with professional projects taken from my architectural activity as a teacher, I've had many students face to face, and I've seen the main difficulties you usually encounter in the program, which are invariably the same. Therefore, the course is designed to focus on all those complex aspects of the software. Drawing a sketchup is easy. It is a very intuitive program, but it is just as easy to draw battery, Do what I used to call Pat work. When the model we want to draw becomes more complex, that way of drawing no longer works for. To model correctly in sketcher, you have to understand the sketcha way of thinking. It is a very special way of thinking. Understanding it will take us a bit of work, but once done, it will be like understanding the matrix. Everything will make sense. We will be able to model all kinds of architecture, interior design, landscape or construction projects. The program is very fun and full of possibilities during the course, in addition to theory and the different practical exercise associated with its model, we will carry out project of high difficulty in a transversal way. We will model one of the most emblematic buildings of the 20th century, the Barcelona Pavilion, designed for the Universal Exhibition of Barcelona in 1929 by Miss Van der Roy. Finally, to finish the course, we'll learn a new software layout, connected in real time with a Sketzap layout will allow us to make presentations of our projects. Because we have to be aware of the fact that having a good three D model is just as important as knowing how to present it to our teacher, colleague, or client. All this and much more awaits you in this sketch up course. So if you are ready, let's get started. I would like to highlight that the course will be updated every year with videos of the new versions of sketch up and with the most cutting edge plugins paying special attention to the development of artificial intelligence in Sketchup. 2. Intro to Setchup: Hello everybody and welcome to this SketchUp course. Inward, we will learn everything about this amazing software. My name is Maria Garcia by race, I am an architect from Madrid, Spain, and I am a specialized in the development of 3D models. First of all, I would like to talk a little bit about the history and some characteristics of SketchUp. A SketchUp was actually created in 2000 to buy an enterprise called last software. After four years, Google decided to buy this enterprise. But finally, in 2012 was Trimble navigation, the one who acquired finally, SketchUp, as you already know, we are talking about are three V modelling software. And you will be able to run this software either in Windows or Mac. The license in order to use the software can be taken for free in the official website of SketchUp, although it is limited for some time, or you can own the license, and depending on your plan, the price will be different. If we talk about the informatics requirements here you can check the features of their recommended hardware and the minimum hardware in the description of this video anyways, I will give you more information related with the specific requirements for a Windows computer and a Mac computer. But to be honest, the requirements are very similar in both platforms. And I would like to point out here, the importance of the processor gets up is a software which demands a very good processor. The graphic card is important, but it is not paramount. Nevertheless, if you want to use SketchUp in a professional way, I strongly recommend you to invest in a very good computer. If we talk about the 3D design abilities of these software, based on my experience, I have to say that SketchUp is as super flexible and polyvalent software. We will be able to model architectural projects, interior design projects, landscape projects, town planning, construction, design of products. And we can even use it in order to develop 3D print projects. And these are not just words. You should know that I've been working in different creative schools as a teacher for a long time. And I have had a lot of pupils from different backgrounds. Some of them were architects, others who are engineers, others were doing landscape master degree. So maybe this is one of the most important strengths of this program, the flexibility. Once you have an overview about SketchUp, I just would like to say, welcome to all of you. I am going to do my best in order to give you all of my knowledge and experience with this program, the course has two main pillars. The first one is to be very professional and give you all the information and knowledge that SketchUp requires, either with theory or practical exercise. And the second pillar is to have fun. During the process, we will learn to sketch out through modern buildings, Greek temples, contemporary editorials, pyramids from the ADPCM times. Time to say goodbye now, and we will start working in the next class. 3. Installing Sketchup: Hello people and welcome to this first class in where we're going to see the possibilities that is, SketchUp offers us in order to install the official version. So we should go over a sketchup.com. And here let's hover over Plans and Pricing. One-click, compare all features. I change the currency, dollars. And as you can check, we have different options available from $0 SketchUp free to $699 per year is SketchUp studio just for Windows. In the middle, we have a SketchUp go and SketchUp Pro. If we follow these columns, we will see the different features of its plan, e.g. these free version will not allow us to work with it in our desktop. We don't have the layout software included. The 3D warehouse library is limited, and so on. So I really don't recommend you to work with this free version. Actually, in my opinion, we always should work with these SketchUp Pro plan, which has all the important features except the skill to import and viewpoint clouds, which actually is something that we will not see in this course. And this photo-realistic and real time visualization, which is related with virtual reality viewing, not normal renderings. This is something just relevant in case that you want to be a specialized in that field. So my suggestion here is the most popular plan is SketchUp Pro. Anyways, if we hit this another option, try SketchUp. You will be able to use these SketchUp Pro plan for free during 30 days. Anyways, looked at here we have different labels for personal projects, for professional projects, for higher education. And this is the option that I want to point out on the four primary, secondary school. In case that you are in school, you can get SketchUp for free, but I guess that you are not in school. You are an individual person and maybe is very likely that you are a student. Then if we hover over Plans and Pricing for higher education, you can get SketchUp for our very reduced price, just $55 per year. And you are getting this ketchup is to plan the best one with all these features included. So maybe this is your epsilon. It is available for students, educators, and for universities. So time to say goodbye, and I will see you in the next class. 4. Templates: Hello people and welcome to this first class of these SketchUp course. Inward, we will see the first thing that we have to do when we open a scatter. That thing is to choose our template. This is the welcome page. And here we have different templates available. If you look carefully, we can read meters, inches, millimeters. So the most important thing here is to be hour of the unit that we are choosing. Furthermore, we have a thumbnail in where we can see the colors of that template. So of course, this depends on your preferences. Anyways, Here, more templates. Let's click it and then again, focus on the units of its template, the colors, and in some cases, the position of the camera changes as well as e.g. here in this plan view, where the camera is placed in a top position. If you want to make one of them as your favorite, you have just to click on this heart, one-click and then this template, when you close this window, will appear here in the very first position. Anyways, during this course, we will work with this template, simple meters. But before clicking on it, Let's explore a little bit more. Welcome page. Down here, we find these and other option, goal open fire. If I click on it, we will be able to search for an SketchUp file already saved in our computer or in another device. And if I continue scrolling down, we have this another category called recent files. So from here, a SketchUp makes our life easier. We can open files which have been used recently, and we have even the possibility to recover some files which we didn't save when we're close to them. So here we can find automatic recovering where we can read the date and the time in when SketchUp made these autosave. Finally, we have here information about our license. And here, if we click on Learn, will find different tutorials, the SketchUp forum, the SketchUp campus, and sketch up videos in order to learn by ourselves about this so forth, Let's click on Files again. And once we have this general view about this welcome page, let's click on this template, simple meters. And once our file is already opened, we are ready to go to the next episode. 5. Preferences: Hello guys. And we'll go into this new class where we will see specific to call preferences. We will find it if we move over Window Preferences. One click on here, and then this window pops up in where we find different options. As you can see here, we have a list of different categories. Now, template is marked, but if we start from the beginning and we select accessibility from this menu will be able to change the default colors used by a SketchUp in order to represent different things. The red axis, the green axis, or the blue axis. We are talking about this general axis, which actually is super important because it will be our main reference all the time in Scripture. So we can change the colors of this general axes. We can change other colors as the parallel and perpendicular lines or even the tangent lines. In case that we don't want to apply those changes, we can reset all the next three options. Applications, compatibility and rowing, in my opinion, are not very important because the default settings are quite good. But taking mine that you can change the default image editor. You can say it e.g. as well, the mouse wheel style and inverted. You can play with a clicker style and some different options as this one called Disabled pick on push-pull tool. You would understand it when we arrive to this tool, push pull. But as I told you before, the settings are already quite good. So we can jump to the next option called files. Here we can read file location. So this menu is quite good because we can easily know where it's placed. Everything in a sketch, the models, the components, the materials, the styles, the texture, images, the watermarked images, the export, the classifications, and the templates. We can even change that file location preference, or we can open that a specific folder and then use that file for any purpose. The next option is called generalise. This first category is saving is quite important because he's talking about the backups of our files and the autosave, I recommend you to set the auto save every 5 min. So in case that you're a SketchUp crust, you would be able to recover your file and you just lose 5 min of work. Here, I would like to make a break. Let's focus now on this folder in where we can find these two different files. One is an a SketchUp file, which means that the extension or the format is S k, p. And the other one has an, a strange extension as it is, S k be this S KB is the backup. As far as in our preferences. We said that we want to make an auto save every five-minutes. These both files are gonna be saved every 5 min. And as far as we said in our preferences that we want to create a backup, then we will always have this strange file with this strange extension as KB as a backup of our SketchUp file. In case that we lost this file, we can always recover our information using the backup. We should select it right button, go to Properties and then change that strange extension and type in S, k, p, SketchUp, extensive change the name of the file in order to don't have both files duplicate it because then we will receive an error and say accept. This window is asking us if we are sure, we say yes. And then this backup is now available to be used in SketchUp. The rest of the options are not important. So let's go to the next one, open D L. Here we are talking about our graphic card. From here, we can adjust this multi-sample anti-aliasing in order to avoid our image to be pixelated, this value is okay, and we can take the properties of our graphic card. The next option called shortcuts is one of the most important things that we can set from here, we will learn how to do it in a specific episode, because thanks to it, we will have a much more better workflow. This template option is talking about the thing that we saw in the previous episode. Templates. Here we will find the same templates as in the word compete. But look because if I select this template, e.g. this plan view and I click, Okay, my file is not changing at all, just in case that I go over File New, then the new file is going to use that template. So again, Window Preferences. Let's go to the last option workspace. Here we can change the size of our main toolbar. I'm talking about this one placed on the left side of our screen. So if I unclick this option called use large two buttons and I say, Okay, you can check how this toolbar now is smaller, right? So it is better to don't unclick this Upsilon. And finally, thanks to this reset workspace, we will undo all the changes that we previously had done in our interface. Imagine e.g. that I decide to close these Default tray. If I go over Window Preferences, work space, and I click Reset Workspace, that Default tray appears again, and my interface will be again as it comes by default, I will lose all the settings made by myself. So once we have an overview about these preferences panel, is time to say goodbye. And in the next episode, we will see another important window, as it is, the model info window. 6. Model Info: Hello guys and welcome to this new class, where we're going to see another important tool, as it is the model info window. We'd have two ways. In order to open this panel, we can go over window model info just above preferences, and then this window pops up. And here we have all the different categories available for us. The other option is to go down here and click on this cycle. One-click and the model info window is opened as well. As you can see, we have different categories, animation classifications, components, credits, dimensions, file, geo-location, rendering, statistics, text, and units. We will see all of them during the course. And in this class we will focus just on the last one, units. We saw how when we choose a template, we are choosing a unit as well for our SketchUp document, right? But we can change that unit once our document is opened and we should do it from here, model info units. Then if we move over format and we expand this window, will find different options, architectural, decimal, engineering, and fractional. This is up to you. I am an European guy, so I am getting used to work with the decimal format. And besides decimal, we can choose if we want to work with meters, centimeters, millimeters, et cetera, et cetera. Normally I work with meters, but we can do it as well with centimeters depending on the project. If we're doing a big project, maybe make more sense to work with meters. And if we are designing e.g. I don't know, I kind of vase or something like that. It's small. We can choose centimeters. Take in mind that we can change the units so easily. So don't worry, once our length is 2M, We have to display the precision. Decimals are okay. We don't need more. And then we'd have to do the same with the area and the volume, not just with a length. So it makes sense that the area now we choose square meters and I'm volume meters as well. I strongly recommend you to have marked this both options enabled length is snapping and display units format. And then we jump into these Another Label angle units. Again, we can adjust precision 0.0 is okay, but let's say 0.00 more precision enable snapping, always mark. And this 15 degrees means that when we are drawing an angle every 15 degrees, the tool is going to stop in order to mark those 15 degrees and make our lives easier. We can change it, but 15, in my opinion is okay. So as you can see, this panel is very intuitive. Once we have chosen all of our preferences, we can close it. And if I measure something, e.g. this high looked at in our measurement bar, we can read 8.00 m. So time to say goodbye. And in the next episode, I will give you a piece of information which I think that it's very useful. And it is about how to open different sketch up files and copy different elements from one file to another. This is something that normally it should be super easy, but clearness gets up. It is a little bit tricky. So in order that you don't have problems during the course, we will learn how to do it early when we are just in the beginning of the course and then we will not find any travel in the future. 7. Open different skp files at the same time: Hello people and welcome to this new class. Inward, we're gonna see how to open different SketchUp files at the same time and copy different elements from one file to another in this process, although it is very, very simple, is at the same time a little bit tricky. So let's see how to do it correctly. This is a modern house. They can from the warehouse library. And imagine that we want to include more and more elements, e.g. let's say a car. This looks like the entrance and we want them to add here a car. The thing is that that car is in another file. So the first thing that we want to do, open that file, then the logic is step, good way to go over file, open, search for our file. Here it is, The name is car selected and open. But look what is going to happen. Our car file is already open, but then the previous file, the modern house file, is closed. If I hold down Alt key class tabulation, then I can see all of my windows already opened and a half just one SketchUp file, open the car one. So this is something which can make us feel Gracie. And the solution to have both files open at the same time is to go over that folder. Here, we need to open the modern house file and then open it from here, two clicks. The file is already open. And if I hold down Alt plus tabulation, the car file is opened as well, so I can go over both files easily. The thing now is that if I want to copy this car and paste it in my modern house, I have to select my car, go over edit, copy, then go over the other file, the modern house file. Go inside. Here, say Edit, Paste. I have to wait a little bit, but here we have the car. So as you can take in order to copy one element from SketchUp file to another SketchUp file, we first need to have both files open at the same time. Then we select that specific element, Edit Copy. We move over the other file and edit paste. I hope that this process is totally clear now for you, because in the next future during the course, we will have to use it time to say goodbye now, and I'll see you in the next episode. 8. Workspace : Hello everybody and welcome to this new class in where we're going to talk about the workspace in SketchUp. As everything in SketchUp, their workspace is very intuitive as well. So at the left side, we can find this large set tool which can be moved easily. Just click in here at the beginning and dragging. Then I could place this toolbar in another position. But to be honest, the best place in my opinion is where it was. So I click, I drag till the left side, and then I released this large tool set is divided in different group of buttons. The first one, I like to call it select some group, even when not all the buttons are for selection. The next one, I call it drawing tools. Next one is going to be transformation tools. If we continue, we will find the measurement tools, then the navigation tools, camera tools, and finally these two options, 3D Warehouse and extension warehouse, which will need to use the Internet. Furthermore, you can see that we have more bars with many more options. If I move the mouse to the top and I click the right button, then all the toolbars available in the software right now will be sung. We have just to click or unclick for using them. I said right now, because we will be able to add much more options when we learn how to use the extensions or plugins. At this very moment, at the beginning of the course, I would like you to have on your workspace, the section toolbar, the saddle toolbar, this one called tax. In older versions it was called liars, this one called views, and this another one called styles. Let's say that these ones basics about this bar, we can find the menu bar, which is very classical, width file, edit, view, camera, tools window and help. If I go into any of them, we will find more options. But the one which is important for me now is here in window, this first one called Default tray. These Default tray, it is related with the panels that we can see at the right side. This is called the fold tray. And now we have here these different traits related with the ones which are currently on here. So e.g. if I go to Entity Info, I close it. It is not here anymore. But if I wanted to restore it, then I will have to go here. We know Default tray and click over Entity Info. Then it is here again, but this time in the last position, I will have to click and drag till my desired position. In this case, the first one. Of course, during the course, we will go deeper into all of these default trace because all of them are very, very important. But now we just want to understand, let's say the organization, the workspace. To finish the class. If we go down, we will see what is called measurements bar. Here, there is a space where we will be able to type measurements using our laptop. And if I go to the left, we can find two different items. The first one is this person inside a cycle. If I click on it, then this window will be opened. It is called model info window with different options. If I move even more to the left and I click on it again, model info window will be opened, but this time it is marked the geo-location. This model info window is important. We will be able to open it as well if we go over window model in the same window, once we have understood the workspace of SketchUp, we are ready for going to the next episode in where we will start learning how to navigate in this 3D space Canvas. 9. Navigation: In this episode, we will talk about the navigation. So first of all, we have to understand these three axes that we can see on the screen. One is blue, another one is green, and the last one is red. They are representing the three-dimensions that we have in this space. The blue one, a vertical dimension, most of the times represented by the letter set. And then we have these two ones, the green and the red for representing the horizontal dimension. The letter for the green one is the letter Y, and the letter for the red one is the letter X. So as you can imagine, this axis will be all the time. Our references for don't be lost when we are orbiting e.g. because at the end it is like if we are astronauts into space and then we have to be patient in order to be able to, let's say, control our movements or the movement of the camera as to prefer, in a very accurate way. I would like to add as well that every axis continue after the region, which is this point I am marking right now with mouse. So this lines, this axis continue with a dotted line which represent the negative part of that dementia. Furthermore, if we look further, we will see the line of the horizontal. Above that line, we have the sky in a blue color right now. And below that horizontal, we have this gray color. All of the canvas at the end is representing a sphere. At this very moment, we don't have color for the plane of the ground. Right now, that plane is completely transparent. So we can see that semi sphere below the horizontal in that gray color are, we can see that another semi sphere above that horizontal line in that blue color. In the next episode, we will talk about the templates and in a very rapid way, I will teach you how to change those colors in case that you don't want it. But continue with this lesson in where we are focused on the navigation, we have to pay attention to this group of buttons we have here where we can find this first option called orbit, which actually I am already using it without clicking on here because I am clicking on whole the will of my mouth. Then I click I hall and I moved for understanding better these movements of the camera, I will draw a queue. Once we have this cube as a reference, if I click a whole, the will of my mouse and I move my mouse to the left. What is happening is that we are actually looking at the right side from my point of view of these Q, right? So if I move now the mouse to the right side, the other side of this cube is visible. Besides, if I move the mouse now to the top, as you can imagine, what is visible now is the ground floor of this cube. So the opposite all the time. And if I move my mouse down, then I am Watson at the top of the queue. So I recommend you to draw this cube. It is very easy. You just use a rectangle and use the extrusion, push and pull, and be very conscious about how this orbit tool works in a sketch will help you a lot for the next lesson. Apart of this orbit tool, which is very, very important, we have this pan tool, the shortcut for the pen tool is the letter H in your laptop. And then what I'm doing is not rotate the camera as I was doing before, but moving the camera vertically or horizontally, but I am keeping more or less the angle of the camera. Next option is the soon using the wheel of my mouse, I can scroll in or scroll out. But if I want it to be more precise, then I could use these two tools. The first one called soon, one is clicked. If I use the left button of my mouth, I click and hold, and I move the mouse, I will get closer, but in a very soft way, softer than if I am using the scroll of the mouth. So sometimes can be useful. Next option, Zoom window, will allow us to create a window clicking and holding. And then I will assume that content inside that window when I released, then I have some that specific area. I will do it again. With this woman, I create this window around her. And when I released, then you can see that we have some the woman at her maximum size in our screen. Next option for a good navigation is this button called zoom extents. This is a very useful bottom in my opinion because it will help us a lot to recover our, let's say, perspective drawing when we are quite lost, e.g. imagine that we are here now, maybe too close, and we want that perspective in where we can see everything. So we can click on here. And then the camera, we'll capture the complete drawing at its maximum size. That is very, very nice because e.g. if I have another object, let's say a line here and we were just pointing this woman and I use again this zoom extents. What the camera is going to do is to capture all the drawing at its maximum size, as I told you, right? So you can see here how our drawing now is not that big because the camera has to go farther in order to get that line which was hidden under these Default tray. But it is there so many times. If you click on the Zoom extent and you realize that the camera goes so far, it is saying to you that something, it is drawn and maybe you can't see it. Anyways, I will erase this element and let's jump to the next option, which is called Previous. These previews is kind of undo, but just related with the movements of the camera. So we will go one step back in our camera history. I click on it and you can see our previous step was here pointing this woman. Finally, it is important to point out here in this episode that we have this toolbar which is called views. I wouldn't put it here. Now, which is going to be super, super helpful for navigation. I mean, we don't have to all the time try to place the camera manually using these tools that we have just learned, like orbit or pan or zoom extents, we have this automatic positions of the camera right here in this toolbar. And the first one is the isometric view of the model. Click on here, then we have this isometric view. As always, we will have to keep in mind the position of the axis. Then we have this another option called top in where we will be able to what our model from the top one-click. And here we are. Then we have front, right, back, and left, e.g. if we start clicking on front, you can see how the camera moves exactly to this position. And again, pay attention to the axis in order to know where exactly are you. If I go to right, then the movement of the camera has been towards the right side, then back, we continue moving to the right and then left. So this is going to be super helpful as I told you. I'm finally we have this another option which is just select one face of the object right button. And then we have this option called Align View. If I click here, then the camera is going to be aligned with that phase Following that orthogonal line. To finish with the navigation, I would like to mention another tools that we can find if we move over a camera here we will find these two option, parallel projection and perspective when we're navigating. It is very, very interesting and useful to switch between these two options. Normally, we will be working on perspective. But if I select parallel projection, you will see that everything is like if we are working in a dihedral system. So if I use e.g. this top view, all the measures will be real. I mean that it is like if we're doing a planned floor here, we don't have perspective at all. All the lines are parallel between each other. So this could be very interesting for generating, as I said, gland floors or elevations, e.g. if I move to this front view, etc, etc. If I go again over camera, we will find here a third option called two-point perspective. But this upsilon, Let's say that it's not that important for the navigation and we will see it in a more advanced stage of the course. Good, we will finish the class here. We will talk more about navigation. This is the beginning. And of course, practice will make you more and more wetter. And at some point, you will not have to think is like driving a car and the movements of your fingers and your mouth will be super accurate even without thinking. Time to jump to the next episode where we're going to learn how to use the selection tools. 10. Selection tools: In this episode, we will talk about the selection tools. Well, first of all, I'm going to draw one rectangle and one Q. So I'm gonna go here to this drawing tools rectangle. I click on the origin, one-click and second click, e.g. here, I will do exactly the same now with the first click on the red axis and the second click more or less around here. We don't have to be accurate right now. So next step is going to the transformation panel. Click, pull some pool, then go to this surface, one-click unreleased. Move your mouse up and just click again when you're high, when the high of your cube is okay for you. Here we are. So we have here now these two guys, the first one is in 2D and the second one is in 3D. They will allow us to check how we are going to select things in SketchUp depending on if we, our entity is 2D entity or 3D entity. So first thing that we have to do is going to this first button called Select and click on here. Then you will see this black arrow on the mouse, which is going to be our minds selection tool. Taking mind that the shortcut for this important selection tool is the Space bar. If I go again, e.g. to post poll and I want to go to the selection tool using the shortcut, then Spacebar. And here we are. So let's start with this rectangle in two d dimensions. First thing that we can see is that this surface, this gray surface, is made in dots. This is because it is already selected. If I want to unselect this surface, I have to click outside. Then we have now these clean surface, which actually is in this grey blue color. Maybe we want this surface in a white color. Then I just click on it. It is already selected right button. Here we can find this option Reverse Faces, one-click, and here we are. We'll talk about why we have these two colors in all the different phases. It is not the correct moment right now. So let's focus on the selection tool. First thing that we have to have in mind is that SketchUp is all about surfaces and edges. We have here a surface and we have edges. I want to select any of them. Yes, one-click on the correct spot and that entity will be selected. If I want to add more entities to my selection, then I have to click and hold Shift. And again, click, I can release, scroll out, scrolling, click and hold Shift again and add more entities to my selection, e.g. these four edges around this survey, I can select as well the surface. And once it is already selected, if I click and hold Shift and I click again on the surface, it will be unselected. So this is one way for selecting different entities. Furthermore, we can use the box selection. This book selection works like that. If I start the box from the left to the right, one click and then I haul, I move my mouse, e.g. till here, what is going to happen? As you can see, just this EDS has been selected. And the reason is because it was the only entity which was completed inside that box. I click outside for unselect that and I will repeat the operation one box. You can see, you can take right now that the only entity completed here is that it just, this one has been selected again. On the contrary, if my selection goes from the right to the left, we can see that this window, this box is made by a discontinuous line. Then everything inside that box, even when it is not completed, will be selected. I release. And here we are. This adds this another ads on the surface being selected. This time, the same story when I am working with this 3D cube, if I click and hold and I do this selection box from the left to the right. And I release here just this line was complete and then it is selected. On the contrary, if my box goes from the right to the left, e.g. two here, these three edges where inside that box and have been selected and the same story with these two surfaces. Easy. Eventually we have a third option for selecting entities when we are working with a 2D entity, if I click once in the surface, we already know that it has been selected. But if I click twice, then I am selecting the surface plus all the bounding edges. We can go to this option as well. If I click on the surface, then right button select bounding edges. As you can see here, we have more different options. Let's see how this works with 3D cube. One-click on the surface, then I select the surface, two clicks, then I select the surface plus the bounding edges, and we have this third option, three clicks on the surface, click, click, click, and then I select everything connected at the end, all the cube edges and surfaces one-click outside from the drawing. Then I unselect everything. As you can see, it is very easy. I recommend you to practice at home. And in the next episode, we will learn about the shortcuts, which are very, very important in order to get a very good workflow in schizo. 11. Shortcuts : Hello everybody. In this lesson we will talk about the shortcuts in SketchUp. So first of all, what I'm going to do is to import here the image that is attached with this episode. Actually there are some of them. Specifically, we have four images depending on the sketch our version we are using. So I should go over File Import here. We'll choose the correct folder. Once there and choose the option for desktop Windows, then I will choose my first point here in the region. My second point, time to erase this woman. And I can choose this option some extent and say that I want to look at this image from the top. Here we are. I recommend you strongly that you spend some time trying to study these different keyboard shortcuts because as soon as possible you have to use it frequently and then your workflow will improve dramatically. If you look down here, we can see which letters of our keyboard is already assigned with different tools. E.g. letter Q is going to rotate. Letter E is going to erase letter R is for drawing a rectangle. Letter T will grab the measurement tools. Let her be very important for Pusan pool, letter a for drawing an arc, S for the scale, for the offset g, Letter D, which actually in my laptop is doing nothing. Letter L for choosing the line tool set for the soon see for the cycle be for the Paint Bucket tool, which will be used in order to apply textures. And finally, M for moving. Different entities. Pay attention here to the arrow case because they are super, super important, they will allow us to look movement along the different axis. Left arrow for the green exit, right arrow for the red arrow up for the set access, an arrow down, it is this pink color for drawing orthogonal lines, we can use as well, of course, the number of paths in order to enter different dimensions. And if you check here all the descriptions, you will find more options which can be very useful, e.g. as this one here with the pen tool, I told you before that you can use the letter eight, but you can use as well Sift plus whole middle mouse button. I click and hold the middle mouse button and then we can pan the screen anyway, during the course, I will all the time be using all of these shortcuts. So I think that, yes, Watson, me, doing the exercise will help you to remember more and more these different commands. Furthermore, in this episode, I would like to show you how to customize your own shortcuts. If I go to Window Preferences, Here we'll find an obscene phone call shortcuts in where we will easily find any tool. Here, we have just to type the keyword e.g. imagine that we want to use these two here with this I called Look around, then we type here, look around, just typing down. Look, we can find here the function. Once we hit on it, it is already selected and we should just add a shortcut, e.g. the letter oh, but pay attention here at this assigned window because the letter 0 is already assigned. In your case, it's very likely that you don't have this letter assigned yet. So we can write here 0, then say plus 0 is currently used by camera. Look around, okay? Once we have that letter inside the assigned window, we can say, okay, and now if I click letter 0, we can see that we are using the look around tool. As you can see, it is a very easy process and a step-by-step. I suggest you to customize your shortcuts in order to improve even more our workflow. Time to say goodbye now. And in the next episode, we will do our first exercise in where we will improve our navigation skills, practicing with a simple exercise. 12. Navigation exercise : Hello everyone. In this exercise we are going to practice their navigation tools. I'm doing one exercise that I have checked with my different students that is kind of, let's say, useful for you. So first of all, we have to hit the rectangle tool. If we use a shortcut, it is the letter R. Then one click on the origin. And the key here is to zoom out a lot because I want that rectangle to be very, very large, e.g. like that. Then I have to zoom in a lot using the will of my mouse. Here. For instance, I will draw another rectangle before Post poll, one-click and release. I move my mouse when I am happy with the high. Another click. Here, we have this cube. Here. It starts actually the exercise because now I have to zoom out if I want to go to the opposite corner. And that is the key of this exercise. We have to move from one corner to the opposite corner. And maybe you are thinking that this is super easy, a piece of cake. But actually, I am 90% sure that you will find some problems if it is your first time. Why? Because normally if you want to go to that corner, you will move the mouse in that direction. And then you will scroll out and then look what is going on. Actually, we are not getting closer to that corner. But further, why is happening this? Well, the thing is that I will check in, I will scrolling again. The thing is that here, if we want to go to that corner, what we have to do is to put, place our mouse in the opposite direction. So here, then I scroll out and what is going on is that, that part of the screen is opening. And then at some point I can visualize my desire corner. Once I can see it, then it's very easy because I have to put again the mouse wherever I want to go and then scrolling. And here we are. Once I'm here, I can use this pan tool, which is very useful as well for good navigation. So I click and hold down Shift plus the will of the mouse, and then the hand appears and I can pan easily or the time holding Shift and the wheel. Once I'm here, I will draw a cycle. The dimensions now are not important at all. Here we are. Again, imagine that we want to go to the previous corner again. What we have to do, there are many ways, of course, we could use the zoom extent tool. Click and then again, scrolling, pointing our desire place. But if we want to do it, let's say more manually then what we have to do, and I will come again to this corner. Then what do we have to do is, instead of putting the mouse towards the direction that we have to go, we will place it on the opposite direction, e.g. here, but always touching the canvas, not the Default tray of course. Then I zoom out and the opposite corner of the screen is opening. Once I am able to look at my desire point, I change the position of the mouse and I scroll in. This is very important because many times maybe you have a target and you are trying to go closer, but you can't because the position of your mouse is not correct. On the other hand, sometimes in my experience, not always because e.g. now is working perfectly, but sometimes when you try to scroll in or throughout, the mouse is placed just on the space, is not working. So if that happens, what you have to do is just place the mouse on any surface and then 100% sure that the scrolling on the scroll out are going to work smoothly. Well, time to say goodbye. I hope that you find this exercise helpful. In the next episode, we will start talking about the main concepts for drawing correctly in SketchUp. And not just drawing for understanding how a sketch up, Let's say things. You are able to understand how the software things, then you will be able to fix any problem that you have. You will be much more skillful. At the end, you will enjoy more the experience of drawing here and modelling here. 13. Lines and surfaces: Hello people, welcome to this class in where we're going to talk about the main concepts that we have to muster in order to understand well how SketchUp things. And then we will become experts and we will be able to do any operation, any transformation. We will be able to fix any problem. And we will enjoy much more drawing in. So mainly we have to take in mind that there are two things super-important in a skin cell, lines and surfaces. Here we have a 2D drawing on a 3D model. Both of them are based on lines and surfaces. So let's start with a more simple one, which is of course this rectangle in 2D. I have this woman here for giving you the scale, but we can perfectly delete it, because actually a scale right now is not important. So as I told you, here, we have lines and surfaces. Actually we have just one surface. We know how to select them. We want to select the line. We can do it using our mouse and clicking and adding more and more lines, e.g. that if we click out of the drawing, then we unselect everything. If we want to select the surface, here we are. But the thing that we have to understand is that when we are drawing a sketch up our scope, our purpose is to generate surfaces in order to create 3D models from the surfaces is how we are going to use the Post poll tool to extrude those surfaces and being able to achieve 3D models, e.g. here, once we have the surface, I can use the cost pool tool, one-click and then we have our queue. So imagine that we delayed the surface and we have just lines. In this case. In SketchUp, we can barely do nothing. So we should recover the surface that we have just lost. In order to do that, we better go to line and then we can draw or redraw over any of the lines of this rectangle. Then we recover that surface and we can generate again that 3D model. So the lines are containing that surface. If this time I erased one of the lines instead of the surface, e.g. this one. What is going on? I have lost, of course, the line, but at the same time, I lost the surface because the line are the concerns of the surface. If I lose any of them, then I will lose the surface to tell again for selecting the line tool. And I close again and I recover the surface again. Let's see how this works. When I am working with a 3D model. In a 3D model, it is exactly the same like in a 2D model, but with high, I mean, if I select this surface and I delete it, you will see that the queue is completely empty. Inside the queue, we have just error. It is not a solid figure. So we can think about this Q as different 2D planes pouring all together, right? And of course, all of those 2D planes will work exactly the same as our first 2D drawing. We saw dust before. So here, if we wanted to recover that surface, we should draw any line of its concern, right? E.g. this one. And once we have the surface, we can mark it and extrude it and play with it as we want. Furthermore, if I choose this time, e.g. this line and I delighted what is going on. We have lost, of course, the line selected, but at the same time, we lost two surfaces. The surface on the left side, on the surface on the right side, right? Why? Because that line was holding those two surfaces the same as here in the 2D drawing. When I select this line and I delete it, we said that this line was holding the surface in the 3D model. That line was holding knot one surface, but two of them according to this logic, if I select the line and I draw again from this point to this end point, I will recover both surfaces. Here we are. This is one of the most interesting and fun things about SketchUp because if we are able to understand these concepts in a very deep way, we will be able to enjoy a lot and draw it in SketchUp because it's not just about the lighting and recovering surfaces. But e.g. if I select this line and instead of deleting it, I move it using the Move tool. Look what is going on. That line is holding either the surface on the top and the surface on the front. So if I move e.g. that line following the set X, both surfaces are changing this way. And if I go till the ground floor, I could become easily my shape into a triangle 3D model, right? We will go deeper into this, Let's say, reshape and resize figures when we see these Move tool. But at this very moment, I just want you to understand how lines, surfaces are connected to each other. How lines are the concern of the surfaces here? How surfaces are the key for creating 3D models. And how those 3D models are totally empty inside. So we can understand them as different to d, draw wins joint altogether creating that shape. So let's finish the class here. In the next class we will talk about another very important concept in SketchUp, as it is the groups and components. 14. Groups and components : Hello everybody. In this class we will talk about another important concept in SketchUp as groups and components. So first of all, you can see on the screen that we have a rectangle and a circle. We know that both of them are based on surfaces and lines as concerns. So let's just start choosing e.g. this circle and moving it following the red X for keeping that cycle on the ground floor. And eventually I will place that cycle on the rectangle. Both of them will be occupying the same plane. Here we are. And what is going on here? We have an intersection between both sets. So now we have an independent surface here, another one in the middle, and the last one here, the three of them are independent, so we can choose it and create 3D models from each one. The same thing happens with the lines. All of them have been cut and now are independent. Okay? This is something that sometimes will be helpful for us, but other times could be very annoying and we will not want that to happen. So the question here is, how can avoid these to happen? If I click Control set for undo this movement, and then I select the cycle and I say right button make group. Then you will see this box around the figure, which means that, that geometry has been placed inside a kind of transparent box. We have to think about groups as boxes, transparent boxes in where our geometry is protected to blue with the rest of the geometry in our drawing. So now, once the circle is selected, I click M for moving this entity. One-click here, I move the cycle along the red X tilde the corner exactly the same as I did before. Another click here. Here we have the cycle placed on the same plane as the rectangle. But now if I select the selection tool and I try to select those surfaces and lines. As you can see, the result now is completely different because the cycle is protected and then it is not blue with a rectangle. So I can move that charcoal independently without the fear about create intersections between the different geometry. Our cycle is independent inside that box and our rectangle remains untouched. So this is the main purpose about creating groups. Furthermore, if we wanted to apply changes inside our groups, we should go to the group selected. You will see how our box is now made by a dotted line, which means that we are already inside the box, inside the group. So we can touch our geometry and we can work use while making the transformation or the changes that we want. E.g. here I stood that cycle in order to create a cylinder. And then the box is adapting to that new geometry. If I wanted to go out from this box, from this group, then I would go to the selection tool and I click out of the group. And here we are. What about components? Components is like a group with more properties. So our geometry will be protected by a box as well. But it will have, as I said, more properties. Let's create a polygon, e.g. this hexagon. I will click on the surface right button river faces because I want this white side towards me. We will talk about this in another class, and then I will place this geometry inside a component or say it in another way. I will transform this geometry into a component. For doing this, I will select my geometry right button. And instead of saying make group, we can say make components. We have this option here as well. The main toolbar, which is exactly the same Make Component. Then we have this menu create components in where we can write a definition, name, description, and we have more different options. We will see all of them in a specific class about components. But now I will say just create. Once the component is created, you will see as it happened with the groups, this box around, which will protect our geometry from intersections with other geometries till now, exactly the same as with the groups. So if I move this element to this corner, again, the rectangle will keep untouched. As it happens with our hexagon. But we have here a component and not a group. And the main property about components is that if I copy any of them, Let's do e.g. three copies and I make any change in any of them. It doesn't have to be that change in the original one. Let's do a change, e.g. in this second copy, I go in, I select the surface, I click for post and pull, click unreleased. And I create this 3D model. As you can see already, these changes inside this component is affecting the rest of the copies. So now I will click Space key, one-click outside of the components. Here we are. As you can imagine, the use of components in SketchUp is going to be key for drawing, let's say in an intelligent way. Because many times we will find modeller elements and we will need that our changes will be applied not just in that geometry, but in all the elements similar to them. I'm talking about windows, frames or doors or bathrooms, PLRs, etc, etc. So we will finish the class here. And in the next episode, we will talk about another important concept, as it is the outliner Default tray. We will find that here. And it will help us to understand better the structure of our drawing. And I'm talking about these three elements that we have seen already. The first one would be simple geometry or free geometry. It is free because it is not inside any box, e.g. this rectangle we have here. And other elements would be groups. And the third element would be components. 15. Outliner : Hello everyone. Welcome to this new class in where we're going to talk about the Default tray called outliner. We will continue with the drawing as we left it in the last episode. So we said that we have here three different entities or concepts. We have these free geometry because it is not inside a box. It is not inside a group or a component, which can be considered as well as real geometry because we can touch it. The key is that we can touch, not geometry. We have our group and we have our component. If we expand, they outline their tray. We will see here that geometry represented by different names and icons, e.g. now, this component is selected and we can see here how this element is selected as well. This component has this name, component one, the icon for a component. And the component, it is like this rectangle in black divided in four pieces. If we select the next one, we can see inside the drawing that element has been selected. So we can work in our tool when directly with the geometry placed in our Canvas. Or we can go to this outliner tray and select elements from here, erase elements from here, because e.g. if I click right button, I will find many more options as erase, hi, look, explode, make a unique, as I said, many different options that we can select from here. Let's say e.g. erase. The element has been erased, it, now it disappears from our outliner tray. We have just three components. This one, this one, and this one. And then we have a group. The group, the default name is gonna be group. And the icon for representing groups is this black rectangle not divided in different pieces. As it happens with components, we can hide and unhide easily those entities using these eyes. And as you can see, what we find here is that free geometry, the free geometry we have to take in mind that is not represented inside the outliner tray. Here, we will find just components and groups till here, easy, but our drawings can be much more complex. Let's do an example. Imagine that I select these three components, right button. And I say that I want to create a group, a box to place the three of them inside this group. Here we are. Now we have that box which includes these three components. Let's check how this is represented in our outliner. Now we have another group which is already selected and we have this arrow already expanded. So inside this group, we have three components. I can collapse the arrow and then we see just the name of the group. We already know that inside this group there is something else. Because we have this arrow. I click again here. I'll expand the group and I see what is going on inside. This is very, very important because in many cases, you will work with drawings which haven't been drawn by you. Maybe you are downloading a model from the warehouse. And usually they are very, very complex with many groups inside groups and components altogether. And thanks to the outliner, we will be able to understand the structure of throwing in a much more easy way a part of creating groups. We can destroy those groups, those boxes, those component boxes, we have gas to select the element, the group right button explode. Then that group has disappeared and the elements are now, lets say free, they are not into another box. To understand this better, I think that it could be helpful if you imagine this kind of, let's say, organisation as something that you already use every day when you organize your stuff in your computer, placing your different files into different folders. Here I made this example for you. Currently, I am in windows inside one folder called group one. Inside this folder, which could be any group in SketchUp, that box, just the box inside the box, inside the folder, we have more things. Those things could be free geometry, e.g. these files or more boxes. Those boxes could be components or groups. If I want to work with the geometry, I have to go inside the box, right? Like it happens here. So I should go to group number two, e.g. click Select. Go inside, then I will find the real geometry, in this case, the real files. One PDF, which could be a rectangle, a palm tree, a house, a wall, whatever. But it is the real geometry, what I call free geometry. And here we have another piece of geometry. In this case, another file. Once I am here, if I want to go back, I need to go out from this group one step back, which means that now I am outside from that group number two, but I am still inside this group number one. And then here I will find another box, in this case a component. And inside this box I will find more geometry, more files. Again, one step back for going inside group number one in where I can find as well real geometry already, because this geometry wouldn't be inside any box. In this case, files, which we can already open and work with them. If I go one step back from here, then I would go to the Desktop. In SketchUp. It could be like our canvas. The plays in where there is no boxes selected, even one here. So let's represent that example here in a schizo, we have one group, so I will put everything together inside one group. Inside that group. Number one, we have in Windows, another group and another component and some free geometry. So I will go inside this group. We have another group. We have free geometry, which can be touched and we can transform this geometry. And we had another component, just one more. Note three. So I will erase this element and another element. We have just one more component. We go to the outliner, we can see the group, group number one in Windows. Another group called group number two in Windows, Let's put the same name, rename Group one. Here, rename Group two, component, rename component one. The fried geometry is not shown here as I told you, because it is not directly inside another group. If I go inside any of these boxes, e.g. let's start with this group number two. Click, click. We will find the real geometry which can be transformed because we can touch it in the Windows example, we had two files to different files. Here we have just one element, so I could draw another element here. As you can see, the box is adapting itself to this new size to cover all the elements inside. But at the same time in the outliner that real geometry is not represented just the boxes. Once we are inside the group and we want to go one step back, we need to choose the selection tool, one click outside from that box, and then we are already one step back is still inside the group. Number one, we can now go inside this another box called component one. If I click twice, I go in. And then in Windows we had as well two elements. So I will draw another element. Another element is placed inside that box called component one. Again, is not represented in the outliner. If I want to go back using just the Outliner, I can do it. I can select group number one or even I can select on title. And now I am outside any group. Like if we were in the desktop and we haven't selected any folder yet. So as you can see, using the outliner could be very, very helpful. Well, time to say goodbye. And in the next episode, we will continue talking about another concept, the last one before we start drawing, which is called reverse faces. 16. Reverse faces : Hello everybody and welcome to this new episode in where we are going to talk about another concept which is called Reverse Faces. Well, when you are drawing in SketchUp, you will see many times that your faces are colored either in white or this kind of gray or blue color. This is because, as you already know, SketchUp is facing modeller, not as solid Modeller. So it is treating each phase individually. And we can say that its phase has two sides, the front side, the backside, by default, the front side is white, this one, and the backside is this kind of gray or blue. If I select any phase and I go to Entity Info tray, you will see here those thumbnails representing those two sites. The first one for the front side and the second one for the backside. Right now, they are both the same because it is selected this default style. But if I apply any color, I go to materials, select. I go here and I say colors, and I choose e.g. this pink, I apply this pink to this backside phase, then as it is still selected, you can see here that color for the backside and this another default style for the front side. Here it is represented those two colors, the white and that blue color for the backside. So the thing here is that it's very common that when we are drawing a sketch up randomly, Our Faces take the backside color when we actually want that front color towards us. And then is when we have to use that to call reverse phases, Let's do it. E.g. here with the cube. On the left side, we have this cube with all the phases using the front color. And on the right side, we have just the opposite example, my advice here, and you will see during the course that I will do it every single time is to fix this situation immediately. So it will become like a habit for you to reverse the phase. Place the front color to us, the camera, e.g. here, if I click on this face and I say right bottom, and I go to reverse faces, then this phase is already fixed. Then I should do the same everywhere here. I select all the faces, right bottom reverse phases. Here we are. Maybe you are thinking what is the reason for doing this? Firstly, is because it is very good to have your drawing organized, but at the same time, having the backside color to us, you might have bad consequences in terms of performance when you are exporting your SketchUp file to our rendering software or our 3D printer. Both of them use that information for pointing a normal vector towards the interior or the exterior. So it could end up in an error here in a SketchUp actually doesn't matter so much. E.g. if we are applying materials and I will recover those backside phases. And now I'm going to materials select. Let's pick up e.g. this brick antique texture. I will select with three clicks, all the entities connected here. Then letter B for the Paint Bucket Tool, one-click. Here we have this texture applied to the cube. I can do exactly the same to this another queue and there will be no differences. So we can think that it is not needed to do this reverse faces. But as I already told you, the problems will appear when we export this cube to our rendering software or a 3D printer. In my experience, not always those problems will ACU, but it does exist the possibility of the error. Another tool related with this Reverse Faces is called orient faces. Here, e.g. in this cube, we can check how this phase is currently oriented, but the rest are not. Instead of choosing every single wrong phase and fix them, I can choose the correct one, right bottom orient faces. And then the program is intelligent enough to recognize all the phases connected to our selection and orient them in the same direction as our reference. Finally, if I go to Styles, I will collapse the entity Info. Here, you will find, first of all, a thumbnail about the default style with those color I told you the white and the blue one. But my tip here is going to Edit and here go to face settings. Here you will be able to change and customize that front and back color, creating your own style or modifying the one you are using at that moment. So I'll click on this color and I will change e.g. this red. Or I can go to the color wheel and say that I want this red all the time with the purpose of making that backside color much more different than the front color. Furthermore, if I go to style and I click this option, displays said that he using all same, which can be found here as well. Then you will be able to spot Where are you using that back side color and then fix it. E.g. in this cube, where we applied that brick texture, three clicks, pattern, reversed faces, it is already corrected. And then I can go back to this, say that with textures option. Now that brick texture is applied inside the queue for spotting this backside color's faces, we will be able to use as well. And let's say automatic tool, which is not native from SketchUp, it is an extension. It is called solid inspector and then it will be easier and faster. But we will see that when we talk about plug-ins. Now, it's time to say goodbye. In the next episode, we will jump to another block of information and we will start drawing in SketchUp using the line tool and freehand tool. 17. Lines and freehand : Hello, nice people and welcome to this new episode in where we are going to learn how to draw using these first tool we have here, as it is the line tool, we will use as well, this free hand tool. But to be honest, the most important one here is without any doubt, the line tool, the shortcut. We already know that it is the letter L. And once we hit on it, first thing that we have to do is just one single click, release and then move around our mouse, then a second click in my desired position, and I would have my first line. So first tip here is when you draw a line, click your left button and release. Then move your mouse till the second point and second click. Because another option could be to click and drag holding down the mouse and then release wherever you want. But the thing here is that you can't draw a continuous line. You have to start again, can drag, holding the mouse, then released. And as you can see, you are starting a new line. Instead of this. If I click and release and then I move around my mouse, when I choose my second point, I can still continue drawing this shape using the same line, which is very handy and useful. Furthermore, if I use this way for drawing lines, and I will repeat the same operation, one click and release. And then I can move my mouse around the space. I can as well type a precise length on the lower right corner, e.g. 20 m, Enter. And here we are. If I want to now to release this line, I should be asked tap either escape or the Space key. So remember when you add row in SketchUp, it is a good policy, not just with this tool, but with all the drawing tools. Click and release. Instead of click and drag, I will erase everything here. And let's continue drawing lines. But this time, I would like to point out one very important tip, as is the use of the axis when we are drawing our lines. So e.g. one first click here, and then if I move my mouse around on one moment, my line will become green, which means, of course, that line now is parallel with the green axis. Second click, and here we have our line escape. And I will repeat this operation, but this time, drawing the line parallel to the red X. In addition to this, I can lock their access well, using the arrow keys, e.g. one-click here and then left arrow, and you will see that the line becomes thicker. So if I move my mouse around, the line is still parallel with the green axis. And at the same time, I can use the inference that is SketchUp is suggesting mean. Summing up the left arrow is going to look the green axis, up arrow is going to look the blue one, and right arrow is going to look the red one. So this is very useful because when we're drawing NSAID, we can use The looking access to and at the same time, SketchUp is going to give us some inference, e.g. here, if we want that line the same length as its parallel one click, then we'll stop that line exactly at that point. And we can close our setup easily, as you can see now, if I move my mouse along any line, the SketchUp is going to snap some important points as the mid point of the line or the end point. Furthermore, if I choose the line and I click right button, I could use this divide tool, one click, then the line will be divided into equally spaced length. If I move my mouse, I will change the number of segments. In addition to this, I could type in the number of segments in the lower right corner, Let's say e.g. four, Enter. And if I select my line again, you will see how the line has been divided into four segments, into four pieces. This is one way for dividing a line, but I could do it in another way. I will click letter L. I will use the inference to start my line at this 0.1 single click on second point here for making this line the same length as its product. Now this line is a continuous line, but you have to take in mind that if I draw another line which is in contact with this previous one, e.g. this one. Then I have a split up the line into two pieces, 1.2, I will repeat this operation. One-click here, second click, and then the line is splitted into two different pieces. So either I can divide a line or heal that line and make the line continues again. For doing this, I should just select that it's drawn off the line and belated, then the line has been healed. The same here. Here we are. Having your line continues. Normally, it's gonna be good for you. If I select the line and I go to Entity Info here, I can check the length of that line. If the line is divided, I will not find here the complete length at the same time when my line is divided, like in this example, when I use the Post poll tool. Here you will see how those segments become vertical lines and divide my surface. So now I should use the erase tool and fix the surface at the end. More work, Let's jump now into the next tool, the free hand tool, which I have to say that it is very simple. In my experience, in my work experience, I haven't used this so much in order to use it. Instead of click unreleased. This time we should click and hold the mouse. Then we move the mouse creating the shape. And finally, as always, we need to close the line in order to create our surface. Here we are. Once here. Of course, we can extrude the elements and create a 3D model. We will finish the class here, and in the next episode, we'll talk about the rectangle tool, the rotated rectangle, the circle on the polygon. 18. Tape measure tool: Hello everybody and welcome to this class in where we are going to see a very important tool which will be used in many different cases. This tool is the tape measure tool. This will be the first tool that we're going to learn because actually it will help us a lot in order to draw correctly in Sketch. Firstly, you must know that it has four properties. Measure distances, create guidelines, or guide points on a scale, the entire model. Let's analyze all of them. The first thing that we can do and the most obvious one is to measure things. So if I zoom in here and I want to measure e.g. this side of this rectangle, I have just to select this tool by tapping the letter P, that is the shortcut letter T. And then you will be able to play with the control key, tiny guideline, icon appear or disappear. You want to measure things. You will have to make icon disappear. Then just one click and release on the first point. And you don't even need to click for the second time. You just need to hover the mouse over that second point and have a look on the length measure bar. Here we have 3 m, so there is no secret here. Very easy. So let's jump into the next property. Create guidelines or guide points. Let's go with the guidelines. In order to create a guideline, I should tap the Control key. Then that guideline appears next to the measure tool. Then I will have to choose a previous ads are lying on my drawing to create a parallel with it. E.g. I. Choose this edge, then one-click unreleased. I move the mouse to any direction I can even type in. Let's say 0.5 m. This lines will be used as references. We will not use them for drawing, but as a reference, e.g. now I can choose another drawing to ask the rectangle. And now I have that reference for creating this next rectangle, 0.5 m far from the previous one. In addition to this, you should know that when we are using these guidelines, Let's do it now with this q and with this. As far as in this case, this auxiliary line could be parallel with the red axis or the green axis. I could tap as well the arrow keys to constrain unspecific axis, left arrow, e.g. and I'm locking this green axis, right arrow, and I am looking this red axis. I could use as well the sift key in order to hold the axis in where I'm moving at that moment. In this case, I have to hold down shift key. Finally, for using this tool correctly, I can support myself as well on the general axis, if I need a vertical auxiliary line, I could use this blue axis, one click and release, and then I can create a parallel with it. My advice here is that once you have finished with your guidelines, delayed immediately, all of them in order to sort out your drawing. So click on delayed and click ambulate. Let's go now with the next property, guide points. This is similar to guide lines, but with some differences. In order to create a guide point, we should hit the tool. And instead of clicking on any point of one Eds, we have to go to the end points of a line, e.g. here, here. Or if we have a line which has been drawn in two pieces, 1.2, this line has one piece here, another piece here. So we have 12.3 end points from any of them, we can create a guide points letter T, I'll choose my end point. And then as I was doing with the guideline, I just need to select the direction and the length, the distance, let's say 1 m here, e.g. Enter. And this point will appear, it looks like as a guide line, but it is not. This dotted line is the kind of track for guiding us to this point. Here the geometry that matters is this element, this cross, this point, this is the point, the rest, this dot line is nothing just attract for. I've been asked to find the point. Once we have the point, we can use it. E.g. if we want to draw a cycle and we need the center of this article, we know that it should be there. Here we are. Let's go now through the fourth property, a scale, the entire model. We will practice with this tool quite a lot in the future. So don't worry if you don't understand perfectly now the tool, but I'll give you a preview of it. Imagine that we measure this Q, this is the first property of the measure tool. I don't need that guideline icon, so I tap Control key, it disappears. Then I measure, this, adds one single click. I hover over this second point. I don't need to click for the second time, 3 m. And then I want this q to be 5 m instead of three. With this tool, I will be able to resize this ends of the queue. But the thing here is that I will resize the entire model as well. So the same scale will be applied to all the geometry in my drawing, except one thing called external components. And that is an important exception. Let's do an example here. I go to the full tray components. Here I will take e.g. this guy called cris. One click, I move the mouse into the screen. I place this man here on the origin. This guy is considered by SketchUp as an external component. Let's measure how tall is here, 1.74 m at the same time, Let's measure e.g. these ads of this rectangle, 1.53. Okay? Now let's re-scale the size of the queue and we will check how this affects the rest of the model. So one-click here, first point, second click here on the end point. Then I have to type in the length. I want 5 m Enter. And this window will pop up asking me this question, do you want to resize the model? Note that components within the model that we're loaded from external files will not be resides. This node is talking about this guy. Yes. Everything was resized. Now is bigger except these external component. We can check it by measuring things. Control key, first point, I hover over the second 0.5 m. The, it has been resized. But the rest of the geometry to the rest of the queue and the rest of the things, e.g. this site was 1.53, now is bigger. But when we check this man, how tall is he? It is exactly the same, 1.75. So now that we have this knowledge about this important tool, we are ready for going ahead and in the next episode, we will start learning how to draw using the line tool. 19. Rectangles, circles, polygons: Hello everybody. In this class, we will talk about this drawing tools, the Rectangle Tool, this rotated rectangle, which actually is very, very simple. They're cycle and the polygon, which are very related between each other. So let's just start with a rectangle, one-click. And now again you have the possibility of one single click and release, which is the good one as you already know. Or click and drag and release when you want to finish, your rectangle will use the first 11 click and release. Then, as you can see in the dimensions bar on the lower right corner, we have their different dimensions separated by a semicolon. The first dimension talks about the red acts, as you can see here, 3.29 m now and 1.27 for the green box, the second one is the green axis. So we can draw this rectangle rapidly, or we can type in a precise length for each dimension, e.g. 3 m semicolon. And this is very important to type in semicolon. Again, three Enter. Here we are our rectangle, which actually is an a squared. This rectangle is based in four years or four lines. We could have used the Line tool as well, but with a rectangle, normally is gonna be faster. And in the anterior we have our surface. What else can we do with the rectangles letter R? And then let's try to draw a rectangle, but placed not in the ground floor, but in another plane. When you are going to draw a rectangle, you will see our pencil. And near the pencil, this rectangle in a blue color right? Now, this blue color is because the rectangle is gonna be drawn in a plane perpendicular to the blue axis. Here we are. If I orbit, then I place the camera in front of another plane. Let's say, for instance, displaying based on the blue axis and the red axis. My rectangle tool is changing the color and now the color is green, which means that the rectangle is going to be perpendicular to the green axis. Exactly the same is going to happen if I place the camera in front of this and other plane, the color changes to the red color. And then my sake is going to be perpendicular to the red axis. This time the rectangle was placed so far away. Anyway, I will erase everything. I think it is clear this concept. So let's jump into the next tool. They're rotated rectangle. This rotated rectangle needs three points, but firstly, we can see a protractor in our drawing in a blue color. That means again that we are growing in a plane perpendicular to the blue axis. So first click here, second click e.g. here. Then my protractor change the color now is green. And if I move the mouse, we will see how this rectangle is making a plane with some rates, with some angle. If I keep my mouse still, we will find a level will of the information, the angle, the length, and the width. Second click, or better said thirst click. And here we are our rectangle. To be honest, this tool is not one of the important ones because for doing this kind of draw wins, we will use the normal rectangle or even the line. So let's jump into the next one, this trichome letter. For the shortcut. Once we have chosen the tool, the first thing that we have to check is the measurements bar. This time we will find a level, say insights, and the number 24. This means that our circle is base font 24 sites. I will draw it for you here. And you will see that this perimeter is not a perfect curve, is not smooth at all. It's more a polygon, right? So we have here those 24 sites. This is not good at all because we'll be able to appreciate this roughness, these sharp P in our drawing or even later when we print it. So what we have to do is to go back to another tool, Let's say e.g. the selection tool, then cycle again. It appears the side bar with a number 24. Then in this moment, not before, not later, we type in the number of sites that we want for our cycle. I recommend you 50. 50 is enough for making a smooth curve. And at the same time, if we write e.g. 100, we will generate too many sites, too much geometry at the end, and our file will become heavier and heavier and difficult to move for the graphic card. So as a habit are cycles will be 50 sites, one single click, then I move the mouse, now is the correct moment for the radius. I will type the radius in the bar, let's say e.g. 2 m to enter. Here we are, and you can check how this time our perimeter is much more smooth. Of course, any cycle is based in two different dimensions. Where is the center of the circle and the perimeter? Once I have my circle, if I use the line tool e.g. I. Can find the center of the cycle, but sometimes it's not that easy. E.g. here you can see how SketchUp is not being able to snap that center. Then one tip here, you should go to the perimeter, stay there for a couple of seconds, and then go back to the center. Here we are suddenly pops up and then we can use it for creating our next geometry. Finally, let's jump to the polygon tool, which is very similar to the cycle. They are more or less the same tool, but with tiny differences. Once you heat it, you will see number of sides. By default, we have six sides. This is an hexagon. And if we want to change this polygon, then we have just two right here. In this precise moment, the number of sites we want for our polygon, let's say e.g. eight. Enter. Now, the little drawing near our tool is changing. We have eight sites, an octagon, one single click release, and second single click. Again, we can use here the measurements bar for typing in the precise length of the radius. As you can see, all of these tools are very easy and intuitive to use. We will finish the class here, and in the next episode, we will see the tools created for drawing arcs and what is more important for drawing curves in SketchUp, if we want to draw a curve, we will have to use an arc. At least if we just want to use the native tools when we become more experts in the software in SketchUp. Then we will download different plugins in order to create curves easily, faster, and more precise. But at this very moment, we need to know how to use the native tools and arts are quite important. 20. Arcs : Hello everyone and welcome to this new episode in where we're going to talk about the arcs. We have four tools for the arcs. The most important ones without any doubt, or the first two, this one and this one. And in my opinion, this second one is even more important. So I will leave this tool for the end of the class. Let's start then with the arc from center and two points. One-click here. Then it appears that protractor, in my case, with the blue color due to the position of my camera here, pay attention because if we normally click and release, we have the protractor on the screen. It means that we have the possibility about changing that color by clicking and dragging. So if I click here and I drag, I am keeping hold down the left button of my mouse. Then I will be able to change the color of that protractor. And by doing this, I am choosing where I want to draw that arc. Let's say here in the red one, then I have to release the plane and the center of the arc is already 2AM. And then SketchUp is asking me the length of that arc from the center. And of course, I can type in that length in the measurements bar. And I can choose as well, the direction. Let's put it on the ground floor and I will type in 3 m length, enter the second point of the art is already chosen as well. It Mrs. just the third one. And as long as I'm moving the mouse, we can see it already on the screen, right? Let's do a quarter cycle or we can even type in again the angle measurements by third click and release. And here we have our arc drawn on the plane perpendicular to the red axis. And with all of the specifications we have been deciding together during the drawing process. If I go closer to the arc, we will see that as it happened with the right call, this arc is Sharpie made by different actors. So it doesn't give us the feeling of a curve. The reason of this is because when we choose the tool first option that we can change is the number of sides. By default, we have 12 sites for the arcs and that is at all, we were to change that number to at least 24. The double I alluded to before Enter. Then I will repeat the same operation. Click and drag, read protractor, I released second point, third point, creating a quarter cycle. Here we are. And now this arc is much more smooth. If we want more sites, of course, we can do it depending always on the level of our drawing. Let's jump now into this next tool, Pi, which is exactly the same as this previous one, but the tool will generate a surface. Once we have finished our arc, I will show you, I will repeat the same arc. Click and hold read. Protractor released on the green axis, 3 m length. I move my mouse quarter cycle. Third click here we are our arc. But at the same time, this tool generated the surface because we have of course, those two lines for closing the surface and create this way, this kind of quarter. Alright, nice. Let's jump now to this next option, three-point arc. To be honest, I have barely use this tool in my work experience, but I have to show you. So thanks to this tool, you will be able to draw an arc through three points, which all of them are part of the same circumference. Click and release. Click and release. We have two. Then the circumference pops up and we have just to click again for the third time. In this example, again, we find our arc very sharp P. So we could go back to the tool, check the number of sites that we are using. Once we have changed That number of sites, the file will remember, and we will not have to do it again just in case that we open a new file. In that case, yes. Let's go finally over these main Arc tool to point arc. One-click. I will move here till this side and I will draw my first arcs on the ground floor, one single click. I will hold myself on the green axis. Second click, and then I move my mouse and I can choose to draw along the red axis. Or if I move the mouse along the blue one. Besides, I can type in the lens or do it graphically. Let's do it graphically this time. So third click, and here we are easy to draw. But the most important thing here is that we can keep drawing Arts in a continuous way and then create a more, let's say, sophisticated curve. Let's do it again. But this time, fixing the number of sides of our arc space key for going to the selection tool. Then I go back to these specific two-point Arc tool. I can check that the number of sides is 12th. Let's say 24. Enter one first, single click, second single click, third, single click. Now let's continue the curve. First. Single click on the nth point. And then when I move my mouse around, you will see that the color of the arc now is the meaning of this is that that arc is tangent to the previous curve, to the previous arc. Tangent here is a very, very important word because if you know a little bit about the geometry, when we have two curves, tangent between each other means that the curve is continuous. So we read to have a complex curve, not a polygon. Now, just 1 s. Click e.g. here, and look what is going on here. The second click was correct. But then the tool is asking me again for the length of this high. If I want that arc to be tangent to the previous one, then I have to look for that cyan color. Click again. Here we are. Actually I can do it easily if I click twice. In my second click, when I am here, I will show you control set for going one step back, then first click, second click. And if I don't move, either need to be fast. But as soon as I move the mouse, then I lose my color and I have to find it again. But if I don't move it, second click, click here, we are a perfect curve. To finish this class, we will practice this tool, but this time inside our rectangle. Because here I will show you another thing to point arc tool. Then my first click here at any point along the line. And look what is going on. Again, the CRM color, which means that this arc, this curve is tangent to the x. What ads? The ads immediately behind the arc? This case, this EDS, I am pointing out, the arc is automatically done the end that S. And furthermore, if I move the mouse still this next Ed's, then I can find this another color, this magenta color. The meaning of this curve is that the arc, the curve is tangent to both edges. The one behind the arc and the one in front of the arc. Of course, if I move my mouse, I can easily lose that color. So second click here. And again, if I don't move the mouse and I click for the third time, the arc is already drawn tangent to both edges and automatically SketchUp erased that left corner. So let's repeat this same operation on this corner. First single click. Then we have our arc tangent to that. Behind us. We choose the second click, always alone, this another EDS. And then we move the mouse till we find the imagined color once we are here, second click. If we move the mouse here, we lose the color, but we can find it again with a little effort. Here we are. Once we have the color search click on, the arc is already drawn. This time this gets up, didn't erase the left corner. This is something that is SketchUp does randomly. So don't, don't take it seriously. And if we want to erase this corner, we can do it by ourselves. Just hit the selection tool and we can relate this easy. So time to say bile. We have already feelings all the drawing tools placed here. And in the next class, we will see this toolbar called styles. And thanks to it, we will be able to have more control about the aspect and the properties of our surfaces. 21. Styles : Hello everyone and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see a toolbar called styles. This toolbar is here, already expanded. If you don't find it, remember you have to go with the mouse still here, right button. Then you will find styles. This toolbar actually is part of a more important Default tray called styles as well. We can find it here. I will give you an, a specific class about this tray because it is kind of long. But you should know that here we can find three levels, select it, and mix. If I go over edit, we could change the font color and the color of our surfaces. We saw this already. And in the lower part we have this toolbar style. This toolbar is exactly the same than the one here, the one we're going to use right now. Let's focus right now on these styles toolbar. I will place it here horizontally. It is more comfortable for me. And you will find that at this very moment, the oxygen, which is heat, is this one with that blue color around, right? If we hover, the mouse over, this bottom level will pop up with a very nice explanation about how this option works. So in this case, it is called say that with textures in the description, it is said display the model with textures, faces. As we already know that in SketchUp we have mainly two entities, lines or edges and surfaces. With this option, we will be able to display our model with all the textures applied on the surfaces. And at the same time, we will be able to watch all the edges. I said, Oh, but if we look carefully our model, we can notice how the hidden edges are not visible because the textures from the surfaces are covering them at the same time. If we are talking about the textures, we can see here in this first block that we have a marble texture, while the rest of the elements are just colors, we can see all of them. Let's jump now to the one on the right side. It is called monochrome display. The model with only front and back faces colors, one single click, and then the model is displayed just using colors assigned by default to the front side of the surface and the backside, we can find those colors here in styles, edit, font, color, black color. Now all the surfaces are using the front color towards the camera. But if I go into this group, I select the surface right button reverse phases, then we will be able to appreciate this back color tube. We talked a little bit about this during the Reverse Faces class. So let's jump now to this third option called just said it. Display the model with solid colored faces, one-click. And as you can see, it is very similar to this, say that with textures, but now we can appreciate lectures from more sophisticated materials than colors. Remember that here in this rectangular model, we have marble, but now using this display mode, marble becomes a gray color just in order to simplify the graphics, the rest of the colors remain untouched. Fourth option, hidden line, hit all back edges and faces colors in the model. One-click. Here, we can find how we lost our surfaces, the textures, and the colors. All the models take this background color. It doesn't mean that the models are transparent and according with the edges, back, edges are hidden, we can't see them. Next option is called wireframe and display. Only ATS in the model, not surfaces, just the edges, which means that the surfaces are transparent. This time completely transparent. And finally, separated by this vertical line, we have two more options. One is called back edges and the other one is called X-ray. These are the most useful in my opinion, if we combine them with e.g. the, say that with textures. So I'll go back here, say that with textures, then I can choose any of them, not before when I was using this wireframe, just because here we don't have surfaces. So once we are with sided, with textures on and we can see the marble, we can see the colors, we can't see the hidden edges. Then we have these two options. Back edges, display the model with back at dusk. One click. And we can see here how this works. This is very useful because it allows us to snap any point from any position, e.g. we are here, we use the line, we want to use. This point, SketchUp can snap it easily. Then from here we continue drawing. If we don't have this option on, it's going to be much more difficult to access that point. We should orbit behind that point. Maybe it's this one and so on. More or less the same. We have this another option called x-ray, which display the model with nobody transparent phases. So here we don't have those hidden edits in a dashed line, but our faces in global transparency, the purpose is the same to have access to different points of the model easily and without the need. Using the orbit tool, which means to work more loose time and don't be so precise as we can see with those tools. So here you have to choose between the x-ray and the bad ideas. Which one is your favorite? My tip here is to use it when you need it. And then when you finish, turn these two off so you can continue working with a very nice workflow. Furthermore, sometimes if you have problems with the speed of your graphic card, because maybe you are working in a very high poly model, then I would suggest you to use e.g. this say that option in where you are going to lose the textures but not the colors. And then the graphic card will work faster in case that you need it. On the other hand, in case that you want to take, if you have any reverse phase in your model, you already know that you have to use this option monochrome, and then it will be super easy to spot out any of them. So till now, I can say that we were talking mainly about surface styles. It is high time for going over the edge styles. We don't have any specific toolbar for this edge styles, but we have two paths for going there. Once we are in the styles editor, then by default, we have this face settings heat, and on its left we have the edge settings, one-click. And from here we can change or we can define the edges of our model at the same time, we can go to View in the menu bar. And here we will find a style just below, we find phase style. This is exactly the same that we have just learned. So let's go to style, and from here, we will be able to turn on the edges, the edges, the profiles, depth, cue and extension. If you look carefully, you will find that it is the same as we can find here, with the difference that from here, from the style stray, we can be more precise, unchanged these numbers, which will change that say the thickness, the length, the aspect of our lines. During this class, we will check these more simple options here and we'll go into the deeper version of the Xist during this, another class about the style tray. At this, if I turn off edges, you can see in our model that we have lost many lines, but not all of them. This is because SketchUp Make a Difference between lines which are placed inside the term of the model. And those other lines called bias ketchup profiles, which we can say that our liked the term e.g. here. In this element, as it is inside a group, in a group box, it is treated individually. And then we can see how those lines around the elements are still there, right? Those the profiles, these profiles, this number two is the thickness. The rest of the lines are the edges. Here we can see them. So if I go back again over view its style and I say profiles off. Now we have zero edges, not edges, not profile's, not even one line, just the surfaces again view its style. And then here we can find as well back edges. You already know what is the mean of this. And depth cue and extensive the depth cue extension have to do with how we are going to represent those lines in order to create, let's say more artistic graphics. What is important for us now is just to understand edges, back edges, and profiles. Of course, we need to turn on edges in order to play with the back edges as well. Here we are. This option actually is the same as if we go to the style toolbar and we hit say that with textures and then back edges on. So I could turn off bad ideas from here or go to View style back edges off. Now at this very moment, profiles are off. This is something that I really like because profiles actually, in my opinion, don't make any sense. I mean, just to have a big line as I can turn around our models plus the MDS, It is like something completely unuseful. So when I work, I always switch off profiles. We will see how to do it automatically creating our own style by default. But from today on, I recommend you to switch off profiles and work just using the edges. Look the difference. I turn on profiles and then we have those thick black lines around the perimeter of all the models. And when I turn, profiles of lines are thinner and similar to each other. If you want to check even better these profiles, we can turn them on and then increase this value, this number to, let's say number ten. Enter. Here you can see perfectly where those lines are in our drawing. So better suites of profiles. I'm to say goodbye. In the next class, we will do our first exercise where we will practice all of the theory that we have been learning till now. 22. Eraser : Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to talk about a very important, useful, handy earn, a little bit complex tool. It is the eraser, it is here, eraser and you can read erase often or smooth entities in the model. But actually, it can do even more things. So it will allow us not just to erase. Here, we have a list of things that this tool can do. Erase, select, Hide, soft and smooth. And a part of this, it is related with a tray called soft edges. So we will see all of these things. I will make you think a little bit so be ready. First of all, we can erase. This is the main thing that we will do with this tool, of course. So let's practice with this cube letter E for heating the tool using the shortcut. And then you will see that the tool has a tiny circle near the rubber. And actually that little circle is the one which matters. With that little cycle. We will erase things. Here. The mechanism will be click and drag, not click, unreleased. I click drag. And then when I go over any edge and I said It's not surface, ads will be illuminated or better said, selected. And then when I release, I have just erased that. And pay attention here because the only thing that we erased was this EDS. But as we saw in another chapter when we talked about lines and surfaces in SketchUp, these EDS, this line is holding two surfaces, the one on the right side and the one on the left side. And I point out this because you have to understand that this tool is going to delay it. Just lines or edges, not surfaces. I can click and drag over this surface, e.g. and nothing happens. But when I move the mouse over any ads, then all of them have been selected. And when I released, they are delighted. And then the surfaces they were holding our delighted to hear e.g. now I have just these leftovers which are lines. They are not holding any surfaces. So if I click and drag and I really, only that, it will be delighted. Right? Let's jump now into the next option. Select. This is a very interesting property of this tool, which just few people know. It can be super, super useful. So if I tap letter T, again, I hit the tool and then I repeat the same process as before. Click and drag. I move the mouse over different edges. They are selected. And we know that if I release now, they will be delighted. But if instead of relief, I tap the space key, then I maintain the selection and they haven't been the later, right? So I have used the eraser for selecting these edges. I can assure you that it is a very handy way for selecting things. Imagine e.g. that I have to do it just by clicking and clicking, using Shift and clicking and clicking. I will always have to be super precise because I have to click on the line, not on the surface. So in my opinion, this way for selecting things is much more easier, faster, and even relaxing. I repeat, you just have to click and drag, go over the idea is you want to select and before release, tap the space key, time to jump into the next property. Hi, with the eraser, we will be able to hide entities in a SketchUp. Actually hide is a tool that we can use apart from the eraser, it is, let's say independent. We can find it if we go over edit, hide, and unhide. First of all, we need to choose what we want to hide, e.g. let's say this entire 3D model. So I make a selection box, edit height if I want to unhide this element, again, edit, in this case unhide. And we can choose if we want to unhide the last entity or all, let's say e.g. last. Doesn't matter. And now let's do it using the eraser letter E. And then I have to hold down Shift while I click and drag over the edges I want to hide. Because again, the eraser is about edges, is not about surfaces. So e.g. I. Am hiding all of these ideas I released. And then you can see the 3D model with those edges hidden, not all, just the ones I selected. If I go over edit, unhide, all they will appear again on the 3D model. Furthermore, if I make R group here, I select all the elements, right button, make group. If I feed the eraser again and I go over the element, you will see that I am selecting not just one, but the entire books. So now it is up to me either if I want to delete the entire books or just hide it by holding shift this time I decided to hide it. So if I go to Edit unhide, it will appear. Let's move now to the next option. So often and smooth. This time for soft ten and smooth, we will have to hold down Control key. Remember that you can check all of this information on the files attached with a course. In this case, you better go to the shortcuts episode. You will find there this J peg here. If you go through the eraser, you will be able to check all of these shortcuts. Control for soft and smooth sift, for hiding, Sift plus control and soften and smooth. What soft and smooth do in SketchUp? What is the purpose of this tool? Well, so often is super, super similar or better said, it is exactly the same as high, we will be able to hide edges of our model. But this time we can say that it is a kind of property for the Ed's while we were using hide for hiding different elements, groups, components, even surfaces if we choose it before, the software tool is just an internal property of the SDS. So if I select it and I go over Entity Info, here, I will find information about this. Ed's the texture, the tag, the length, and two boxes, soft and smooth. Because soft and smooth are properties of the LTS. If I select a surface, these properties will not be here because the surface is something different. So coming back to the ED, if I click on the soft box, this element will disappear. And it is actually like it is hidden, but actually it is not. If I go to Edit and hide all, it will not appear because we are working now with a property of the Ed's. The meaning is the same. This property is hiding the edge, yes, but they are both different categories. So if I want to recover this Ed's, how can I do it? Because now I can't select it again and go over Entity Info and unclick that box. So I should go over view hidden geometry. If I show the hidden geometry, then that will appear under this new aspect. Now it is adult line. You can find here different hidden geometry in which this curve, this arc is based on. Anyway, what matters to us now is that if we focus on these ads, just on this, now, I can select it again. And once it is selected, I can go over Entity Info and unclick the soft box. Now it is not so often anymore. So if I go again over view and I unclick, hidden geometry is again here with us. I think it is clear. So let's jump into the next property of the edges. Smooth. I'll go over view hidden geometry. Then I will select these different vertical lines in which this curve is based on. Because in a SketchUp, you better know that curves, perfect curves don't exist. They are all the time, many different straight lines altogether creating this way the filling of a curve. And that is the key for understanding the concept under this smooth tool. Smooth tool is created by SketchUp in order to render the different shapes. In a way in where we can believe that we are watching a curve and organic model, not a 3D model, based on different polygons. So if I select this hidden geometry and I will do it using the eraser as we have already learned, space key. And then I check the entity Info. We will see that these Haydn geometry is soften and smooth. Of course, it is because it is an example of a curve in a sketchy. But if I unclick a smooth and I unclick hidden geometry as well. We can appreciate perfectly the different straight planes even when the edges are hidden or soft and better set. But the problem now is that the edges are soft but not a smooth. If I wanted to smooth them, I should go to View Hidden Geometry. Select again this geometry, and this time I will do it using the selection tool, clicking and clicking again, then go to entity Info and say a smooth, here we are. I can unclick hidden geometry and now I have this curve again rendered in a very smooth way. Finally, to finish this episode, I would like to just mention this soft and add yes tray that we can find here on the Default tray. If you don't have it, then you should go to Window Default tray. Here you will find soften edges using these Default tray, we will be able to soften and smooth all the ideas of any object in a very rapid way. Imagine e.g. this cylinder. We already know that the heat and the geometry is soft and smooth. And if we wanted to do the same with the rest of the entire model, we should select it and then go into stuffed and edges and play with this bar. By playing with this bar, it is like if we are clicking on those both boxes so often and smooth, sometimes we can find some leftovers inward is not working the tool, and then we better click on this soft anti-coplanar box. Now my cylinder is completely soft and smooth. But maybe you are wondering yourselves why we have still this around. And you should have the answer as well. Because in the previous class, we saw that in Sketch tab we have two different lines, AD DS and profiles. This line is like the term of the element. It is the profile. Here we are playing just with the head. Yes. We should go to Styles, edit, settings, and switch off profiles. This is another reason for not working with the profiles on. If I go now over view hidden geometry and I select any of the edges of this 3D model, then I go to Entity Info. You can be surprised if you don't find here those boxes, those soft and smooth boxes. And the reason is just because this entity is a cycle, is not an ad. It has actually 24 segments. 24. Yes. Although it is soft and smooth, it doesn't appear here on its properties. We should explode the curve, right button, explode curve, and then we have here 24 edges with those boxes already marked. Anyways, the result is the same. We have all these entities, soft and smooth. This is something that we will use in the future when we work mainly with the reins. Time to say goodbye now. And in the next episode, we will start doing our first exercise in where we will practice many of the tools that we have been learning till now. 23. Exercise 2D: Hello everybody and welcome to this new class in where we are going to do our first exercise, which is going to be quite easy, but it will help us to practice some of the tools that we have been learning till now. We will go to File Import, and here we will hit this image called polygons. And before we will have a look here below where it is right and down. Use Image, Image, Texture, new match for to just remember this menu, by default, we will use the Image option. And if we move over this corner and we expand this window, will find many different formats for the fight that we want to import. If we are talking about images, then the best option is all supported image types. One single click on the image and import here we are. First click on the origin and released. Then we can adjust the scale of the image. We have that lady in order to give us more or less the human scale. Second click. And we have the image already in our SketchUp up file. If I go to Entity Info as far as the image is selected, here we can check some information about it. It is an image, one in the model, the name, in what torque is placed, the resolution, etc, etc. So in order to work in a more comfortable way, and as long as we are going to draw in 2D during this exercise, I'll go over camera parallel projects and then I move the camera to the top view of the model. Picking on here top now is gonna be so easy for me to draw the shapes. I scroll in towards this triangle. Then I have to choose the correct tool, polygon, one-click. And then first of all, I have to type in the number of sides of this triangle, right? In this case, three sites. So three Enter. We can see how the timely drawing has changed. One first single click, I adjust the scale of my triangle more or less. Now my new CEP is covering the mats. So I could use the X-ray style view in order to make transparent my surfaces right, space key for hitting the selection tool. And now I will make this book selection from left to right. Move one first point, scrolling second point. We will go deeper into these Move tool, but I think that you can use it in It's more, let's say simple way, even when we haven't yet gone through it. So let's zoom out, zoom in, and now let's draw this square. We could use the rectangle of course, but I want you to use as well the line. So letter L, first point here, one single click. We move the mouse to the right. This red color pops up, which means that our line is parallel to the red axis. And then now, before clicking for the second time, Let's check the length 1.22 m. Second click and we move down. This time the green color or pops up. We are parallel to the green axis. And now, as far as we want to draw a perfect square, we need this side to be the same length as the previous one right here, I would type in 1.22 Enter and we continue drawing. Now, I will use the tools. So I want this line parallel to the red axis, so I will type the right arrow, the line becomes thicker. So I could go with my mouse to this point in order to get the best of the inference from sketches. Second click here, and now the last line is super easy. Here we have our perfect square pentagon polygon tool. I type in five sites. Enter, I choose the center of the polygon more or less here, one single click, unreleased. Still hear Space key. Select some box M for moving an element, one single click, unreleased. And here we are, zoom-out. I move the mouse towards my desire, destiny, and zooming hexagon, polygon tool six sites center. Here we are. Again, Selection tool for moving my drawing and I will move it a little bit to the left. Now, instead of zoom out and zoom in, I will pan. So I will click and hold down, shift, and I click and hold down as well the will of my mouse so I can pan and I move the camera till the next figure in where I will have to use a new tool, the two-point arc, one first point, second point, click and release, click and release. Click. And we have our first arc. Again, one first click, click, click, and for the first time, one first click. Second click, third click, mild domain. And we do exactly the same operation this time in order to draw in a more precise way this figure, I will use our rectangle here. Pay attention that when we are drawing a rectangle and that diagonal pops up, means that the rectangle is actually a squared, a perfect square. That is exactly what we want. So second click here, and now I could use the auxiliary lines in order to be 100% precise. So one-click here, unreleased. Let's measure the depth of this arc. Let's say 0.25 m. In my case, it will depend on the scale of your image, 0.25. And then I will do the same in every side. 0.20, 50.20, 5.0, 0.25. Now I will use the two point arc. I will change the number of sites instead of 12th, 2041, single click unreleased, second click unreleased. And now I know exactly the length or the depth of the arc. First click here we are. Now, it is very easy and we know that all the arcs are going to be exactly the same. Once I have finished all of my arcs, I should erase the leftovers. So I will click on the eraser, and I will click and drag over all the entities I want to delete. Once I release, all of them will be erased. This is very relaxing, at least for me. Here we are. Let's go with the next shape. Let's span again, this time using the letter H as a shortcut scrolling. And now I will draw a pentagon. So five sites. I would try to guess here the center, more or less here. Second click. And now again, I will use these two point arc because this first option is not going to be useful as far as we have the center. But when we want to draw the arc, the arc is gonna go outside of the figure. So control set to point arc. And this time, instead of using the auxiliary lines, I will be very confused about the depth of the arc. So let's say e.g. if I take the measurement bar, we have 0.12 in my case. So first click and I will repeat that depth. First click, second click 0.12, one-click, click 0.12. I have to repeat this process a few times. And here we are, letter E for the eraser. And I delayed the left overs. Let's go with this, another one, this is an hexagon. So again, polygon, six sides. If I want to infer the center, I could use lines scape. I've hurt myself with the inference to choose this 0.1 single click again, I use the inference. And then in the cross, we have the center of the hexagon. I go to the hexagon, one single click, second click. Now, I will erase these lines to point arc. First. Second, Let's check the depth, 0.17, and we repeat this process five times more. Here we're eraser. We have already drawn. Let's go with the last one, which is this cycle, easy, right? Cycle, sites 24, we can change to 50. Let's guess where is the center? More or less here, radios. Second Click. Here we are. This is all. Now I can orbit, I can change my camera to perspective. We could shoot off the X-ray. Once we have finished. We can even erase the image or place the image in another attack, but we don't know how to do it yet. So let's erase it. And in order to be more organized, I will select all of my shapes and I will create a group, make group. So the exercise is done. In the next class, we will do another exercise where we will increase a little bit the difficulty. 24. Exercise: chess pawn : Hello people. Let's go with this next exercise in where we are going to draw in two D artists ****. So first of all, we have to import an image. I'll go over File Import here. Again, as in the previous exercise, one single click on the image we want to import. Here. We make sure that we are using the image as an image in this window, all supported image types. Then import, first click on the origin, and then we can add just the scale of the image. Here we are. Let's go over camera, parallel projection and top view. Once we are here, we are ready for drawing correctly. So let's use some of the tools that we already learned during the previous lessons. Firstly, we have to draw a cycle here. So cycle sites that say 50, guess more or less. Where is the center of this cycle? One single click and release. Let's go with the radius still here more or less, our surfaces are covering the emails, so I will use the X-ray style. We can check now that our cycle, our circumference. This is still a little bit Sharpie, right? We've changed the sides. Now we have 50, but it's not still smooth enough, in my opinion, at least scale in case that we want to change the number of sites when we have already drawn the say, We can do it just by selecting the element. I'm going to Entity Info. Here. It is said that it is a circle. We already know that the tag, the radius and segments, segments. So here we can say 100 Enter, and now the figure is completely smooth. One single click outside for unselect the element. And let's go with the next. Say. I will pan swimming. And then we can see that all of these elements are based on symmetry. We haven't learned yet how to do symmetries. But anyways, we will take this into consideration. So I will use an auxiliary line in order to draw that symmetry axis, assign it a vertical line. I will draw e.g. a. Rectangle here. Then auxiliary line, one, single click. I move my mouse still the center of the cycle. Second click, and then I have my symmetry axis. Once I have it, then I could use the Rectangle tool, e.g. letter r. From this point till here, I will check my dimensions because I want the same length for these right rectangle than for the left rectangle. Here we have 0.53, right? Second click, and I will repeat this rectangle to us the other side, then it is time for the cycle letter C, sites 50, we can say 100 if we want, then I sue in mid point radius still here, and we repeat the same drawing in this other side. Then letter E for the eraser, click and drag in order to delete all the edges. I don't want for deleting these ads. If I use the eraser, I will delete as well the cilia line. So then the space key and I will create a selection box from left to right to select just all the complete objects. Then my head is selected and I tap delayed and it is done. Let's go now with this Another big shape. First of all, be careful with not orbit because in case that you are worried, you will lose this top view. And then you will need again to go here. Use letter H, e.g. for panning and adjust the camera position correctly. Another option if you orbit is to use this tool previews in where you would undo to the previous camera view. Now I will use the line tool. First click here, second click here, length 0.39. I repeat the same length to the opposite direction, even when I can check that my line here looks longer than the image, but this is the correct one, length 0.39. Length 0.39. We have to use the image only as a reference. So let's go with this left side. Here we have a complicated curve because it is like one piece of the curve could be this one till here more or less. And the second piece of the curve is this one. So we will need to use the two point arc twice, and both are, of course, we'll have to be tangent between each other in order to create a continuous curve from this beginning point till here. So two point arc sides, 24 at this first here, I am assuming t more or less here. Second point, and then I adjust the depth of my yard. 0.02 is okay for me. Here we are. Let's go with the second arc, first point, second point here. And I check the length, 0.70, 1 s. Click, click without moving the mouse. Perfect. Let's repeat this curve in the other side. In order to be precise, I will use an auxiliary line here. Here, then again, two-point arc. First click, second, click 0.02, right? Okay, second arc, first point, second point, it was 0.71 without moving the mouse. Second click on Insert click here we are. Letter L for the line. We close the figure them out swimming later, our rectangle from here to here, more or less Dimensions 0.78 in the red box. Second click, I repeat that rectangle here, then cycle, Let's see. Strike call letter E for the eraser, I can click and drag and I am going to delayed just the SDS, the surfaces. Here, I have to make a selection box from left to right. Let's repeat this same operation for the last time. This time I will use the line tool letter L, length 0.92, assuming I close my figure, very easy. Length 0.92, I use the inference and I close my figure, letter c For the cycle. Again, letter E for the eraser. Now for selecting these ads, I will use the Selection Tool Space key one click on this. Delete, zoom out. We have already finished. I can relate the auxiliary lines, this element as well. I can orbit. Finally, switch off the X-ray style. If I wanted to delay it very much, I could do it easily just by one click. So before closing the file, Let's go over File Save As chess poem, because we're going to use this file in the future in order to play with it. We will rotate it, we will scale it. And of course, we will create a 3D model. So time to say goodbye. And in the next class we will start doing another exercise where we will continue increasing the difficulty. This time, we will draw a house plant floor. 25. Exercise: floorplan : Hello people. And we'll go into this new exercise in where we are going to practice more our drew in skills. This time we will draw a house plant floor. So I want you to go over File Import. We know this already and this time, let's open this house plant floor File Import. First click on the origin and now be careful because our image has unskilled. Second click wherever you want. And once our image is on the ground floor, fire scroll in, we will see that we have this graphic scale, 01.5 m here. We have as well here, the North. But what is really, really important now is this graphic scale, because I want you to do this exercise practicing with the real measurements of this house. So first of all, camera parallel projection. We know this already top view. We are ready for working nicely. Then I go to this graphic scale and then we will use this tool, tape measure tool. Remember that this tool has four properties. First of all, we can measure things. Of course, we can create guide lines or points, and we can scale the entire model as well. This is what we're gonna do right now. So one-click here, first single click on zero. Let's see the length of this distance, 3.49 and it has to be 5 m, right? So it is not correct obviously. So second click here. Then I write down the correct measure, five Enter, it will pop up this window that you want to resize the model. Note that components within the model that we're loaded from external files will not be resized. This is a very, very important message, will go deeper into these methods in the next future. Because according to this message, I want you to understand perfectly what you can do and what you cannot do. So we will resize all the model. Yes. And now all the entire model has been resized, which means that our image has been resized, not this woman. Similarly is her name. Check that the high is the same because the matter is considered an external component for schizo, again, top view. So let's start drawing the external walls. We'll do it using guidelines. So letter T, one click on the edge of the image and then I can drag a guide line parallel to that. Ed's. Remember that by clicking control, you will allow this tool, this tape measure tool, to create guidelines now or to use it just for measure things. So tap control, you will have that tiny icon representing the guideline and then keep drawing, scrolling for being precise. And second click here. Now I will use this guideline in order to create another one. The thickness of this wall, let's say it will be 0.25 m. We will keep this thickness in all the external walls. Remember that the images are always references. Scroll out. Let's go with this wall letter T, click and release swimming. Second click here. I will use this guideline. So one click and release and 0.25 second click, scroll out scrolling, we can pan will repeat exactly the same process. The scroll out. We open the screen for going to this side, to the right side, we compound letter T and again, 0.25. Here we are scrolled out. And now let's use the line tool or even the rectangle. This is up to you. If I use a rectangle, is gonna be faster. First click, second click on the second rectangle. First click, click. And now I will select this surface and I will delete it in order to see the image through this wall, I will use the X-ray style. So now I can continue drawing. This time the holes for the windows. Let's check this measurement, 1.20 L. We close the hole, we can erase this guideline. We remember that the whole for this window is 1.2. Here we need to do a whole for adore, so l. And again, I will use the guideline zero-point that say 0.8. This is the normal distance for other erase, again the guideline. And now we have just to continue drawing all the windows and doors. Well, once you have finished your external walls. We can remove all the guidelines to clean our drawing. And let's go now with internal partitions. Again, we will use the guidelines to make sure that we are drawing precisely letter T first guideline, e.g. here. Then let's set the thickness of these internal partitions. Zero-point ten could be nice. It will be always the same. Now, again, it's just a matter of repetition here for this partition, I will set zero point to time now for using the line or the rectangle first rectangle tool here. And then one surface has been generated, but we will not pay attention to it is not important. At the end, we will correct all these things. So let's continue drawing our rectangles. Here. I recommend you to use the pan by holding Shift and the width of the mouth because it is very, very handy when we are drawing and we don't lose the tool that we're using. In this case the rectangle. I can start my rectangle, e.g. here using the pen tool in the middle, release. And then I still have the rectangle on. And I can finish it. Once we have finished the internal partitions, time to erase the guidelines. I will use the eraser this time clicking and holding my left button. And now I need just to draw the holes for these kinds of doors sold letter L. And again, if I want to be precise, I need to use the guidelines 0.78, let's say 0.7. We close the line. We can erase this guideline at this very moment and we repeat this same operation. Of course, there are more ways for drawing this because it is kind of slowly to do it this way. But we haven't learned already those tools as e.g. the copy tool, because here I could select this element and say Copy, right, the distance 0.7. And here we are. I think it's faster, right? But now we are learning to use the guidelines that the rectangles and all this stuff. So we have to be patient and do it using the tools that we have learned. We have to do it this way. I know is a little bit slow, maybe repetitive. But it's the way once we have our drawing like that. Now, I would suggest you to use the eraser in order to just delete all the lines that we don't want in a very easy way, clicking and dragging e.g. here, I committed a mistake, but it is very easy to now fix those things for me, using the eraser is very, very relaxing. So we have almost finished. I will orbit now. Camera, perspective, switch off the x-ray and then we can see perfectly our surfaces. The space key for the selection tool, one click here on this surface and delayed the same here and the same here. We could delete as well the surfaces for the entrances eraser again, click and drag, click and drag, click and drag. We have now our drawing ready for extrude, but first looked at our surfaces. All of them have the buck color towards us. This is not good because when we extrude those surfaces, the whole 3D model is going to have the back color towards the camera. So I strongly recommend you to reverse faces when we're still in our two, the model. Then I will make a selection box just for selecting the geometry. Then I will place my mouse above any surface, right bottom reverse phases. Here we are. Now we could use the Post poll tool easily, but this is something that we will do in the next episodes after learning how to use this tool in a professional way. 26. Push/pull: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to talk about a very important tool. It is the pool tool. We will find it here. It is part of the transformation tools and one of the most important tools without any doubt in SketchUp, as you can imagine, it will help us to extrude our 2D surfaces in order to achieve 3D models. So we will need all the time to work with surfaces, not with lines. Here we have a queue. This cube is based on different surfaces. So we could double letter P, that is the gut. And then if I hover the mouse over any of these surfaces, we will see how these surfaces become full of dots. In that very moment, I can click and release, move my mouse and extrude my surface. I could type in the length as well in order to be more precise, e.g. let's say 1 m wave of the queue was 3 m. And now we have 4 m, that is E3. And we can call this extrusion positive because we increased the volume, but we have as well negative extrusions, e.g. if I draw a cycle on this phase, in order to be more precise, I will use the guidelines to find the center of this surface. One parallel here across this mid point. The same in the opposite direction. We have the intersection here, then letter C for the cycle, one-click and the radius, let's say 1 m e.g. now we have this surface inside the cycle and this another surface outside the cycle. If I use the Post poll tool now, I select first the surface, post pool, one-click and release. And I move my mouse, we could either extrude in a positive way, that surface or in a negative way. Because now we are subtracting volume. If we wanted to create here a perfect hole through this Q, we should extrude this cycle till this other side, right? Till the other side of the cube. So we could choose as our reference, any point of this side of the cube, including the edges. So I recommend you when you are here and you want to create a whole instead of orbit around the cube, you can choose any point of that side using the address e.g. here, click and you know that the hole has been created. This is like that because as you already guessed, the push-pull tool is working through the orthogonal vector of any surface, e.g. if I incline this side of the queue, we will be able to appreciate this orthogonal extrusion. More clear, let's draw the perpendicular first with the line tool, one click and release. And then I check where is that perpendicular here in this pink color perpendicular to face here we have this orthogonal vector, which is the one that the Post poll tool is using. Here we can see it. Let's erase the guidelines and let's talk now about another function that we can use with this tool. We have positive extrusions. We have negative extrusions, and we have a third option in where we will be able not to increase the volume, but at another volume letter P, I select the surface, click and release, and in one moment I have to tap Control key. Then the plus icon will appear next to our post poll tool. And then we can say that this extrusion is independent. Second click here, and we have generated independent surfaces which can be extruded as well. Imagine e.g. that we are working with the room of a house. We have this first volume and we want now to create a kind of rock and then play with it. If I extrude this surface in a positive way, we are increasing the volume and the surfaces in a continuous way. But if I click Control key, then from that surface as a reference, we'll start a new and independent volume, which will be our rod. This time, I will type in here the length of this rod, Let's say 0.5 m. And then I can select any of the surfaces of this new volume and continue extruding it, e.g. for creating here a cantilever. Here we are. Anyways, we will practice with this tool during all the course and we will learn more functions about this boost pool tool when we go through the plugins episode. Because I have to say that there is a very, very well-known plugin which will allow us to extrude things in a very creative way, not the AST playing with these orthogonal vector. Anyways, we have to muster this native push-pull tool from SketchUp in order to use in the future that interesting plugin. We finish this class here and in the next one, we will start learning about this move tool, which actually, apart from moving things, is able to copy things. So we can say that it is the move and copy to in SketchUp. 27. Move tool: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see a very important tool. It is called move, and we will find it here in the transformation panel. It is this tool and it is set, move a stretched copy, an array selected entities. In my opinion, this description is a little bit confusing, so don't pay too much attention to it, and I will try to explain it more clear way. So this tool has three main properties. We will be able to move things, we will be able to rotate groups, just groups, not free geometry, and we will be able to copy things, any kinds of things. Three-year maturity, groups, components, everything. So let's start from the beginning. We have to distinguish three main things here, surfaces, SDS, and endpoints, because our movements will be completely different if we start our movement selecting a surface, selecting Annette, or selecting an end point. Let's go with this 2D example here. This square, we have a surface, we have edges around, and we have endpoints in every corner, right? If I select the surface and I tap letter M, that is the shortcut for this tool. I'll be asked to select the first point of this movement, let's say e.g. this first point outside of the square, and then click unreleased, and then I move my mouse, let's say on the blue axis, what is going on? I am moving the entire rectangle on this blue axis, because as we already know, all the edges around the surface, Let's say that they are part of the surface. Surface can't live without the address. So now I should precise the length of this movement and I could even type in this lens on the distance bar, Let's say e.g. 2 m distance. Here we're Space key. One-click outside from the figure. We have finished our movement. Let's go now with the edges. Imagine that I select an edge, e.g. this one letter M. Now I have to select my first point of the movement, let's say e.g. this point, this is not the key for understanding this kind of movement. Then I move the mouse and look what is going on here, because this is what it is really important. If I move again along the blue axis as far as the line was selected, when I am moving it, thanks to the glue concept, perpendicular lines in contact with it are being inclined and the parallel line, which is not in contact at all, remains still, right? So I could create this kind of inclined surface just by moving that line. I could say that the second point of my movement is the origin. I have locked the blue axis by using the up arrow. Click on the region, and here we are. If I select another line, e.g. this one letter M, again, first point, let's say any point of the line, including the end points that is not important here. And then I move the mouse alone, this time the red axis. What we are doing now is light stretching that surface, right? It is the same concept. Perpendicular lines in contact with my selection are being affected by these movements. And the parallel line just in front of my selection remains still working as an anchor. Now I can type in the length of this new distance, Let's say 2 m. Enter. Finally, we can move endpoints. When my first selection is an end point, then the movement is gonna be completely different. But the thing here is how I select an endpoint, because e.g. this corner could be an endpoint. But I can select it, right? I just can select surfaces and lines or edges. So if I want to select an endpoint, what I have to do is to select my move tool and go directly to that endpoint looked at if I hover the mouse over the surface, all the lines, I am selecting them. Even when I didn't use the selection tool, just by hovering the mouse over these entities. So if I go over the end point and I click unreleased, we can say that it has been selected when I move the mouse now you can see how we are moving just that endpoint and then the lines in touch with that end point are being affected by this movement and the rest remain still working as an anchor. Again, I could look the blue axis again and create e.g. this kind of figure. As far as this new geometry is more complex and these both two surfaces are not coplanar, then SketchUp has created this new EDS. Let's practice these movements now in a 3D model, I will place this Q a little bit further because I want you not to be distracted by the rest of the geometry. So first option, move the surface, letter M. I hover the mouse over any of my surfaces, I select the first point, e.g. here. Then I have to decide the direction in where I want that surface to move. And we can see here their consequences on the lines in contact with that surface will be affected and the ones which are not in contact will work as an anchor. If my movement is in the perpendicular direction of that surface, it will be like if I am doing an extrusion, Let's do it like that. Second point, we have finished our movement. Let's go now with this second option, moving a line, I have a steal my move tool selected. Then I hover over a line, I select e.g. this line by clicking, I'll release any point of the line except for the end points. Because if I click on an endpoint, the movement will be different. So one-click here. Then again, I have to select the direction of my movement. Lines in contact will be affected by this movement. So I could create this inclined plane, or if I move myself, let's say on the green axis, I could stretch that plane and create this kind of 3D models. Let's select this second point as the end of the movement. And let's jump into this third option, moving an end point. For this third example, I will draw another cube, and then I will draw two diagonals on the top of the queue. As far as we have here, an intersection. This point works as an endpoint, right? Because we have a split the lines into different pieces. So if I say letter M, I hover over this endpoint, one-click, unreleased, and then I move the mouse along the blue axis. What we are doing is to create this kind of neuroma tree as far as we are moving just the point and the rest of the model remains still working as an anchor. I hope it is clear. Anyways, we will practice a lot these tools during the course. So let's jump now into this second property, which is rotate groups. With the move tool. We will be able as well to rotate things, but not free geometry. E.g. here we have a queue which is free geometry. It is not placed into a box group. So if I select the Move tool, I cannot rotate anything here. On the other hand, if I go to this another cube, which it is placed into a group box, I select again the move tool. When I hover over the queue, you will see that it will pop up this kind of different crosses, depending if my mouse is in one surface or another. If I hover the mouse over any of those Croesus, then a protractor appears. So I could initiate the rotation. One first click here, I move the mouse and I am rotating my group along that plane, which is selected the plane of the ground floor, which is perpendicular to that blue color of the protractor, right? I can type in the angle, let's say 45 degrees. And the rotation is finished. You should know that we have another, a specific tool for rotate things, which is this one, rotate. But when we are working with groups and we want to rotate them this way could be very, very handy and fast. Finally, with this move tool, we will be able as well to copy things. As you can imagine, copy things will be paramount for us when we are doing a 3D model. So I prefer to do on a specific class for learning how to copy them, say goodbye. And in the next class we will learn how to copy any entity in SketchUp. 28. Copy tool: Hello everybody and welcome to this new class in where we are going to learn how to use the Copy tool. This tool is part of the move tool as we saw in the previous chapter. So let's see how to use it. First of all, we have to select our geometry. For this example, we will use this cylinder, which could be inside a group box or could be as well, just three-year metric. In this case, it is not inside a group, so I should select it then letter m for the shortcut, we have hit the Move tool. And now SketchUp is asking us for the first point of that movement, right? So click and release. My first point will be here outside the cylinder. One-click and then let's move this cylinder along the red axis. But if I want to make a copy, then I have just to tap the control key when, whenever I want. So Control key, then you will see that plus icon next to our Move icon, and we are generating one copy of the cylinder. Let's type in the land e.g. 3 m Enter. And here we are, basically one click on the free space and our copy is done. Let's see now how to do multiples copies, control set. And I go one step back again. I select my cylinder again, Move Copy again, one-click and released for the first point of the movement. And then again, Control key for doing a copy instead of a simple movement. Now, again, I type in the length 3 m enter. But now if I want multiples copy instead of just one, what I have to do before I unselect the element which is now in blue color, then I have to type in arteries and precise the number of copies that I want. You will see the asterisk in the distance bar. Now, let's say instead of one copy, I want three copies, three enter, and you will see how a SketchUp has generated three copies, 12.3 instead of one. So in total, we have four cylinders. This is one of the two ways that we have for copying things. Let's explore the second option. So I will select this cylinder letter M and I will make a copy using Control key. Let's say here. Now, I will hover the mouse over the cylinder right bottom and make group. This time, I want to make copies starting from our group box. In addition to this, I will draw a kind of ground floor, which could be, let's say, a square. And imagine now that we want to create a kind of colonnade so we know where it is placed, this last column here, and the number of columns in the middle. And of course as well, we know that they have to keep the same distance between each other. How can we do that? Well, the thing here is to start measuring and using guidelines to fix the position of that last column. Here we have 0.82 m. Then I can go to that other side and create a guideline using that distance zero point T2. Now, I will select my column moves. First point of the movement should be any of these side one-click unreleased to Mao, I move the column along the red axis again, Control key for making a copy. And then the second point should be on that guideline. I can constrain the axis and choose any point of that guideline. Secondly, I have my copy well-positioned there, and now we know that we want not one copy, but three of them keeping the same distance between each other. So instead of using the asterisk, I will use the seven bar, that inclined bar above the number seven in your keyboard. Here we are. You have to use it always before unselect the first copy when it is still in this blue color, then we precise the number of copies that we want three. If you consume too much time, then you will lose that inclined bar and the tool is not going to work. I have to repeat it. Inclined bar number three, we want three copies. Enter here. We are not one copy, but 312.3 in total. We have, for this time, we have started with the column placed in the last position. In the previous example, we started with a copy placed in the first position, and then using our 3s, we create that more copies. Here the process is different. We are started with this copy placed in the last position. Then we said that we wanted not just one copy, but 312.3. Now we can erase these guidelines. The exercise would be over. So this is all about the Copy tool. We will use it a lot during the course, as you can imagine. And in the next episode, we'll learn about this, another tool from the transformation panel called rotate. With this Rotate tool, we will be able, of course, to rotate things, but as well, the tool will allow us to rotate and copy things in a very similar way that we have just learned in this class. 29. Rotate+copy: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we are going to learn how to use the rotate tool in a sketch. So these Rotate tool, it is here in the transformation panel. And thanks to this tool, we will be able to rotate in a very precise way and we will even be able to rotate and copy. During this class, we will use this chest bone that we drew you in a previous exercise. So I'll ask you to open it. Once we have it here, we can check that this chest bone is what we call free geometry because we can touch the geometry. It is not inside a group. We could place this geometry inside the group or not, doesn't matter for using these Rotate tool. The thing that we have to do is select the elements that we want to rotate as far as this geometry, not inside the group, I will make a selection box, then Rotate tool and a protractor will pop up in the screen. The color of that protractor is the key for the rotation. Now the color is blue, which means that we are working in the plane perpendicular to the blue axis. The rotation will occur in that plane, but we can change that plane just by clicking and holding down the left button of our mouth. So let's choose that first point which is paramount for the rotation. It is paramount because that first click will be a point that will work as an anchor of the rotation. So that first point should be placed on any point of that baseline, right? Let's say e.g. here in these midpoints. So click and hold down, and I move around my mouth. As you can see, the colors of the protractor are changing and then I have to choose the correct one. This time, I want the red color, which means that we are working in the plane perpendicular to the red axis. Once the red color is on my protractor, I released the left button of my mouse and that color, that protractor, that plane is already fixed. Now it gets app is asking me for that second point. We already fixed first point. And with this second point, what we're gonna do is to create an axis, an axis for the rotation. So it's not that important if that point is here or here because we are creating kind of an axis. Let's say here, second point, click and release. And I move. Now is the time for the angle. We can precise that angle graphically just by moving the mouse and clicking for the third time, or typing in that angle in the measurements bar e.g. Nike. And here we are basically on one click outside, the rotation is finished. Let's repeat it again. This time I will make a group right button. Now the chest bone is inside the box. Rotate, I select the first point, the one which is going to work as an anchor, e.g. here, click and hold down, I select the color of my protractor. This time it should be blue. Here we are. I released now, I need to assign the second point for creating that new axis. Second click, e.g. here, I move my mouse around, time for the angle, let's say 90 degrees this time, I will do it graphically. Third, click on the rotation is finished. As you can see, we will need three clicks. First one, click and hold down, then click and release for creating an axis. Then thirdly, four, assign the correct angle based on my experience, if it is the first time that you are using this tool, it can be a little bit tricky, but I can assure you that you will get it. Let's go now with another option of these to rotate and copy. I will move first of all, this geometry to the region. Then I will move it along the red axis and imagine that now I want to rotate that just bone around. But in addition to rotate the figure, I want to make some copies. How can I do that? Well, first of all, I have to select my geometry one-click because it is a group. Then again, rotate tool and the first point, remember that it has to be like the anchor point. The anchor point this time will be placed on the origin and then time for fixing the planning where the rotation is going to happen. Blue color is correct. So I released now till here, everything is the same as before. Now second point for fixing the new axis of rotation, let's say any point of the red axis. Then I move the mouse time for the new angle on here. At this very moment is when we have to tap Control key. If I tap Control key, you can see that we have created a copy exactly the same way as when we were using the Move tool and we wanted to create a copy, we fixed that new angle, let's say 45 degrees enter and we have that copy and that rotation already done. The copy is still selected. So as we did with the Move tool, now, we could tap arteries and say how many copies we want using that angle of rotation. Let's say e.g. for Arthur is four. And we will create four copies instead of 1,123.4 as we did when we were using the Copy tool here with the rotate tool, we can use the asterisk for copying thing or that inclined bar above number seven control set. I select my chest palms, rotate, anchor point, click and hold down. I select the correct color. I really second point for fixing the new axis of the rotation. I move the mouse around, I tap Control key for making a copy, third fleet for fixing the position of that copy. And this time still when that copy is selected, inclined bar and number of copies that I want to have between the original geometry. First copy, Let's say e.g. six Enter here we have 123456 copies, seven in total with the original one. So as you can see, we can be super precise using the rotate tool. So time to say goodbye now, and in the next class we will go through the scale tool. 30. Scale and mirror: Hello people and welcome to this new pass in where we are going to see this scale. We will find it here in the transformation panel as well. And if we hover the mouse over the tool, we can read scale and a stretch selected entities. Actually, this tool is able to scale, but Miro as well, we'll be able to create symmetries using the scale tool. So let's start with these 2D square. I will make a selection box, then letter S for the shortcut scale. And the first thing that you will see is that many different grid points will appear on the perimeter of my objects. We can hear identify two different grid points. On one hand, we have the points plays in the mid point, like this one, this one, this one, and this one. And then we have the points placed on the corners like this one or this one, or this one. And this one we hover the mouse over any of these points. The opposite point is active two will work as an anchor, e.g. here we can read red scared about opposite point, which means that if I click and release and I move my mouse, the opposite points will work as an anchor completely still. And then it's like if we're stretching our object along the red axis, escape, and let's do it now using this grid point. The opposite is active now and we are stretching the object now along the green axis. When we are using this function, we can read in the measurement bar a number, which it is like the scale factor. I mean, we are multiplying the original distance by that scale factor. If I say e.g. 0.5, enter that measure from here to here. Now is 1.5 m when it was 3 m. So it is half of the original size. If I repeat now, e.g. using this grip scale, one click and release. And then I say to the scale factor now is two, it will be double the original size. Now it will be 6 m instead of three. But pay attention here because with the scale tool, we're gonna be able as well to type in a specific distances and not just scale factors. So e.g. if I hit the scale tool again, I said grip is scaled 0.1. Click and release. We know that the original distance was 6 m. And now instead of just type in that scale factor, zero point something or two or three, whatever. I have to write down the specific distance I want for that length. Let's say e.g. 1 m, then I type in one and the unit m 1 m enter. And as you can see, if I measure that distance now is going to be 1 m. So that gives us a lot of possibilities, right? Scale tool again. In addition to this, Let's work now with the corner grip points. We have been working till now with the midpoints. But now, let's go to the corner points. These are very, very useful because we will be able to scale our object in an uniform way, one-click and release. And then you can see how the scale now is uniform about that opposite point, which is completely still here. Again, we can type in that scale factor or the specific length of that diagonal, e.g. let's type in to enter. I didn't write the unit meters, centimeters or whatever. So I used scale factor and that diagonal is double the original sites. Let's practice this now in a 3D model, e.g. here with this cube, if I select this cube letter S, you can see now how any surface of this cube has now these red points. And at the same time we have another GREP, a scale point in the middle of any surface. This one, this one, this one, and so on. That specific mid point of the surface is very important here in a 3D model because it will allow us to stretch that 3D model along that direction. E.g. here, read the scale about opposite point. We can read on each level, the opposite point works as an anchor and then one-click unreleased. And I am a scaling the queue along the red axis. Again, here I can type in the scale factor or an, a specific length, Let's say e.g. 4.5 m letter M, enter if I measure that distance, now we have here 4.5 m. It was 3 m long before, and now it is 4.5. If we wanted to scale the cube uniformly, we should go here. This corner grip point, one-click can release, and then the scale of the cube works in an uniform way. Second click here, e.g. and we are done. One very interesting thing that we can do when we are working with the scale tool in a 3D object is e.g. the *** select one surface scale and then transform just that surface because of the glue concept, the rest of the surfaces will be affected. So e.g. if I select this gray scale and I move my mouse, you can see how I am transforming not just that surface, but the rest of the 3D object, right? Furthermore, if I click Control key, then the anchor point will move to the center of the surface and my scale will keep uniform, but the anchor point will be placed in that mid point of the surface, not in the opposite corner. I can create these truncated pyramids. I have to hold down Control key, then second click, and we are done. This way of working with the scale tool will be very useful in the future. You will see, Let's practice now, e.g. with these components, if I select this guy letter S and I hit the scale tool, and then I measure the guy. It is like 1.76 m. And imagine that I want him to be 1.5. Then scale again, I select this point because it is with which I can control its high. And then if I type in 1.5, the scale hasn't been uniform. So the guy, let's say it's being distorted in a strange way now is fatter because it's thicker. We can see it more clear if I make this guy is shorter or if I make this guy taller, right? The scale is not uniform. If I hold down Shift, then the scale is uniform. But when I want to type in the length, let's say 1.5, strange symbols appear on my measurement. By the way, for doing this is to hold down Shift when I am doing the scale, but I don't type in the length. I can do it graphically and randomly. Second click, and when the guy is still selected, then I write down the correct Hi For this guy, we said 1.51, 0.5 m m enter, or 2.5 m enter or 5 m enter. The scale is uniform and we are controlling the height of the guy. Let's jump now into the symmetry tool. Let's use this car, which is a component, it is already selected. And if I hit the scale tool, we'll see our skin rips in the specific positions, corners, mid points in the middle of the surfaces like this one. And those points are the ones which are very important if we want to Meroe that object, imagine that we select this mid point of the surface, one-click and release. Then we can stretch the object in that direction, in this case, along the red axis. And at this very moment, we are working with a scale factor in we're number one. Like if we are multiplying that length just by 10.5 is half of the original. Size. Two is novel. And if we go into the negative numbers, look what is going on. We are creating a symmetry. Now we have -0.37 minus zero point, whatever. So here, the correct number for creating that symmetry along the red axis without distorting the object would be minus one, exactly minus one. If we are doing graphically, we will notice how when we arrive at minus one, the scale is like kind of blocked. Then second click and our symmetry is done. We did it this time along the red axis, but we can do it as well, e.g. along the set axis, I have to select this scale grip, one-click and release. Then I move into the negative numbers till minus one. And we have that symmetry control set. And let's do it now. Along the green axis, this would be the correct scale grip when click and release and then minus one. Now that we are talking about the symmetry tool, you have to know that if I select any object, right button, I have this option, flip along. Then components red components, rain components blue. With this tool, we will be able to generate symmetries as well. But you see the axis of the component, not the general axis. Anyways, we will see this tool when we go deeper into the components in case that we wanted to use the general axis, we should explode these components. Let's do it, selected, then explode. We can see here in the entity Info that now is not one component, but 14 components. If I make a selection box and now right button flip alone, I can flip along the read direction, green direction, blue direction. We are talking here about the general axis. If I say red direction, then we can see how we made a symmetry along that red direction as we did before, just by stretching into the negative numbers, the correct scale grid. So time to say goodbye. And in the next episode, we will see another tool of the transformation panel, which is called Follow me. This is a very interesting tool. It will allow us to create surfaces of revolution as e.g. a cone or a sphere, among other many things. 31. Follow me: Hello people and welcome to this new class. Inward, we're going to see a very, very powerful tool which is called Follow me. We will find it here in the transformation panel under this icon, Follow me. The description says follow a path with asset-backed that phase, but actually it has much more functions and features. So let's start here with this model in where we can see a path and a face. So basically the tool is going to extrude our surface along the path. We have two ways for doing this. The correct one and the incorrect one. The incorrect one would be to hit the tool and then go directly to our surface, one-click and release and move our mouse along the path. As you can see, we can do it using this way, but we can find some kind of problems when we want to turn the corners. And the more complex the path is, the more difficulties we will find. The best way is to select first our path, then hit the tool, one click and release. On our surface, everything will be done in 1 s. We can see how this tool makes these 3D model merging everything together perfectly in the corners. And this is a very huge time-saver because MIN, if we wanted to do this by ourselves, we should add and remove material here. And it could be very problematic. In addition to this, we have to take into account that this tool is not working The asked when our path is in contact with our surface like before, but we can use it as well when there is no contact at all. Like in this example, we have this path, we have this surface, and they are not in contact between each other. So the mechanism will be the same. We have just to select the path firstly, then hit the tool and go to the surface. One-click. As you can see, that surface, that kind of ring we had before has been extruded along the path, creating this kind of hold, this kind of pipeline, right? But this tool is not working just with linear paths, but with circular paths as well, or better said, closed paths like e.g. this one, we have this, we have this Eds, we have this EDS, and we have this Eds. We have a square here and one profile I drew before here, using this tool, we will be able to extrude this profile, this shape, along this path. First, we select the path. Then we hit the tool on one click on our say, here we are. We can create these complex shape very easy. And as you can see again, on the corners, everything is merged in a very smooth way. However, we can use this tool as well without using the atheists but using their surfaces. I mean, control set when a step back. And then if I want to select those edges, that path, in order to do the same function, I could click just on the surface heat the tool SketchUp will know that we want to select the edges on the perimeter of that surface and then one click on the shape again, we have the same result. In addition to these, apart of adding material, we can remove material using these. Follow Me too. Again. I select the surface, then I hit the tool. One click on this surface, what is going to happen? The extrusion along the path is going to remove the material along these square one hit. And here we have the result. This is very interesting because we can do this kind of stuff. E.g. I. Will use the Arc tool now, one-click, hear, one-click here. Let's say that our sales will be more or less like that. We have the surface, then we can again select this surface in order to get the perimeter as a path. Then we hit the tool. One-click here. We have here this another example in where we will do exactly the same but working in another plane, I will click the surface. I will hit the tool. One click on my profile. We can create this kind of relief for, let's say, a window. Imagine that this surface, e.g. is not solid, is glass. So I go to material less and minerals, translucent glass tinted, e.g. one-click. And we have then this window with this kind of sophisticated frame. In addition to this, we can create that frame around this perimeter even when our profile is not in contact with that, as we said before. So one-click on the surface, we hit the tool, one click on our profile. And here we have that frame, which is keeping that distance to that perimeter. Finally, another feature of this tool is the possibility to create what is called surfaces of revolution, e.g. a. Cone. Say, imagine that we want to create a cone shape. We can't do it by using the extrude tool. Because if I want to do it, I just can create this kind of triangle in 3D. So we need this. Kind of profile to turn around this circular path. That is the definition of a surface of revolution. So again, we select first the path. It could be this surface. If we want to select the circumference, then we hit the tool one click on our profile, and here we have our condensate. Sometimes you will find that e.g. here, it is not closed the ground floor of this comb, then maybe we have to do it by ourselves. I just have to draw with a line tool one diagonal and then erase this line. Now I could reverse phases. Here we are. However, when you are using this tool, you can find some time some difficulties because e.g. here we have these two cycles. They are not in contact at all. And we will use this cycle on the ground floor as a path and this cycle above it as the surface that we want to extrude along the path. So I select surface, I hit the tool, one click on my sake. And here we have this sphere. This is a very nice way for creating an atmosphere. On this another example, we have the same both cycles, but the position between each other is different. If we repeat the same process, we select this cycle as a path. We hit the tool and we click on this cycle in order to extrude this cycle along the path we don't have here on a sphere, but we have this kind of ring along this cycle. This is because of the relative position between each other on this another example, the center of the cycles not aligned along the blue axis, as in the first case with the sphere. And they are not aligned neither along the red axis as in the second example. If I repeat the same process, I select this surface for selecting the circumference as a path. I hit the tool, one click on my safe, then you can see here this new shape that we have generated. If you wanted to understand better how this safe or why does this say is like that? We can go one step back and then use the tool directly to our say, one-click and release. Then we move the mouse along the path. We can see how this path is being generated. In this case, it is a little bit strange, in my opinion. To finish this class, we will use this follow me tool with this chest bone. Remember that we worked with this just pond in different episodes before. You can use it now in order to create the 3D model. Because again, if we just extrude this poem, the result will not be good enough. If I use the Post poll tool here, one click and release, we will create this kind of orthogonal extrusion, which actually is not correct, right? So we need to create here again, a surface of revolution. Furthermore, we have here a group, the chest bone is inside a group box. But even when our geometry is placed inside a group, we can use the follow me to the mechanism is more or less the same. We have to select our path. Secondly, we hit the tool and then if we move the mouse to our sake, we will find this forbidden icon because the geometry is placed inside that group. But then we click the right button, edit group, we are already inside the group. Follow me to remember the path we had selected. So now one-click and release on the cycle e.g. and we have the sphere. The thing now is that we can't do it over and over again. We need to go out from the cycle and start again from the beginning, select the path, hit the tool right button, edit group, and one click again on the next surface. Here we are. And we should repeat this process three more times. Once we have finished our chest poem, we can delay to the surface because we don't want the path anymore. And here we have the result of our chest bone modelled in a very nice way. As you can see, this tool is super powerful, much more than many people used to think. I strongly recommend you to use it. Practice with it with different geometries because it is a little bit tricky. And in the next episode, we will see the last tool of the transformation panel, which is this offset tool. It is much more easier but useful as well. 32. Offset: Hello people and welcome to this new class. In where we're going to see the offset tool. We will find this tool here under this icon and the description says offset selected edges in a plane. Let's see how it works. It is a pretty straightforward tool, but it has some different features and functions that it is convenient to know. Let's start with this square in 2D. And as it happens with a lot of tools in SketchUp, you can pre-select geometry or you can actively hover over the geometry and choose it for offset. Let's start with this second option, letter F. For the shortcut, we hit the tool and then if I hover over the geometry, we can see how this face lights up. And at the same time, one red spot appear on the edge of our surface, right? That red spot is kind of reference for our offset. So one-click e.g. here, and then you can see how this tool is going to pull out an outline of the face I have on here. We can create a negative offset when we are like pulling that offset into the phase where we can create a positive offset if we move the mouse outside of the face. Furthermore, like a lot of other tools in SketchUp, you can type in an exact measure in the measurement bar, Let's say e.g. 0.5 m Enter. Here we have the result. We have this new perimeter at that exact distance from the original one. And a SketchUp creates as well the surface in this area, as it happens with a boost pool tool. If I hover over this new phase and I click twice rapidly, we will repeat the same command at the same distance, and we could do it over and over again. However, we can work not just with the surfaces, but with the edges. This time, instead of hover over our surface, I will pre-select the geometry one and second ads. Then I go over offset, one-click here, that red point will pop up and we can exactly says where we want that reference to be. Let's say here, one-click, then we move the mouse. You can see how we are creating that offset of those two lines. That could be very useful. We can again type in the exact measure or doing graphically just by another click. Take into account that this tool will not work if we try to offset just one. Let's check it here in this another example, I will select this line letter F, and then the tool doesn't allow me to continue with the offset. I have to select at least two SDS, Then letter F. And this time I can use the tool without any problem. Of course I could use it as well with more than two edges. Let's select everything here, letter S. Now I have two precise where I want to be that red point here, e.g. I. Move my mouse and let's type in how long we want to pull out that new outline, e.g. 0.5. Let's jump now into a 3D model. As I told you before, this is a 2D tool. You can use it just in one plane at a time. So in this case, if I hit the tool letter F and I hover over this phase, one-click e.g. here, then I move the mouse. I will be able to work just in this surface as we saw before, this offset can be negative or positive. This time, I will pull this offset into the face to create a kind of frame. And then I could use these postpone tool in order to create a whole, the combination of these two tools, they postpone tool and the offset tool is very, very powerful. Remember that when you are working in SketchUp, the normal geometry and the hidden geometry. If I go to View Hidden geometry, we could even use this offset tool taking that hidden geometry as a reference, e.g. here, I will hit the tool again. And as you can check here on the screen, when I hover over these faces, the tool is recognizing the LTS as the perimeter, even when that edges are part of hidden geometry, one-click and I move the mouse and I could create this frame, which maybe I could repeat by clicking twice on every side of this cylinder. Then using the push-pull tool, I could create unique sex like this one you are watching right now. Finally, this tool has another feature. If we focus on these strange shape and we make an offset, I hit the tool, I hover over the surface which slides up, then one click and I move my mouse, you will see how depending on the distance with the outer line, different saves with appeared and when they are very close to each other, in one point, they will merge and a continuous figure will appear right here we are working, let's say with a normal mode of the two, but we can toggle it to another mode, tapping Alt key in your Windows, then a new icon will appear next to our offset symbol. And now block that if I move my mouse, these two figures will lap over each other, creating a unique shape. It is not something super relevant in my opinion, but I would like you to know because the tool has this, another possibility, another click here, and we are done. Maybe now we can put pool these new saves creating this figure. So this is all about this tool. It is a very straightforward tool you see useful. And in the next episode, we'll learn about how to work in SketchUp with solids. We will have to switch on a new toolbar going up here, right bottom and solid tools, one-click. These new toolbar will appear solid tools. And thanks to it, our geometry will work not as different surfaces connected altogether, but as solid objects, which will open us a lot of possibilities to draw new kind of geometries, impossible to get without it. 33. Solid tools: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to talk about this solid tools. These tools has its own set bar. You can see it here. If you want to turn it on, you have to go here to the upper bar, right button and look for solids. Here we are study tools. One-click and we'll find this tool set with six bottoms. If we hover over any of them, we could read a very interesting description about what this function is doing actually in our model, because actually it is very accurate. Anyways, what do we have to understand before what a solid means? So let's go here to this first model in where I have a Q and a sphere. Now, during the course, we have been working with models which are based on surfaces, e.g. a. Queue. We said that it is not a solid, but many different surfaces placed altogether and creating this CEP of a cube. If I remove one of their faces, we can see that the interior is completely empty. And we already know that all the shapes in SketchUp, all of our models work like that. When we are talking about a solid, the meaning is very intuitive. What we are trying to say is that we want are safe to work as a real solid or in other words, not empty in the interior. And why we want our models to work as a solid. What is the benefit of working with a solid and not with a normal SketchUp geometries? The answer is easy. We can create unique geometries and I will give you here an example. This both elements are working as a solid. So if I say that I want to say it plays this sphere here in order to allow this fear to bite the queue, I use this, let's say subtract function, one-click, second click, click. We have, as I told you, a unique geometry as the result of this subtraction, imagine to try to get this geometry by working with the normal tools that we have already learned in a sketch, it would be completely impossible. But before jumping into this first example called outer cell, Let's see how I did in order to make these both geometries to work as solids. So once the bug control set, one click on the sphere and if I open my entity Info tray, you can read solid group one in modal solid group, this is fear is placed into a group and forest gets AB. That means that the element is already a solid. So when we make groups, we are creating solids the same with the cube. One. Click on the queue and we can read solid group one in model because when our geometry is not a group, so let's explode. This cube e.g. now is not a group anymore. And if I click on subtract and I hover over the Q, this forbidden icon will pop instead of the number, and it is said not a solid. So we can't make that geometry to interact with another one. Furthermore, if our geometry is a group, but it has some kind of error, e.g. I. Go into the group and I draw a little line here. I go out of the group, I clicked on, so strap and I hover over the Q and we can read again, not a solid the element, our geometry is a group, but we have this error. We need, let's say, a continuous geometry. In order to fix this kind of errors, you should know that we have a plugin called solid inspector. We will see this plugin in the future and it will help us to detect kind of mistakes in our geometry and fix it immediately. So it is a very useful plugin here. We know where is the error. So we can go into this group, select this line and related, want to step back. And now, if I click on subtract again, I hover over the cube, the number pops up. I can select my cube as a solid. Now the tool is asking me for selecting the second geometry for the interaction. And when I hover over this fear, everything seems to be okay. So second click, and here we have the result. The order is very important because now the cube was the one who bites the sphere and not the contrary. Now I think that we're ready for jumping into this first example. The first feature that we have available is called outer cell. We have here two cubes which are in contact. And this feature, what it's gonna do is just to combine both of them in order to create a continuous safe. So if we hit the tool outer cell, this time, the order is not important. First click here, second click on the second cube, and then we have created a new shape. If we select this new shape, we will see on the entity Info. That it is a solid group, so we don't have two cubes anymore, but one continuous shape. We can check it by using the x-ray and here we are. Furthermore, the tool says that it will remove all interior entities. I have to say that this feature of the tool is a little bit confusing because that part about removing the interior entities is not working clearly. So in my opinion, you can forget that part. Let's move on now to this second example. Intersect. If we read the description, it says that intersect all selected solids, but keep only their intersection in the model. It is very clear. So we hit the tool one click on this first cube. Secondly, here, the order is not important because the tool is just keeping the intersection. In this third example, Union, we will have the same result as outer cell here the two says that combined all selected solid into a single solid and keep interior voids. So we hit the tool one click here, click here. And as you can see, we have the same result as with outer cell. In this next example, subtract the description says subtract first solid from second. Keep only the result in the model. So here the order is going to be super important. We hit the tool one click, and here I will click firstly this orange q. So this orange cube is going to be the one who bites the second q. And here we have the result as the description said. Yes, the result keeps on our model and the orange Q, the little one has been removed. In my working experience, I have to say that this tool is the most useful, at least for me. Let's go with the next one. Trim, trim, first, solid against second, and keep both in the model. So it's gonna be super similar to the previous one, but it will not remove that orange cube, the one who bites from our model, we can check it, makes sure that you don't have anything selected. We'll hit the tool first. Solid will be again the orange one, seconds solid, the big cube. Then we can see, thanks to the X-ray, how the neurons cube made a bite on the big Q. But the thing here is that everything remains on the model. Nothing has been removed. We can check that we have here one group and a second group. We move this orange cube. We have the same result as before, but this orange cube was not removed. That is the only difference. The last feature is called split. We can read intersect all selected solutes and keep all results in the model. So we hit the tool one click on here, second click on here. We can say that something happens in the interior. So let's move the different models we have here, the urines one, we have here, the big one, and we have here the intersection of both of them. So it is very similar to this one to intersect, but this tool is keeping all the different solids in the model. So time to say goodbye. I hope that you have clear in your mind how to use these tools bar. Anyways, we will practice with it during the course and in the next episode, we will do an exercise about drawing a swimming pool in where we will start using all the tools from the transformation panel that we have learned during this model. 34. Exercise: swimming pool: People. And what goes into this new class where we're going to do an exercise for practicing the transformation tools. So first of all, we have to import an image. Of course this image is attached with the course, so we'll go over a file import and we'll select this swimming pool, the back. We have to make sure that we have this upsilon March use image as image. Here, we have to select all supported image types and import. The first step will be to place the image correctly on the ground floor. So first click on the origin, and then we can choose a random scale. Then let's go over the top view. Let's go over camera parallel projection. Now we are ready to change the scale of our image. Here we have the measure. So we will use the tape measure tool in order to add these 27 m to the real scale. So first click here, one-click, unreleased, second click here, second click and release. The length is 7.42 m, not 27 with type in the correct measure. So 27 m Enter. This window will pop up. You want to resize the model? Yes, we can zoom out or even we can use the zoom extents tool. And now our swimming pool, our plan is in the correct size. Actually, this step is not needed because we are not going to draw over this drawing. We are going to use this image as a reference, but it will be, I think, more handy to have the image in the correct scale. So now I will move my image. I am using the shortcuts. I will orbit because I don't want to draw in 2D anymore. So the first thing that they have to do is to draw this rectangle, which we already know that it is 27 m long and 12th meters width. Then we have an inner rectangle separated by 2 m, because we have here 10 m and 2 m, the difference is to meet. So let's start throwing rectangle tool one click. We know that we are drawing on the ground floor, and then we can type in 27 semicolon 12th. Enter. Here we have our rectangle. Now we need to draw the inner rectangle. I will use the offset tool, one click over the surface. Once it lights up, one click and release the distance with the perimeter, we say that it is 1 m because the width is 12 m minus ten. We have 2 m in both sides. So 1 m distance to the perimeter, 1 m. Enter if we want to be precise at any moment, we can use the guidelines in order to place our drawing in the correct position. This is not needed, but we can do it. I can erase the guidelines once I have used it. So we have just finished with the ground floor of the swimming pool. And now we need to work with this section plane. We can check here that we have the ground floor of the swimming pool at 1.5 m. Then we have a kind of inclined plane. Then this ground floor 4 m deep. So I'll use the guidelines again. Shortcut letter T. We have here this distance, 8 m, 8 m along the red axis. Now, I will use the line tool letter L. I will draw this line. Now I have this surface isolated so I can push, pull, one click and release. And here we have this round floor or 1.5 m. So I'll type in this measure. Enter. I could repeat this same command on this, another phase by clicking twice rapidly. Now I will select this guideline again, letter M. I copy this guideline by clicking Control key while I am moving it 7 m along the red axis. So here we have our reference, but actually we need this reference placed on the ground floor for being able to draw the line. So I am still with the Move Tool selected and with a guideline selected one click on this intersection, click and release. And I placed my guideline on the ground floor. Then I draw the line here. I can use the X-ray if I want to be able to select this point, this another intersection point, click I switch off the X-ray. Now I am able to select this another phase, which we already know that it is 4 m, 4 m -1.5, it is 2.5, right? So if I push pull here 2.5, I have those 4 m from the bottom of this part of the swimming pool till the surface. Once I'm here, I just need to draw this inclined plane. I can do it in many different ways. One of them could be to select this line M for moving it first, click here, click here letter E for the eraser. And I delayed the guidelines. Here we have our swimming pool. Now. I could reverse faces. I could select everything right bottom reverse faces. And now I could even apply some materials. If I go to Materials title e.g. this one, and I could apply this style over all the surfaces around the water. Then I could change the tile, e.g. this one and apply this another type here. I could even close this whole just by drawing one line of the perimeter and then apply here this water transparent material. This is one of the ways for drawing the swimming pool, but there are many different ways in SketchUp, we have always different paths to follow in order to draw. That is one of the funniest thing about this software. There is not just one way of doing things. We can be creative and follow our intuition even when we are wrong. So e.g. here, we draw the swimming pool by starting with the ground floor. But what happens if we start using the section plane? Maybe it is better, actually, I think that it is virtual. So let's do it. Letter L for the line tool we have here, 1.5 m. I will start drawing here, and then I have to draw in the vertical plane. One first click, I can click the up arrow to be sure that we are drawing along this blue axis. Then I type in 1.5 Enter. Here we have our first line. Then we'd have to go 8 m along the red axis, eight Enter, then we have that inclined line. We don't know the angle, so we have to go down again vertically. The distance you'd be 4 m -1.52, 0.52, 0.5, Enter then 7 m. Then the next line would be 10 m. Then again vertical line along the blue axis, 4 m. This time, we can close the section plane again, letter L. We are ready for drawing that inclined line. We know that it starts here and we will find an end point along this line because this line was drawn into Business. Here it is the end point. And if we want to check that this dimension, this measure is correct, we can measure it 7 m, which is totally correct, 7 m. Now we'll use the eraser because we need to delayed these leftovers. So now the section plane is totally correct time for using the push-pull tool, letter P, one click on here, unreleased, and the distance here is 10 m. 10 m width here we are. Now I will use the Offset one click and release 1 m distance for that outline. And we have already finished. It was easier this way right now we just have to apply materials. We have the material as already here. So letter B for the paint bucket, letter out for the sample paint, one click on the water. One click on my face. Again, add for the sample pain. One click on this tile, on one click on my face. Of course, everything related with materials will be taught in a specific episode. In fact, we will have some episodes for talking about materials because it is a very important, Let's say, dense part of the course. But I want you to start being familiar with these materials to staff from these very beginning, I am thinking that I didn't apply the tile in the interior of the swimming pool. So I will select this face and this face edit height. Let her be out for the sample paint, one-click and then I can apply the material on here so easily. Once I have finished, I can go again to edit unhide. All. We are done with our swimming pool. I encourage you to practice with this exercise. If you have any lab while you are doing this exercise, don't hesitate to leave a comment and I will respond to you as soon as possible. 35. Exercise: vase: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to do an exercise, in where we are going to practice tools as the arts, the offset tool and they follow me tool. Our goal will be to draw a base in three d. We will support ourselves with an, a specific image which of course is attached with the course. So first of all, we have to go over file and import will click on here on the base J peg image, all supported image types import, as we already know, first click on the iridium and then we can choose a random skill. The image is on the ground floor, and now it's up to you if you want to work on the ground floor or maybe you prefer to change the plane. This is up to you in order to change a little bit our habits. This time I will work on the vertical plane. So once the image is selected, Rotate, tool, one, click and hold, I choose the correct plane for that rotation. In this case, the red plane is okay for me. I released second click, third Click, Here we are. I will erase this lady and we are ready for drawing. So let's go over camera parallel projection. And here we'll choose not top but front. Now the first step will be to draw a section of this vase in order to use the following me tool afterwards around a circular path. This way we will get a 3D model. So line tool, letter L, I will start here in the middle, because we have a symmetry, I will draw just one half of the base. This element is completely horizontal, don't trust to match the photo. We know that this surface is straight, so till here. And now it is high time for using the arc. This exercise is thought in order to make you practice this arc tool. Or in other words, to learn how to use or how to draw curves in SketchUp. So arc will use the two point arc, first two here, second click More or less here. But I forgot one important step to change the number of sides of this arc. So I will press Escape. I will choose another tool as the Selection Tool. Again, Arc tool sides 12th, let's say 20 for the double. Now I am ready. Again. One-click, second click More or less here I move the arc in order to adapt my curve to the photography. Here could be okay. So third click, unreleased here. Second part of the curve, first click and release. We can see that blue color, which means I remind you that that curve is going to be tangent to the previous one. We can adapt here, are curved to the profile of the base. Second click here. Click here without any movement. Let's keep going. Third curve, one-click that see, the second click could be more or less here. And third click. Pay attention to that message is not important at all for Claire. One-click and you can see here that maybe our curve is not so precise, right? If I want to be tangent to the previous one and follow the profile of the various, I am not, let's say being very, very precise. Well, maybe here, Let's try here. If not, you can go one step back and draw the previous curve in a different way. I will try with this curve. Here we are. And I keep going, Not bad. My suggestion here is to try to draw this vase with the minimum amount of curves. If you use a lot of curves, the final result will be, let's say not that continuous us. If you are able to use the hash, let's say four or five, a minimal amount of curves. So here I will try to go till the end, e.g. here, now line, because here we can see a curve, but this is because of the perspective. If we're drawing our gut playing, we know that here the base is completely a straight right here. We could block the red axis by clicking the right arrow. Then I take this reference and I close my section plane. Now we have this half of the base. But you have to think that this vase is not a solid. Actually, it is empty inside. It has some kind of thickness, but the interior of course, has to be empty. It might be that we want to put inside some flowers or whatever letter F. And we hit the offset tool. We hover over this phase and it lights up, one-click and release. And let's choose this thickness using, let's say our intuition, it is not needed to be completely precise because we don't have actually that measure. Now we have to fix a little bit this profile letter L. And I will fix This bottom of the base and the upper surface in order to create the whole E for the eraser. And now I can be laid the left overs. Here we are. Now we are totally ready for using the Follow me tool and create a kind of surface of revolution. But we need our path, right? So we could hide e.g. this image right button height. We hit the cycle tool, we change the number of sites, let's say 50. Eye orbit a little bit, one click on the center of that cycle. Second click. Once we have our path, it is high time for using their Follow me tool. So first thing that we have to do is to select the path, then follow me. And then we hit on the surface that we want to follow that path. Here. Maybe we have to wait a little bit because SketchUp has to think. So here we are. The base is already done. We have an empty space in the interior in order to play as flowers or whatever, we could reverse phases by selecting everything right bottom reverse spaces. We could make a group here and place it exactly on the ground floor. Because if I select the front view, we can see that it is floating a little bit. We could even scale it, because now if I measure the height of these ways, it is 4.77 m. It is a lot, right? Let's re-scale the various them using the tape measure tool. If it pops up the icon of the guideline near our tape measure tool, then we have to tap control. Second click on the top of the vase. We introduce them in the correct measure, let's say 0.4, enter this window pops up. You want to resize the model? Yes. And now we have the vase in the correct size. Now, if you want to set the file, go over File, Save As this is all, I hope that you like the class. If you have any doubt, don't hesitate to leave a comment and I will respond as soon as possible. And in the next episode, we will do another exercise where we will keep practicing all the tools that we have learned till here. 36. Exercise: drill: Hello people and welcome to this new exercise in where we're going to practice our drawing skills by modelling this kind of drill that we have here. So first of all, let's analyze this image which is attached with the course. And we can find that we have on the upper part, our ground floor of this that say industrial object. Then on the bottom of the image, we have a profile section plane. And here at the right side we can see an axonometric view. We have measures, so we have everything we need to model it. Here. Of course, it is. You how to draw it. I will do it in one way, but there is a lot of them. Maybe you can find one even more better or maybe worse. So feel free to follow your intuition. Maybe you will make some mistakes and you have to go back and then draw it again. But that is a good process for getting better and better. So me, I will start by drawing the plant floor, first of all, but before any step, I will re-scale this image in order to be more comfortable. We know how to do it perfectly. Tape measure tool, letter T for the shortcut, if we find that icon of the guideline, we tap Control key. We don't want it right now. We can go over camera, parallel projection, top view, I will use this measure 50. It seems that here it is talking about millimeters because this piece seems to be kind of small. But I will work during all the exercise in meters, not millimeters. And at the end, when it is already done, then I will re-scale. I will resize the object into millimeters. This is because if we are working in millimeters, SketchUp can have some kind of difficulties or errors. So it is better the way I just told you work in meters and then re-scale at the end. So first click here, second click here, we introduce the correct measure, 50, and you want to resize the model. Yes, zoom extense, and we have the image now in the correct size. I will move it. Let's start. I'll use some guidelines. This is not needed and you can draw your drill wherever you want. But I think it is a little bit easier for being, let's say, organized to follow with the guidelines are plants. And now if I check this floor plan, I can see that I have 50 here. Then we have here a radius of 15. And here this distance is again 15 because of this radius. So 15 plus 50 plus 15 total API, we have a rectangle, 80 m long, ten plus ten plus ten, 30 m width. This will be my first drawing. Rectangle. One-click AT semicolon. Here we're now letter T for the guidelines. I can check here that we have ten, then a whole and ten again, this whole is this hole here. So one click on the green axis, I type in 10 m. And again, 10 m. Perfect. Now this hole, it seems that ends here. And the distance, the depth of this hole is this radius. Multiply it by two, right? So if we have here 15 m radius, then we need 30, the diameter more than the radius. One-click here. I type in 30. Perfect. Now we are ready for deleting this piece of the drawing. I can use the rectangle again to be faster. One-click, one-click letter E for heating the eraser. And I delayed this phase. This side of the drill, the right side is already done in my plant floor. Let's go with the left side. We have here a cycle, this cycle. This cycle. If we are looking at a piece from a top view, I will draw here a guideline for you. In order to understand better the drawing, we need to be able to mark the center of the cycle. Because actually we have cycles. We have this little one and we have this big one. The distance from this margin to the center of the circle is the radius 15. And it seems that it is placed just in the middle of the width of the piece, right? So we have everything we need guideline, one-click 15 m enter. I didn't draw a guideline, but a point is a point. I don't want a point, so I can select it and delete it. And let's repeat this axial letter T, one click and release 15. Here we are. And then here another guideline, one click and release. And I look for this mid point, perfect, here in this intersection. We have the center of our cycles. Let's check the drawing again because we have a big cycle, 15 m radius and then this little one. And we know that the radius is going to be five because it is one-half of ten, right? The diameter would be ten, this diameter, but we need the radius. So the radius is one half of 105. Okay, let's draw it. Cycle sites 50. Let's start with the little one. One-click unreleased. We said that the little one is 5 m radius, five enter and the big one is 15. We can introduce the measure or we can do it graphically. We know that the radius is going to be tangent to here and here and here. So second click Space key, and now is high time for erasing the left overs letter E. And one click on this. And this is the relaxing part in where I delayed everything that I don't need. Pay attention that I have to delete as well. This phrase, because here we have a hole and this half of the cycle as well, letter e. Once I have the floor plan perfectly drawn, I would say that it is time for Extrude my drawing. Letter P for Post poll tool, I can orbit one-click unreleased. And what is the height of this model for knowing the high, I have to check, not the floor plan, but the profile, right? The section plane. This section plane is talking about this phase that we can see in the axonometric view. So if we trust the radius, we know that the height is going to be 30 m, the diameter, again, know the radius and the height would be the diameter. So again, pause, pull, one-click, unreleased. And I type in 30 m, I can erase these guidelines. I don't need them anymore. And now I will rotate my image because I want to pay attention to the section plane nodes to the ground floor. I selected Rotate, tool, one click and hold down. I select the correct plane for the rotation. The red color for the protractor is okay. I released second click and I type in 90, 90 degrees than selection tool move. And I can move this image in a position in where I feel comfortable for drawing because I need to check the measures. It could be there. This is up to you. So we have a cycle here, kind of hole. This hole is this hole which goes through all the width of the piece. And then we have here a kind of bite, which is gonna be a little bit more complicated. You will see because we will have to use here the solid tools. So let's start with this EC part. We need to draw this cycle. When we draw a cycle, first thing we need is the center of the cycle. The center is going to be separated of this margin by 15 m, the radius, and it is placed in the middle of the height of the piece. So it is easy to draw guideline, one-click here, 15, another guide line parallel to this line, we look for the mid point, and here in the intersection, it displays our center. We have here again two cycles, a little one and a big one. The little one, the diameter is ten, and the big one, the radius is 15. So let's start with the little one letter c For the cycle 1-click, the radius is going to be five and the big 11 click on the center. And we can do it graphically because we know that it should be tangent to this side. Perfect time for Post poll tool P, when this face lights up, one-click and release. And we know that if we move now to this right side, look what happens. We are creating a kind of cylinder, but this is not what we really want. We want to create a hole in this kind of leg and another hole in this, another leg of the piece, right? So let's do the whole once at a time. Then my second click should be e.g. here, in any point of this phase, and the hole is created now with a push-pull selected. If I hover over these phases, you can see how this face lights up. So one-click here and I'll do a negative extrusion because this piece of geometry is not needed at all. So I can delete it, doing, as I told you, this negative extrusion. So we are done with this leg and we need to do exactly the same here. We could repeat the same process by looking for the center, draw with the cycles and so on. But maybe it's more intelligent to copy the geometry that we have already drawn. So I could select this half of the cycle. I could add to my selection this cycle as well. So I hold down shift key, one click on this cycle. The selection that I want to copy them. Letter M for moving, I select e.g. this point. And this is very important because you will need a point which is repeated there in this and other leg in order to place my selection exactly in the same position. So one-click here, then look that I am moving my selection and my geometry is distorting a lot. But when I click Control key, I'm doing a copy and the copy is not glue with the previous geometric. So I move this copy to this another point, these twin point of this, another leg, second click and release. Here, our geometry drawn in a faster way. Right? Now we have the US to repeat the negative extrusions letter P. And look that this surface is perfectly marked. It is separated, isolated, so we can do that and negative extrusion. Let's do it. But this inner cycle is not isolated. I could say that it is a kind of error of a SketchUp because we did everything right. This is something that can happen time to time and we just need to find solutions. So we need to delete this cycle and we can try to repeat it again. Letter M, one-click control for doing a copy. And now it works. If it doesn't work, don't panic because we have many ways for drawing in SketchUp control set. And I will do it in another way, e.g. letter T for the guideline, one parallel to this line. Second click here. Then I have here the intersection point for my center letter C, one-click here, 5 m. And we have this face drawn in a completely different way, then letter P, one click and release. And we know that that hole has to finish exactly on this, another phase of the piece. So here we have the whole perfectly done. Let's erase all the guidelines in order to sort out our drawing. We don't need this half of the cycle neither, okay? Um, the only thing missing now is this hole, right? This kind of rectangular hall, which if we check the axonometric view, is this part. For doing this whole, as I told you before, we will need to use the solid tools. First question would be why? And the answer is because we have a complex geometry here. We have a kind of curve we have here. So if we try to do here and negative extrusion, like we did with this whole, we will find that is not possible. A SketchUp won't allow us to do it. But first of all, let's use the guidelines in order to be precise. We know that this height is 1,010.10, and here we have 30 m width. Let's move this image down here. Letter t, one parallel 10 m distance, another 10 m. Perfect. And then we have this 30 m, 15 from the center. So from here, 15 front view. And we already looked at here, I committed a mistake because those guidelines are not touching this phase. This is because when I was using this front view, my guidelines were taking from the red axis. I did something like that. So be careful with that. When you are using the top or the front view, I will erase them. This vertical guideline, it seems that it's okay. And then I will draw again this horizontal guidelines, letter T, 10 m, 10 m, perfect. Now, if I use a rectangle, you will see that I can make that extrusion push-pull tool. And as you can check, It's not possible to do this kind of negative extrusion here, not even here, because I will find that hope that vertical cylinder. So I need to work here with solid tools. So let's go over this upper bar, right button. We look for solid tools, one click and release. Here we have its two set. So we need now to solids to interact between each other and create this kind of bite. One of those solids will be this piece and the other solid will be a kind of 3D rectangle, which I will use in order to bite this first solid. So first thing is to create here a group right button. Make group one. Click in any of these buttons, e.g. here, subtract. And if I hover over this piece, I can find a number, which means that the tool is recognizing this group as a solid. It doesn't have any kind of error. Okay, then let's draw the second solid here. We have perfectly marked with these guidelines the height of that rectangle. So I will use them letter P. I will create this 3D model when this kind of graphic errors appears in SketchUp normally is because we are using the parallel projection view. And then the graphic card has some kind of problems. Sometimes if we go over perspective, you want find these problems. So that's work now with the perspective mode. We have that rectangle, three clicks, right button, make group. Let's check now if the solid tools recognize this element as a solid, it does perfect. Now I have to place this rectangle in the correct position here. Now I have to move it along the real axis. Here. Perfect. All is ready for doing the subtraction. I need this rectangle to bite my drill, right? Then I need that rectangle to disappear after the bite. So the tool that I need is subtract, subtract first, saw it from second and keep only the result in the model. This is exactly what I need. So I hit substract here. The order is very important. The one who bites is the rectangle. So first solid, the rectangle, one-click. Second solid, the drill. Here we are. It worked perfectly and the drill is finished. We just need to erase these guidelines. And here we have a group with this drill perfectly drawn. Now, the last step is to place this drill on the origin. So letter M one-click here origin and resize, rescale this drill because we were using during all the exercise meters. So letter T, one-click here, Control key if it pops up the guideline icon, second click the lens. Of course, it is 80 m and it has to be 8 mm. So we have to type in a t and the unit is millimeters. You want to resize the model? Yes, it seems that the real disappeared, but no, the thing is that now is very, very small. We can use the zoom extents. And here we have our drill perfectly resides. We can measure it 0.08 m, which is the same as 80 mm. Our image was resides as well. So this exercise is done. I know that the difficulty increased quite a lot, but I am totally sure that you are able to be successful if you have any doubt or any problem, don't hesitate to leave a comment and I will respond to you as soon as possible. And we will continue in the next episode with another exercise. 37. Exercise: greek column : Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we are gonna do an exercise about drawing Greek column. You can see on the screen the image that we will try to reply. This time, we will not support ourselves with measures just with the image. And our model will have to be as much proportional as we can. So we will start drawing the base, this square base first, then those circular Donald's. Then we have the column itself, which is a little bit inclined to the interior. Then again we have the Donald's and another cube on the top of the column. You will see that the exercise is quite complete because we will have to use a lot of the tools that we have already learned. So let's start drawing the base rectangle tool, one click. And the measures here will be, let's say 1.5 per each side. So 1.5 semicolon, 1.5 enter postpone tool. Here. The high, let's say 0.4 m. We have in this case the lady, the human being in order to give us the scale the humans kill, this column will be big and strong. So second step, I will make a loop with this cube. And let's start with the Donald's. Pay attention here because we'll need to use the Follow me tool as far as the SDS of this cylinder are curved. So let's start drawing here a cycle letter C, sites. You can choose 50 or 100. I will say 100 is time. I want my circle to be very, very smooth. Then I need to find the center of this cube and I can do it through the iterations. So I'll go to this midpoint. I move myself along the red axis. I do exactly the same here, mid point, and I move along the green axis, and I found the center of this cube without drawing any line. One-click, then I need the radius. The radius will be 0.55. And here we have our site. Very smooth because it has 100 sites, 100 segments. Now pay attention here because we will need to use the Follow me tool. This kind of donuts has its sights curve. So if we just extrude this phase, we will get a cylinder, which we don't want it, right? So first thing that we have to do is to draw a section plane of that donuts and then use this cycle as the path of the Follow Me too. Let's do it. Letter L for the line tool. Then I'll find the center of the cycle. One-click, I move along the green axis this time and I hold down shift key in order to block that direction. When I find the intersection with the cycle, second click and I move along the blue axis. This time, 0.2 will be this high, 20 cm. Then I move again along the green axis. I blocked that we axiom and I close easily this section plane. Now, I will use the arc to be more precise, two-point arc, I would say that it is up to you how much curved you want your donuts to be. So let's say that e.g. first click could be here. Second click here, and click on the mid point. I didn't change the number of sides of this arc, so I find it too much polygonal. One is the back control set to point arc again, 24 is not enough, let's say 51st. Click, second click and click. Good. Now time for using the Follow me tool. Firstly, I have to select the path. Then I hit the tool, follow me and I click on the surface. Here, e.g. here we have our donut. We can erase the left overs. Even this cycle here. We don't need it anymore. And this line can be erased. It too. I will select the complete object right bottom reverse faces. And I will make a group here as well. Let's go with this second donut letter M. And I will make a copy by clicking Control key. This second donut, we can check that it is a little bit smaller. So I'll use the scale tool. One click on this corner, I hold down Control key in order to fix the center in the middle of this cube. And then pay attention here because this second click will be random, e.g. here. Now before selecting anything else, I will type in the correct scale, 0.9. Enter this object now is a little bit smaller and it is perfectly aligned with the center of the column. Now, I need to place it just over this first. Known it. So I'll go over camera, parallel projection, front view, letter M. I will select this precise point. I will move myself along the blue axis, and I will select any point on the surface of the doughnut. Here we are. I can orbit and check that everything is right. Everything seems okay, except for the fact that this second object, it is too high, right? So let's change that scale. I will distort the high just by changing the scale through this rap points. I moving myself along the blue scale axis. I will type in 0.5. Let's make another copy, letter M, Control key. We repeat the same action with the scale tool using the Control key for fixing the center randomized scale. And then 0.9 enter letter M. We go again over the front view and we repeat exactly the same process as before. Here we are. We have our base already modeled. Let's go now with the column. We can check that the column has more or less the same radius, a little bit less. And then the big difficulty here will be to model this stretch marks alone all the perimeter. Let's start by measuring these radius. One click on a tape measure tool. If we don't find here the center of this cycle, let's try to go inside this group and then repeat the same operation. Hover over the circumference. Few seconds, then go to the center and we can check that we're not recognizing the center of this cycle. This would be because we have changed the shape with the Follow me tool. And now Sketchfab is not recognizing this object as a normal cycle, we have to find a solution. One solution could be to use this queue. By using the tape measure tool. I will draw some guidelines. I'd click on the x-ray and then another guideline, vertical one on this intersection. I will erase this horizontal ones and I will keep the US the vertical, which for sure would be very, very useful now and in the future. Because let's say that it is the central vertical axis of this column. And besides this, on this intersection, we will find the center of any of these donuts. Furthermore, if I even want to mark that center, I could use a guide point. I select the guide 0.1. It is draw one, and I will place it exactly here on this intersection point in order to mark clearly where is that center? Okay, so we were trying to measure that radius. One-click 0.4 m, that is the radius. Let's draw the base of the column. Cycle tool. One click zero point, let's say 39 because it is a little bit smaller. Push-pull tool, 3 m high. Now let's go through those stretch marks. This will be a little bit difficult. So pay attention here. First thing that I want you to do is again, to use the guidelines letter T. I will use a guideline in this green axis direction. And I want that guideline go over the center of this top surface of the column. Then again, the same, but in this orthogonal direction. We have here now I kind of clock, Let's say that this is 12th, 36.9. And I am saying this because we're going to use the rotate tool, but adding a copy and not just one copy, but 24 copies because we want 24 stretch marks around this conference. So we'll start placing here our first stretch mark, and then we will copy that stretch mark once here. And we will repeat that copy 23 times for completing all their circumference. Let's start again to point out sites 24 is not enough. Let's say 50 will go to this point. And we'll try to be here very, very precise. So I will use the guideline, 0.02 on the right side and the same distance on the left side. Then two point arc. First click here, second click here, and the third click, let's say 0.02 m. Again. This window pops up, but it is not important. We accept it and we can keep going. So what I'm gonna do with this arc here, well, I will use the boost pool tool in order to do and negative extrusion and subtract this geometry. This way I will create a kind of a stretch mark. It's not always about adding geometry, but sometimes it's easier to subtract the geometry. Good. Now I can erase these guidelines. Look that here we have our graphic card error. This is because we are using the parallel projection camera. So let's say it's over perspective. And now I will select this arc here to select it. Hit the rotate tool. Pay attention here because this is the most difficult part we need to fix the center of that rotation. The center will be the center of the circle and the protractor has to be in this blue color, right? So it is correct. So I can click and release. We fix this first axis by clicking this second point. And then we move ourselves to the right side. And we got to fix the angle of this rotation. But we don't want to move this stretch smart. We want to make a copy. So I will click Control, and here it is, this first copy. What is the angle that we want? Well, here we have to do some math. We want 24 stretch marks, and we have 360 degrees in this circumference. So 360/24 is 15 degrees. I can type in 15 Enter. And here we have our copy perfectly placed on our object. But we haven't finished yet before unselect or selecting anything else. We have to type in arteries and the number of copies that we want, in this case 23 because the original is the 24th Enter. Here we have all the stretch marks already drawn. Next step would be to make those extrusions, those negative extrusions over and over again. But for doing any of these extrusions, first, I need to check that the area is correct, that this arc is closed, this phase is closed. Here. Look that it is not closed at all. Here it is, but here it's not. This is because sometimes when we are using the side clouds, the conferences are not perfect. We know that they are not curves but polygons. And then we can find this kind of errors and we have to fix it. Letter L. And we draw this little line that we need for closing this phase. Once the face is close, Post poll, zoom out and I can easily do my negative extrusion. I repeat this axiom here by clicking twice rapidly. Again here. Let's hope that we don't have to fix many more faces once we have finished our task, this will be the aspect of our column. Then we'll need two inclined that column towards the interior, right? How can we do that? Well, first thing is to raise this guideline. And then I will select this area, this phase in order to hit the scale tool and look that I am just scaling this surface thanks to the glute concept. If I change the scale of these elements are just in the center, in the middle by holding down Control key, look that I can incline all the column towards the interior or the exterior. So again, I will click for the second time randomly. And now I'll type the correct scale. Let's say 0.8. Here we can take our column a little bit inclined towards the interior. We have those lines like leftovers that should be erased. Of course. Let's make our group and let's place the column on the correct spot. So I will grab the center. First click here, and the second click is already marked. So it is super easy. We are close to finish the exercise. Let's go with this top part of the column. I'll use this same donuts. I select the first one. I move it along the blue axis, and I make a copy camera. Parallel projection, top view, scale tool, hold down Control key, one-click, and let's fix this download more or less here. Second click. And we move our say, along the blue axis on this top part of the column. Here it is. Maybe we need this donut to be a little bit bigger. Scale again, hold down Control key, let's say 1.1. Here we are. It looks okay. Let's make a copy. One click and release. We constrain the axis scale tool again, Let's distort this CEP along the blue scale axis. I type in to that is the scale factor this time. And finally, that's model that Q I hit the rectangle tool. Once the rectangle tool is selected, I will tap Control key in order to draw that rectangle from the center of the rectangle. Here we find the intersection point, which is the center. One-click and I move myself in any direction. One semicolon, 1 m, postpone tool, 0.2 m. Here we are. It is more or less, okay? We can make a group with this cube as well. And we could say that the colon is already finished, right? Camera perspective. We can watch it even better right now. I really hope that you'd like the exercise. And if you have any doubt, don't hesitate to leave a comment. And I will respond to you as soon as possible. 38. Intro Barcelona Pavillion: Hello everybody and welcome to this new class in where I will give you an introduction about this new project that we will be doing during the course, which will be a little bit more difficult, complex. So we will need different glasses for finishing it. Here you can see a model of the economy Barcelona Pavilion, designed by me run the ROI in 1929, where this building is very, very famous because it is very representative about minimalism. So it means that it is complex about how the space is worked on it. But at the same time, the year my tree is simple or three angles, the surface of the materials are playing. It is used glass and metals and other novels materials. So what I want to say is that this building is very good for learning. So at the end of the course, we will be able to design a model like this. This is our goal, our scope. Here I have different scenes, e.g. this one of the entrance here at the swimming pool. Here looking at the interior. So the idea is to review all the tools that we're learning as we model the building. I hope you liked it and be ready because on the next episode, we will start working. 39. Barcelona Pavillion 1. Podium and walls: Hello everyone and welcome to this new class in where we're going to start our work project. We will start with the Barcelona Pavilion. So let's go over a file import. Here, I will pick up the floor plan. One click on the iridium, and we have to rescale the image. We have here a graphic scale. So it will be very easy. Tape measure tool, one click and release, second click. The measure has to be 10 m. Then enter. Do you want to resize the model? Yes. As you can see, I'm working faster because here, let's say that we are in the third level during this work project, I tried to not explain many things. It will be more practical class where I tried to work more or less like in my normal workflow. We have the theoretical classes in where I explain a lot. Then we have the normal exercise in where I go one step forward. There is less theory and more practice. And this is the third level, as I told you, in where there is no theory because the theory is already explained, more practice and more speed. So coming back to our drawing, the image is already resides. We can check that here we have nor the direction of the north. We will use it in the future. We can take as well that we have different walls, different furnitures, glasses, the entrance here and here. This is the swimming pool. We have two swimming pools. This one and this one. I recommend you any way to check the different images that I attached with the course to get familiar with this building. But anyways, I will start drawing the podium of the building. So camera, parallel projection, top view here, maybe we're more comfortable. We can use the line tool. That's a start. We have finished our podium. We could orbit, and here we will need the high of this podium. In order to get this high, we will need to use different peaks that I attached with the course. And more or less, we have to guess that high, I would say that it is 1.55 m. So P post pool 1.55 m. We have the podium already drawn. And now if we want to follow the image, we would need to place again the image on the surface of that podium. So I will select it and I will move it from e.g. this point to this one. Now we have the image on the surface of the podium, and we could use the X-Ray in order to watch through that phase, I see what is going on on that surface. Next step here will be to draw the swimming pools, these two swimming pools, this one and this one, because let's say that those swimming pools are part of the podium kinds of holes. So I will use the tape measure tool in order to draw a guideline. Right-click on here. And this distance is important because it will be the thickness of the walls you will see later. So let's say that it is 0.16 m, 16 cm. Enter. Now I'll use the rectangle tool one click on here, and second click on this corner. We have a new phase that we will post later. Let's go with a second swimming pool. We will use the same process. So letter T, 0.16, that distance will be the thickness of our wall here as well. Another guideline on this side, 0.16 rectangle tool, one click here on the corner and another click on the opposite corner. We can check that we have created a surface. So now let's switch off the X-ray. I will hide my image and I will post this phase in order to create the depth of the swimming pool. That depth will be 0.3 m. Two clicks here for repeating that last axiom. Once here, I will select all my podium and I will create a group time now for drawing the walls, Control U, that is the data for unhide, the last object. In this case, the image we can switch on again the x-ray. And if we don't have a shortcut, maybe is high time for creating it. So let's go over Window Preferences. And here we go over shortcuts. The filter would be x ray. We can find the function here, view phase style X-ray, and we should add a shortcut letter X. In my case. Click on here and okay, so now I hit letter X and I switch on the X-ray. If we are still not able to recognize the lines of the walls, then we can change this view is Style and go over wireframe. Now we can appreciate much more better those lines. I will start drawing this wall here so we can see that it starts at this point, all our podium is inside a group box. So if I draw something here, isn't gonna be glue with anything else. So top view line tool now, one click on here, 0.16, because I want the same thickness everywhere. Then I move along the red axis. I can block that red axis field here, green axis. I can lock it as well till here. And I close this surface of this first wall, like we are working now on this wireframe view. We can't see the faces. Let's move over, say that with textures. And let's check that we have created that phase that will be extruded with a caret high it is there. So everything is correct. Postpone tool. The high this time will be 3.1 m. Here we are. We have our first wall and now we have just to continue around the perimeter letter T guideline. Here, 0.16 L, we create this face letter P and we extrude this wall. Here. We could repeat this same process. Letter T, 0.16, letter L. We use the guideline letter P tilde. Here we are with again the same 0.16 letter L P here. Now we can check the photo again. I switch on the X-ray. I could erase these guidelines if I am a little bit confused. Now we have another wall here. So let's do it. We can use the rectangle there. We'll start here. We'll finish this more or less. Here, the thickness will be 0.16. I check the dimensions bar to adjust that thickness. And second click, we check the face. Postponed tool, 3.1 m. I am all the time working with the parallel camera view on. So if I want to change that, I can go over camera perspective. This is up to you. Let's go now with this, another wall which starts here and it goes along this perimeter. It turns left here around the swimming pool and it will finish more or less here. When it becomes IN of glass. Then we will find two more walls. This one and this one. We can check the photos whenever we need. As you can imagine, I know this building as the palm of my hand, but you will need some time to get familiar with it. So let's start this wall here. And this time we'll use another way for drawing. Another tool. This time we'll use the Follow Me too. Because actually we know the path starts here. And as we said, it goes over this perimeter around the swimming pool and finishes more or less here when it becomes a glass. So we'll draw the path and withdraw as well. The surface that we want to follow that path. Let's start with the letter L. It starts here. One quick second click on this corner. Click on this, another corner of the swimming pool. Third, click here. At this point, we have the path. Let's go with the Surface line tool. I draw this first line along the blue axis. Now when x is 0.16, and then I can close this phase easily. We have the face and we have the path. So we choose the path. First click hold down Shift key for adding elements to my selection. Once we have the path, Follow me and one click on my face. Here we have our wall perfectly drawn and I think that it could be more rapid. We are close to finish. We need just those two walls. More. Rectangle starts here, and it will finish here. The thickness is 0.16, So I adjust that thickness and I keep that length. Second click Postpone tool. I can use the height of any wall as a reference. And let's go with the last one. Rectangle tool starts here and it will finish here. Again. I take the thickness. Here we are. And finally, the walls are done. We can hide the meds and erase the left overs. So summing up the most important things here, first, draw the podium and make that podium group because we don't want the walls to be glue with that podium. After modelling the podium, we will start with the walls step-by-step using the x-ray and sometimes the wireframe view, we will draw those words using always the same thickness. In my case, 0.16 m, the height will be 3.1 m. And once we have finished with all of them, is time again to make groups. So I will make a group with this wall, another group with this another wall. Look here, e.g. I. Made a group and the group box is quite big, much more bigger than it should be on. For me, this is a signal that there is an error here, not an Iraq, sorry, but in my selection, Let's say that I had to grab something else. Then that's something is inside the group. That is the reason because this box is so big. So when a step back and I repeat, my selection, may group. Now we can check that the group box fits perfectly with the wall. That is the good side. Now, another group with this, another wall right bottom, make group. Another one with this one. Look that I selected some lines here. Which item want? So I will repeat the selection this time. I will click three times on my wall. Right button, met group, the same here. Three clicks, 123, everything is perfectly selected, right bottom. Make group. Now, everything is perfectly organized. We have one group for the podium, including the swimming pools and different groups for the different wolves. Sometimes say goodbye. If you have any doubt, don't hesitate to leave a comment, and we will continue modeling the Barcelona Pavilion in the next work project episode. 40. Measure distances and angles: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see how to use the measure tools. And when I say measure, I mean measure distances and measure angles. Because actually we have already learned how to measure distances. We learned that we have to use the tape measure tool. And I'll give you here a reminder, because this tool is one of the most important tools in SketchUp and it has four features. The first one, we can measure things, e.g. the basement of this cone, 1.50 m. The second feature is the possibility to create guidelines and that guideline icon will pop up. We'll have to tap Control key to turn it on or turn it off. The third feature is the possibility to create guide points. Remember that for creating a guide point, we have to click and release on an endpoint like e.g. here, or here or here. The fourth feature, as you already know, is the possibility to scale all the model. We have to measure any distance, e.g. this 11.5 s. Click. Then we have to type in their desire measure. Let's say e.g. 1 m enter, window pops up and we say yes or no. This time we'll say No. This is all about the tape measure tool. But we have another tool for measure angles. It is this one. Here. It is called protractor. And in the description, we can read measure angles and create guides. Because a part of measure angles, this tool will create a guideline to, let's see how it works. It is very easy. Let's hit on the protractor. Then this protractor will pop up. Depending on the camera position, it will have one color or another. We know that that color means that we are working on the orthogonal plane to the color of that axis. So let's place the camera on a top view, and then we will be working on these orthogonal plane to the blue axis, in other words, in the ground floor. And don't forget that we can change that color of the protractor if we hit the arrow keys, right arrow and we change to the red color, left arrow and which thanks to the green color, arrow, blue color and down arrow and returns two are orthogonal or parallel plane relative to other element. In this case here the protractor is parallel to that photo. Once we are clear about those concepts, we have to click unreleased on one specific point. For this example, let's do it randomly here, one-click release, and then we have to choose another single point in order to create a kind of rotation axis. Let's choose this second point on the red axis. And once we have said that axis, then it is the time for measure the angle that we are looking for that I am moving the mouse and in the measure tools, it appears a number, which means the angle. So here we can do it graphically or we can type in that specific number, let's say e.g. 45 degrees. I type in 45 Enter. And here we have that guideline which has been created in order to allow us to draw normally aligned using that angle. Now let's use again this tool. In a more practical example. I will erase everything except my column. I will even this photo, then I will make a copy. This column, e.g. 10 m far away from the first one. And let's draw this kind of triangular fronting, typically from these Greek temples. So firstly, we have to heat the tool protractor. Then we'll need to choose the correct lane for that angle. And the first specific point for the rotation axis. I will choose this mid 0.1 click and hold down in order to change the color of that protractor. We can do it this way as well, or using the arrow keys, as we said before, once the green color is marked, I released the bottom of my mouse and then that green color is fixed. And the tool is asking me for choosing that second point of the rotation axis. This second points should be along this red axis. So one-click e.g. here, it is already fixed and then it's high time for choosing the angle. I can orbit. And let's say that our angle will be 30 degrees. So I type in theory, enter that guideline keeps drawn on the screen so I can use the line tool in order to draw over this reference. But before using the line tool, I will repeat this previous axiom with this another column. So productive. Again, mid 0.1, click and hold down, I choose the correct color, the wing 1 s point for fixing the rotation axis. Then the tool is asking us for the angle three. Enter. Here we are. Now we can hit the line tool in order to draw easily this triangular front term. Actually in the future, we will continue drawing this rig temple in a more precise way. And we'll use this protractor in order to draw in a very accurate way this rig front-end. So I hope that you liked the class. And in the next episode, we will see this another tool called text. 41. Text tools: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to talk about the text in SketchUp. Well, we have two tools here. We have this tool called text. The description says Draw text labels, and then we have this another one, 3D texts, draw 3D texts. So let's just start with this one, the normal text. So I'll hit on it. Then. We have different options for writing our texts in a scepter. Basically, it is going to depend on where we are going to click with the tool. The texts will have different properties. If I click and release on here on an empty space without human tree, or I click over any geometry. If I click on an empty space, one click and release, this level will pop up. And then I just have to type in the text. Let's write down e.g. portico. One click outside. Here we have our text. This is called Screen text and its main property be that it would be, let's say, always facing the camera I am orbiting and the text is always facing the camera. If I zoom out and zoom in, the texts, keep facing the camera and the size doesn't change at all. Furthermore, we have another kind of text. It is called leader text, will need to click on release on any geometry, e.g. here. And then the two will ask us about selecting a second point. Let's say here. Now the label is available for us to type in whatever we want. Let's type in here, e.g. sunk, one-click outside. Here we can say that this kind of texts is made up of two different elements, the label and a leader line. We will be able to edit both of those elements. The third kind of texts that this tool offers us is called area text will need to click on any area on any face. I will choose e.g. this one on the top of the column. And we need to click here twice very rapidly. Click, click, then the labeled pops up. I'll type in here, capital one click outside. Here we have this new text I told you is called area text. And the main property about these texts is that as it happens with the screen, text is always facing the camera. But when the area in this text is placed, this appears because we changed the point of view of the camera, then the text disappears too. So summing up, we have three kinds of tests. A string, literal, text, area text, if we want to edit, any of them, will need to go over the model info window. I remind you that this model info window is here. Click on this little human being. Or we can find it as well. If we go over window model, then here we have a list of different things. And one of them is texts. We can find here three different categories. Screen text. This is talking about this kind of text written in an empty space. Then we have the leader text, this one, and then we have this third category called leader lines. We will use this category in order to edit this leader lines. If you are wondering where is the area texts? The answer is that the area text is included here inside the leader tests. So let's start with the screen text. Here we can read the kind of type font that we are using and the size. We can change easily that type font. If we click on here, Let's say Arial, Let's change the size, 16, okay? We can change the color. We have available different color modes. And once the changes are done, then we have to click on this option, select all screen text. One-click on here, our screen text is selected, this one. And then we have to click on selected text. The text is still selected, and that is the reason because it is still blue, one click outside and we can see how those changes are already applied. Exactly the same with these and other kinds of texts. Liter. Let's go over fonts. Arial, let's change the font. Style is time, the size, okay, and the color, let's say green. Ok, select all literal text. And you can check on our Canvas how the area text is selected as well, and then update selected text. One-click outside. And we can see the changes applied leader lines, two categories, endpoint and leader and point. If we expand this window, we have known dot, closed arrow and open arrow, Let's say dot liter. We have pushpin on View base. Let's click on view based. Again, select all liter text and then update, select the text. One click outside. Here we have the changes. More things about these texts tool. If I click any of them, right button, will find here this option text. So I can easily type in a new text. We are talking about this literal text. I select it right button. I have the same option, edit text, but I have as well this arrow option. So I can change this specific leader text and not all of them as we were doing before through the model info window. Finally, it is convenient for you to know that if we are using these texts tool, it is very handy to support ourselves with this entity Info tray one. We have the text selected through this tray will be able to change the liar, even edit this specific text, change the color, and so on. So this is all about these texts tool. Let's move on this 3D text. One hit on it, and then this window pops up. First thing we have to do is to write down the text 40 go again. Then here we will be able to change the font, the alignment, and the font style. And we'll find these different options in order to field the phases of the letters, extrude those faces this way, create a 3D model. This high is talking about the high in 2D of that text. And this, another value is the one talking about the high of the extrusion. Let's check it here. Plays one-click and release. Our 3D text is already placed. And if we use here that tape measure tool, you will see that the height is 0.03, as I told you. And this value, 0.25 m is the one which was talking about the high in 2D of that text. I will hit the tool again. And you can circuit this high is the high in 2D. This another value is the high in 3D, the height of the extrusion. If I switch off this field option and I placed the text, then we find that the faces are not filled and we don't have any extrusion. Because the thing here is that you have to understand that this text is like normal geometry in SketchUp. This element is actually a component. We could explode it. And then the geometry can be manipulated easily through the post poll tool or any different SketchUp tool, like e.g. the scale tool, the rotate tool or whatever. Let's create a group. Again, make group. And I'll rotate this text and I will scale it as well in order to create a more attractive layouts. So this is all about the texts, tools in SketchUp. I hope that you liked this lesson. And in the next episode, we will see this dimension tool. 42. Dimension tools: Hey guys and welcome to this new class in where we are going to see the dimension tool will find this tool here. And the description says, draw dimension lines between any two points. It is very easy and intuitive. So we hit the tool one click e.g. here, another click on this end point, click and release. And then when I move the mouse, we can see our dimension, 12.37 m. Third click for fixing that dimension. Here it is. We could repeat the same action on this, another facade of this building, or better said, this plant floor. Furthermore, we have the possibility to go over the model info window. We already know that we can open this window if we go over this little person, or we can find it too. If we go over window model info. In the previous class, we saw here this text category, and this time we'll go over these dimensions category. It works in a very similar way. We have here text, leader lines dimension. What we're gonna do from here is to edit our dimensions drawn in our Canvas. The current font is called tau. This is the size of the font and this is the color. We can change it easily. Let's pick up Verdana font. It static, 14 Points size. We can change the color, red color. And if we want to update these changes in our dimensions, we have to click on Select all dimensions first and then update selected dimensions. Here we are. If we are talking about the leader lines, we can expand this window and we can choose between all these options. Now we are working with closed arrow. Let's select dot. Again, select all dimensions, update selected dimensions, very easy. The last option is called dimensional, and we have two possibilities aligned to screen and aligned two-dimensional line aligned to a screen means that when we are with the text of our dimensions is always facing the camera so we can read it easily from any position. On the other hand, if we select aligned two-dimensional line, again, select all dimensions and updates selected dimensions. Then when we orbit, we won't be able to read those dimensions because that text is now aligned to the dimension line. Furthermore, we can align that text outside of that line centered. You can see it here or what is called above. As you can see, we don't have here a lot of possibilities, just a few. But to be honest, if you want to prepare layout of your plants or of your drawings and use dimensions on that layout. Maybe SketchUp is not the correct software, but another software called precisely layout. This software is a kind of brother or sister of SketchUp. When we download SketchUp, actually it comes with it and it is thought exactly for doing presentations of our projects. Anyways, in this window, we can find here our last option called experts dementia and settings. I'll go just through the first one, room, withdraw a cycle, and we use the dimension tool on it. We can read a prefix before our measure. The prefix of diameter, thanks to this option, will be able to hide that prefix, which is not, let's say, attractive. Besides this edit options, if we want to change just one dimension, e.g. these 12.37, I can select it right button. And here again, we can edit text and change this measure and pay attention here because these 12.37 is the true measure. But here, if it is convenient for us, maybe we can say that this measure is 12.3. Enter. We are lying, but sometimes it can be handy for our goals again, right button and we can go over the x position as well. We can change the position of that text now is centered. We can say outside start and it moves here to the beginning of the dimension. Or we can say outside n and it goes, as you can see, to the opposite side. Let's place it again, centered. And then the last option here is go over Entity Info. Thanks to this tray, again, we'll be able to make changes easily. We could change the color, we could change the font and the font style exactly as we did before, but just for this specific dimension. So this is all about the dimension tool. In the next class, we will see how to change the position of our general axis in order to draw in a more faster and simple way when our model demands it. 43. Axis: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see the axis tool will find this tool here in this position. It is called axis. And the description says move or reorient the drawing axis. It is talking about this general axis, the blue one, the green one, and the red one, which, as we already know, are helping us all the time, draw in a more easy way because we can block parallels, use inspirations. One, e.g. in this drawing, we have a kind of a square, a square with a building. Let's say that this Q is a kind of building in case that we want to draw e.g. let's say a kind of lethal garden. And its geometry is all the time orthogonal to the different lines that we have in our drawing. We won't need change anything. We will draw us. We usually do this little garden or this little swimming pool. It could be whatever will be drawn easily. But imagine that we don't want this kind of geometry. But another one more complex in where we have angles, inclined lines or something like that. Imagine e.g. that this is our angle are inclined line. Then we want to draw another circle or a line to this previous line. Then we can use this information in this pink color, which is telling us that we are drawing a perpendicular line to the previous eds. We can use this information, but we can't use the arrow keys or whatever to block our axis. We can do it this way, but it's not that easy. If I want to close this, take e.g. the iterations are not working and I cannot block anything using the arrow keys. I should draw this line longer than escape, and then another line, then the eraser. And here we have our sake, maybe for just one CEP, we don't need to change the position of the general axis. But if we are going to draw many different shapes using these precise angle, then I strongly recommend you to use this access to. We should hit the tool one click and release, then the tool is loaded and asking us for the first point, let's say e.g. here we click and release, and then we have to choose the second point and the position of that red axis and green axis. Let's say here, second click, then I move the mouse again, and it's time for setting these green axis and blue axis. The blue axis has to be always pointing up. So third, click here, and the new position of this general axis has been set successfully. The good thing about this is that now if we want to draw more shapes with these precise angle, as I told you before. Now, it's super-easy because we'll be able to draw again parallels, block the axis using the arrow keys or holding down the Shift key, as we always used to do once we're happy with the result and we want to reset the position of the general axis. We better go over any of the general axis, e.g. in this case, I will do it over this blue axis. Right bottom, reset, just here, one good piece of information, and I'll go one step back. Because when you hover over any of the axis, if you want the reset option to appear when you click the right button, like now, you will need to click the right button in a position in where you don't have the geometry behind you. I mean, if e.g. I. Hover over this position right button, then a sketch up thus and understand what we want to do. And he thinks that we are trying to modify that phase of the square root. So scape and will need again to go over any of the axis in a position in where we don't have the geometry behind that axis, e.g. here, right button reset. As you can see, these two is easy and simple. We just have to be focused on when is the correct time for using it. I hope you liked the class. And in the next episode, we'll go through this section plane tool. This tool, you have to know that it has its own set bar. It is this one. So it will be a little bit more complicated. 44. Section tool: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see the section plane tool. We can find this tool here in this position. It is part of the cameras set to, but at the same time, it has its own tool set. These toolset is this one. And if in your case it is closed, you will have to click right button in the upper bar and look for section here where this set bar has four buttons and normally it comes with the last two of them already clicked. So take that into account. This one and this one are already pressed. That's the reason because they have this blue field cholera around. Anyways, let's start from the beginning. The first option is called Section Plane, and the description says the row section planes to expose interior details in the model. So let's click it. I feed the tool, and then when I hover over my model, you will see how different section planes bought up. And depending in what plane I am, hover my mouse, I will take one plane or another. Let's choose e.g. this plane orthogonal to the green axis, one-click unreleased. And then this window pops up in where I can write down the name of that section. Section one is okay. I can change even the symbol of that section plane. I can even click this up soon if I want to avoid this window in the future. And my section plane is already there in this orange color. The symbol is number one. And now it will work exactly the same as all the geometry in SketchUp. I mean, I can select it just by clicking on it. Then it becomes blue and I can move it, move tool, one click and release. I move myself along the axis. And then that section plane is cutting my model from a different position, right? Once I'm happy with the result, second click on my section plane is already placed in these new spot. The color is still blue, which means that the section plane is still selected. If I hit the selection tool by clicking space key, one click outside, and the section plane is already selected. As you can check. Now, the second option has been automatically breast, because if we read the description, it says title section planes on and off. Now we have in our drawing one section plane, and in this very moment it is on. But if I select it and I use this second option, I can toggle it on or off, one-click and I toggle that section playing off another click and I toggle it on. The third option is talking about this section cat. It says Toggle section cuts on an off. Now it is on. And if I say one-click and it is off. So here we have to distinguish between the section plane. This is the section plane and the section cut. When the section cut is off, it means that this section plane is like not working at all. It's doing nothing. It's just a plane. They're like normal geometry. But if the section cut is on, that plane, is cutting our model. The fourth option is talking about the section. This section fill is now on. We can see it here. Now is blue because the section plane is selected. But if we deselect it, then we can check that the sexiest fill is black. We will be able to change that color. But thanks to this fourth option, we can toggle on and off that section field now is off. The section field now is empty. We have this emptiness typical from any model in a schizont. Let's toggle it on. I zoom out. And once we have learned everything about this section toolbar, Let's see more possibilities that this section toolbar is offering us in SketchUp because this is not all that we can do. Firstly, we will select the section plane right button. And here, first of all, we will be able to toggle on and off that section plan as we were doing before. But we will find here new options to e.g. this reverse option, our section plane has some arrows on its corners pointing in one direction. If we click reverse, we are changing that direction along the green axis. And then we are cutting our model in the opposite direction, again, right bottom reverse. Another thing that we can do is aligned view. We can align the position of the camera as we used to do with normal geometry and even use the parallel projection camera. This is the typical view for using our section plane. We don't want the perspective view normally. One is the BCG perspective right button again. And the next option is called Create Group from slides. This could be interesting. Let's do it. One-click. It seems that nothing happened, but you can check that here we have something selected. I will toggle off the section cut, and I will toggle off as well this section plane, look that we have here, this line across all the model. I will select it and I will move it out from the model. What we have here is a group with that slice of the model inside. If I open the entity Info tray, it says that this element is a group. We can go inside this group by clicking twice. Then we'll be able to use these slides for our purpose in the way that we consider the best escape. Let's come back to our model. I will toggle on the section plane and then look what happened. The section plane now is longer. It comes to the end of this group, will see what is going on just in few minutes. But before that, let's select again that section plane right bottom. And I want to show you this last option which is very, very powerful slice model at section, if I hit this upsilon, what I'm doing as that option set is slice the model. So now the rest of the model has been delighted. This could be very powerful, as I said, but of course, it depends on our purpose. This time, I don't want to lose the rest of the model. So I'll go one step back. Control set. I will select again my section plane. I toggle on the section cut right button on the section plane aligned view. I will zoom in. I will deselect this section plane. And now I want to show you how can I change thickness of the section cat and the color of the section pill? I will need to use another tray, a new one called styles. We will see these styles tray in any specific episode because we have here almost endless possibilities. And one of those possibilities is to play with the thickness and the field of our sections will need to go over edit. And then here we have different possibilities. The last one is called modelling settings. Once you hit it, then you will find more options. And these last two are section and section lines. Here we are talking about the color. I can change it easily, let's say red color, e.g. then the section field is already red. We can change the color of the section lines as well and the width. Let's say e.g. instead of three, let's say six, the double Enter. Now you can check in our drawing how the thickness has increased. So finally, let's talk about why this section plane became longer. I will toggle off the section gut and I will click on my model. Then look that this model is placed inside a group or component box. I can check it on the entity Info. It is a component. If I go now over the outliner, we can check here the structure of our drawing. We have one component called Italy pavilion. Then we have a group, which is this new group that we did before. And we have one section plane. This section, if we focus on this Italy pavilion and we expand this component, we can find that here we have another four components. This one, which is this guy, another guy here, another one and another one. And then we have four groups. The white one, the red one, the green one, and this white rectangular cube. So the thing is that when we are using a section plane, that section plane is going to fit the size of our different groups or components. And if we don't have any group or component, that section plane will expand till the next geometry. I mean, here we have a component box. If I click on the section plane and I create a new section plane pointing the same direction. Click Name section two symbol to this section plane as it is not placed inside the component box, but outside, is taking the length of all the geometry that he is finding in our drawing till the beginning of this model, to the end of this, another model, I will erase it. And then let's do another example. If this time I go inside these components box, click, click sex and plan again, same direction named Section 33. Okay, now you can check how this section plane is fitting. The size of our component box is not going outside that box, I click outside. And now we have two section planes in our drove in, one inside that component box and the other one outside. Imagine e.g. that I want to just this red part of the model. How should I do it? First of all, I have to go inside this component box. Click, click, then I will select this red model. It is a group. Then I have to go inside this group. Click, click, and once I am inside section plane, I select the correct position of my section plane, name and symbol. Okay? Here it is. Now just is a matter of plays my section plane in the correct spot and play with our different options as we already learned, the good thing about this is that we can combine different section planes in the same drawing. I mean, now we have this vertical section plane inside this group. And then e.g. it could be interesting if I use inside this group another section plane, but this time in this and other position, in a horizontal position, click Section five, symbol five. I select this section plane. I move it along the blue axis. Click here, I have the result. Here. Pay attention because this is a little bit tricky. This horizontal section cannot interact with this vertical section because they are in the same group, but it can interact with this another vertical section, because this vertical section is in another group. Let's do it. So I go out from that group, I select this number three section, I move it. We can see how this section is cutting our model and now look how it's interacting with that number phi section. So we can create complex cuttings in our model. I deselect everything. I could hide the section planes. And here we have the result. If the width of the section lines is too much, remember, we should go over styles, modelling settings. Let's say three again. The section fetal, let's say again black because I prefer it. Now, there's one last tip. Imagine that you want to toggle off just one section plane. Not all of them when you are working with many different sects and planes, you don't have to do it by using the section to set, because here we are taking over all the section planes at the same time. So e.g. if we want to toggle off that horizontal section plane, we should go inside that group. So one-click, two clicks to go inside this first component, I select the correct group. I click twice. Once I am inside, I would toggle on the section planes. I will select the correct one, right button. And then I have to use this option and this selected. Here we have the result, just that section plane has been toggled off. I can go out from all of the groups. I can toggle off all this axiom planes. And here we have the final result. Well, this is all about sections. I strongly recommend you to practice because it can be a little bit tricky when we are playing with different sections, at the same time, with different groups, with different components. But at the same time is very fruitful because we can really do amazing things. So I say goodbye. Don't hesitate if you have any gaps to leave a comment. And I see you in the next class. 45. Barcelona Pavillion 2. Pillars: Hello guys and welcome to the second part of this work projects in the previous class, we left the restaurant, a pavilion. In this state, we modeled the podium and the main walls, and now it's time for the pillars. So first of all, I will show the photo, edit unhide. Last, I'll use the wireframe view. And here we have the pillars in that red color, right? We don't have so many. Just 12345678, we have eight pillars placed kind of grid in order to draw those pillars in a precise way. I will use a photo that it is attached with a course, of course. So I'll go over File Import here and choose this photo import, random scale. And now top view camera, parallel projection, we are ready for drawing the pillar. As you can see, the photo has a lot of details. We'll try to simplify a little bit the pillar because e.g. doesn't make sense to draw these screws. So let's start line tool, one, click and release. We move along the green axis now the red axis. Now we'll use the iterations. We have our first leg. Let's say if we are not able to see the lines correctly, we can change the view of style. Let's go over x-ray, and now let's repeat this rectangle three times more. I will measure it in order to do it exactly the same size. It is 6.33 long and 3.60. See white line again, 6.30, 33.66. Now we can use the iterations and again and again, 6.33, 0.66 rad. And one more time, once we have our cross already drawn, will use the arcs in order to do the corners softer. So two-point Arc tool, one click sides, let's say 24. Let's follow the photo a little bit. One-click here. We need that color, which means that our curve is tangent to the first line and two the second one as well. Second click, third click. Here we are. Now, if we want to repeat that same arc, we will need Use the guidelines. One click here on one-click here, arc again, first click, and we look for that color. Click click. Now, if I want to be faster, I could use the offset tool in order to draw this inner line, always at the same distance. So now I can use this another tool, draw arcs from center onto points because I have the center one-click, another click on Insert, click eraser. And I delayed the left overs again, one-click, second click, third click Eraser, left overs out. Again, we can repeat this operation, ECB many times. As you can see, this way is going to be faster than if we are using the guidelines eraser. Okay, here we are. So let's erase the guidelines. And this inner line. I can even delayed the photo. Now, I will make a group here with my cross, but then I committed a mistake because I said to make a group when actually here, we need a component y because we will have eight pillars, exactly the same. So we want that if we make a change in one of them, that saints will be replicated in the rest of the pillars. So make a component name, Peter, create. Now it's time for a scale. This pillar, first scale. I will do it randomly, but smaller than I will move my pillar to the correct place, e.g. here. And I'll be more precise with its size. To be totally accurate, I will give you the size of the pillar. It is 15 cm each side. So let's measure. Now we have 13. So a scale, one click on this point, and I type in the correct measure, 15 and the unit centimeters. Here we are. And we have to repeat this same axiom alone, this another axis, 15 and the unit enter one, tweet out, Let's place the PDR a little bit better. And now I will make a copy which will be placed in another position of the grid. Secondly, select tool, Shift key. I select both pillars at the same time. Move tool and I would make a multiple copy. First copy will be here. And then without this, select that first copy, I can zoom out and I will type in arteries. And I need how many copies? 1233 arteries, 333. Enter. Here we have all the floor plans of our pillars. Let's extrude one of them. E.g. this one, click, click, Postpone tool, one click and release. And I use the height of the wall as our reference. We are on the rest of their peers as they are, components have suffered the changes as well. Basically, I click outside and we are almost done. I can switch off the X-ray if I want to have a better view. And I can even hide the photo control aids. So time to say goodbye. Now, I hope that you like TikTok and I see you in the next episode. 46. Entity info: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we're going to start a new section where we will focus on the different traits that SketchUp offers us. Here we can see the Default tray. In this Default tray, we have different traits depending on your own settings. I mean, if I go over window the full tray here, you can adjust the trace that will appear here in your Default tray. In this class, we'll start with the entity Info tray. Actually, we have been learning about this tray from almost the beginning of the course. In this class, we will review the different possibilities that we can find here. So firstly, it will depend on the element that we have selected before, e.g. here. If I select this element, then in the entity Info tray, I can check everything about this geometry. First of all, it is said that it is a component and it is set as well, that we have just one in model. At the same time, we can check in what duck is placed this element, we can enter here a name for this component definition. And here we have four different options. First one will allow us to hide the component. If we wanted to unhide it, we should go over edit and height last, as we usually do. We can lock this component as well. Then the color becomes read. This lock option is the same as if I click the right button, lock or unlock. And then we have this last two options which are related with another tray called saddles. This santos tray, we will learn about the south Australia in a specific episode. So this is not the correct moment for talking about these two options. However, if we select a line instead of a component, the entity Info will be different. We can change that here easily, take into account that we have another tray called docs. There will be another specific episode about that. Now we have just one tag called an dark. So here there are no more options. We have the length of that line, which could be very, very useful and we can soft or smooth that line we did on a specific class about these options so we know how to use it. And then in these toggles option, we can hide, but we can't look, we can't use this third option about receives settles. We can use the fourth one. This is because of the nature of this entity. It is aligned. And then we have some options available, but not all of them. If I move on to the next entity or surface, and I select it. And then we can take here that we have two colors. These two colors are talking about the front color and the color of the face. If those colors are the default colors, then here we don't have any difference. But if I apply e.g. this pink here, you will see that this first thumbnail is talking about the front color. This second thumbnail is talking about the back color. Apart of that, it is remarkable that here we can measure the area of that surface. This piece of information could be very, very interesting if we need e.g. to have specific data about our projects. Again, hearing the toggles option, we have some features available, but not all of them. We can't e.g. look a surface. Next entity here is a cycle. Looked at. This text is just in the middle of the screen. I will delete it. It was placed apart, but as it moves through the camera, it became a little bit annoying cycle. The good thing about this is that once the circle is drawn, we can change the radius, let's say three. And we can change the number of segments of that conference. We can know that it can have a very polygonal aspect. So usually will need to increase the number of segments. If we forgot to do it before, draw the cycle, we can do it afterwards from here, let's say 100, enter this. Another option is talking about the length of that side conference. It can be useful as well. And the same story with the, here, I select this arc and then we can change the radius segments and we have the length of that arc here. Let's go with another entity as a group. If I select a group box, then here we can read solid group one in model, we have the duck, we can enter a name for that group. This another option is not very interesting, but look at this volume. We can measure the volume of our 3D model. We'll need to make a group and then just select it and go to entity. Then in toggles option, we have all the features available. If we explored the group. Here, we'll find a completely different aspect of this entity Info tray. It is said that we have 18 entity selected. We have lines and surfaces. We can just hide or unhide and change the dark in case that we want to do it. Finally, we can use as well the entity Info for editing our dimensions. We can change the color, the dark, the font. And if we expand this, Advanced attributes will find here more options. We can change the texts from here and even the alignment if we have addressed, let's say text, enter and we select it, go to Entity Info again. Here we'll find different options in order to edit that text. As you can see, this tray is super, super handy. I recommend you to use it in a very regular basis. So don't forget about it when you are drawing in SketchUp. I hope that you like the class. And in the next episode, we'll go to another different tre, call materials. It is one of the most important and dense ones here. So maybe I will have to split that class into two parts. So we're ready and see you in the next class. 47. Materials: Hello guys and welcome to this new class where we will see the materials tray. It is already open. And the first thing that we can see is that here we have a thumbnail about the material which is currently selected, then we have the name of that material. In this case, we are talking about the default material, which has two colors, the front color and the back corner. I remind you that we can change those colors through this style, stray styles. And then we'll go over edit face settings. And here we have the possibility to change the font color and the color of that default material. Coming back to our material panel, if we keep exploring this upper part on the right side, we have this little plus icon, and if we hover over it, it says display the secondary selection panel. I hit it and then this secondary selection panel appears and it offers us different folders divided into different categories of materials. These materials category are the same that we can find. Here. We expand this arrow. Here, we have the same materials categories. So it is up to you. If you want to use that secondary pile, then we have this icon for creating a new material. I mean, through this icon, we will create a new material from zero. And then we have this third option in order to heat and to paint with the default material easily, we have always the possibility to hit here in this button, and then choose the default material. Then we find two different options. Select. If I hit select, first, I will be able to go backwards or forwards. I have this little house, which means that the materials which are appearing here are the ones which are being used in, right now in the model. This yellow, this blue, this flag. All of them are being used in right now in our model. Or better said, they have been using in the model. And maybe now there is nothing with those materials because I delete it. I am talking about symmetric about that component. That component is here, components in model or similar. One-click, I put Sumer then on my canvas. And here we have all these materials or colors. We are talking about the same. So if I delayed, the materials are still there unless I go over these details, arrow and I use the option called birds and use. Now I cannot use it. It is not available because Sumatra is still in our components directory. If I go over my components library, I select similar, go over the detail arrow again. Here I say birds and used, which means that I want to delete all the components that I'm not using in my model has been the rated. Then I go back to my select panel details. One click. Now, you can see that pert and used is available. I hit it. And all of these materials which were part of Sumer there. Anyways, if we keep exploring this part of the panel, I can expand this arrow. And I have all the different materials categories we have in model exactly the same. If we hit the house, we have materials the same as the secondary panel. We have 3D printing, we have asphalt and concrete. Brick played in and sitting. We have carpet, fabrics, leaders, colors, color name, glass and mirrors, landscaping, metal patterns, roofing, stone, synthetic surfaces. We have dy we have water window coverings, and let's select e.g. this last one would be SketchUp library has this kind of woods here. I will select e.g. this one, then the texture of this material, the thumbnail, this place in this upper window with the name wood floor. And if I hover over my Canvas, the paint bucket appears loaded and ready for applying that material on any surface, e.g. on this one, one-click and here we have our material, our wood floor, apply it here another quick and we can apply the material on any surface. However, if we move over, edit will find this another menu which will allow us to modify and edit that texture. In this case, the wood floor. We have two main different options for modifying that texture color. The first one and texture, the second one, talking about the color, we have the picker, I can expand this arrow and select a different color mode. Now we are working in RGB, so I can modify these different values of the red color, green color, or blue color. And you can see how our mood is being modifying. We can even select a color using this option. Much color of objects in Model and select one color from our Canvas as these white. Or we can select another color using these match color on a screen and then pick any color of our screen. It can be a color in our model or outside, e.g. let's say this blue here on this upper left corner, one-click, and here we are. If I want to recover my original color, I just have to hit here and do color changes. If I wanted to change this RGB mode color, I could do it. And e.g. use this color wheel or whatever. Second main option for modifying our material is called texture. Here we can see that our texture is made of J peg image, which is placed in a specific folder inside SketchUp. And we will be able to change that image. But then let's say that, that change could be huge. We would be talking about a new material, so I will not do it here. But what we can do here is to change the size of this texture. Here we have the width and the height, and we can lock or unlock its aspect ratio, let's say the proportion between those two values. Now the value is 1.52 m, Let's say e.g. 10 m. And we can see that change in our model. On the contrary, if I type in smaller value, let's say it's 0.5, enter our wooed. Now, looks like that. Finally, we have the chance to reset the color from here as well, and to change the opacity of that texture, we can make that material transparent. So once we have our general view about these materials tray, let's use it here with this, another cue I'll go over select, then I'll use this time, these secondary. Let's pick up a stone. One-click and here I'll pick up this stone vein gray one. The material is loaded in the main window. We have the name and if we hover over the canvas, the paint bucket is ready for applying the material. Let's apply it here. If e.g. I. Want to apply this material over all of the surfaces of this cube. I could select all the cube letter B for the paint bucket. This is the third cut and then one-click. And the material is applied everywhere, one click outside and we are done. Again. If we wanted to edit this material, we should go over here, make the changes. Remember that if I go over select and then I hit the house in model. Now I have these two materials in model in the stone. And they would finally to finish with this episode, let's see how to edit a material in a more specific way. I mean, I will apply a texture here on this cube Secondary panel. One step back, I have my folder here. I want to style, I'll select e.g. this marble camera floor tile. One click on this surface, or as we did before, I select the entire queue letter B and one-click. Then one click outside and pay attention here because instead of going over edit and make any changes from this panel, I will select this surface right button and I'll go over this option texture. Then we will find here different possibilities, position, projected, and edit texture image. The most important one, without any doubt, is this one position. When I hit it, this four icons will appear on my texture. We have the blue one, the yellow one, red one, green one. And they are placed on every corner of the title of the material. You have to know that any material in SketchUp is made of tires, or better say, it is made of one tile, which is repeated over and over again. The tile of these marble material is this one. This is squared. And then our icons are placed on every corner. If I hover over any of them, I can read the description and we'll understand perfectly what we can do with all of them. E.g. drag paint to scale and texture. Make this kind of transformations with my materials, something that I cannot do from the general edit panel. This one, the blue one says wrapping to distort texture. If I click and drag, I can make this kind of transformations. I am changing the perspective here, thanks to the red one, we can move the position of the texture. We click and drag and we are changing the position. This material, or better said, this texture is seamless. So the position is not very important. But we will see another example in this pin, this red beam, and how we will place the position of the picture is going to be super, super important. Finally, we have the green one to a scale and rotate the texture, click and drag. Then I can scale my texture proportionality, not like we were doing with the blue pin. And at the same time, I can rotate that picture. Let's do it. E.g. bigger, I released, zoom out. And when we are happy with the result, we can click outside. The good thing here is that those changes have been applied. On this surface. The rest of the cube remains intact using the setting from this edit General panel. This is specific changes in just one surface is something that we will use a lot in schizo to finish with this episode, let's do another example here, but this time we'll use an image from the exterior, so we better go over File Import. And here we'll select this logo image. One-click. We'll use image as an input. One click on this corner, I adjust my scale, second click, and here we have our image perfectly placed. But this is an image, this is not a material, right? So if I want to transform an image into a material, I have just to select the image and say, right Bhutan, explode. Now if I go over select in model, you can see that here there is a new material called Logo date. If I select it and I click on any surface, e.g. here, one-click, then we can fill that surface with that texture. Let's do the same with the surface. So as you can see, the image has become a new surface. With these ideas, I can erase these edges and apply the material again. Now, if I select this surface right button, lecture position, it will make a lot of sense to use this red pin. So I click and drag, and then I will place this corner on the corner of my q here. And I'll use the green pin in order to scale and adjust the width of my tile, the width of my texture, to the width of my cube. Here we are. So they have to say that the red and the green pin are the most important, in my opinion. One click outside. Here we have the texture perfectly adjusted to the width of the cube. And then we can do the same with the high just by pushing this roof here, e.g. here. Here we have our result. On the contrary, here, it is not adjusted perfectly because it has the settings of the general edit panel. So I could select e.g. this default material rapidly and just one-click and clean the surface in 1 s. Furthermore, if we go over File Import, I pick up any image from the exterior that say e.g. this orange marble. And instead of using this option called image, as we were doing till now, I use this another one called texture imports. Then SketchUp is not going to allow me to place that image everywhere. I will be allowed just to place this image which is being used as a texture, not as an image just on a surface of any object, let's say e.g. this surface, one-click here, one here, adjust the scale, second click, and then SketchUp has created a new material. Immediately. We didn't have to explode that image as we did before. And if we check these thumbnails, the neurons marble material is already here. Anyways, if we want that side of the cube completely white, again, default material and one click on this surface. Eventually to finish with this episode, let's talk about these two call sample paint. It is here. I will hit it and then it will allow us to select any material which is placed in our Canvas graphically. E.g. let's go to this second queue. One click on this stone, and then that material is already loaded here on the main window and the paint bucket is ready to be used. Let's use it here. When Craig here we are. So when we are working in a normal, let's say a normal flow, it is very useful because imagine that we want this side with another material and then we can steal that material from the Canvas. Letter B for the paint bucket, this is the circuit and then Alt key in order to select this sample paint, I still e.g. this time this marble, 1-click, the marble is already loaded. Release Alt key, and I apply the material as useful. So time to say goodbye, we have many things to learn about materials. So we will continue learning about this interesting topic. In the next episode, we will learn how to create a material from zero. And I will show you different libraries on the Internet where you will find amazing textures for your materials. 48. Materials 2: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we are going to continue learning about materials in a sketch. In this episode, we'll be focused on learning how to create materials. For doing this, we can start a material from zero, or we can start a material from another material, do some modifications and then save it. Let's see how can I do this second option. If we work with a model of the previous episode, we should have here this different textures, the ones that we used in our model. Imagine then that I select e.g. this marble. I go over edit, I can read the name marble floor tile and I decide to make some modifications, e.g. in a color, I can use the color wheel or any different color mode as the RGB color mode, I change this red color value. And then we can see how our Marvel now is more pink, right? If we like this color and we want to save this material as new one, the most simple way, just going over the title, over the name here, right? Something else, e.g. pink. And that's all because if I go over, select, I click on my model. We can see how here our marble is pink and the title comes with the word pink. At the same time, the original texture of that marble is here inside the title Father of sketch. So I could still use this marble because now I have two different marbles, the original one and the pink one, with two different names. This is one way for creating a material. Another way is to use this specific button called create material. Then you have to be our First of all about what material is selected in the main window. Now, the original marble is selected. So if I hit Create Material, SketchUp understands that we want to create a material. You've seen the settings of that marble. Here. We can make our modifications, our changes. Let's work with a color again. This time, let's do it a little bit more greenish. We change the name of the material. Let's call it marble green and we click, Okay, Margaret green is already here. And we can use it easily on any surface. Imagine now that you don't want to create a material from the settings of another material, but from zero, what should we do? First thing that we have to do is just to click on the default material. Because the default material is like a start from zero. Then we hit Create material. And as you can see, this window pops up and we don't have any settings. We don't have any texture selected. Our color is white. Then we should type in here the new name, let's call it e.g. new marble. And secondly, but even more important is the fact that here we need a new texture. We need a new image. A J peg emits from the exterior. So we can either click on this option, use texture image or we can click on this, another button, Browse from material image file, one-click. Then we need to go over our texture in our computer here, e.g. I. Will use one of the textures attached with the course inside the Barcelona Pavilion folder. And I'll pick up this green marble, one click Open. And the texture is already loaded. This width and this high art related with the aspect ratio of our image, we can click, Okay, then that new texture, that new material is ready to be used in the model panel. One-click, I hover over our canvas and I click again over this surface. Then we can take that our texture is super small. The tile, which is repeated over and over again. Tiny. This is something very typical when we create a material from zero because we don't control their dimensions at the beginning. So then we have to go over, edit and change these dimensions. I will type in 1 m e.g. and it is getting better. Let's see what is going on. If I type in two, even better or three. Now, it depends on our taste, but the texture now is working quite good. If we are happy, then we could select on the cube three clicks, letter B and the last one another. So we'll finish there. Here. I recommend you strongly to practice all of this new knowledge. And in the next class, we will see specifically the three best lecture libraries on the Internet. In my opinion. 49. Textures libraries: Hello guys, and we'll go to this new class inward. We're going to see the three best texture libraries on the Internet, in my opinion. So we will continue working on this model with these cubes. And the thing is that we have to be aware of the fact that the SketchUp library of materials is not very, very, let's say sophisticated. The textures are quite simple. I mean, if I expand this arrow, here, we have e.g. metals and then look at how many methods we have, not so many. And the textures, the quality of the textures is not, let's say, the best possible ever. So if we want to acquire a very, very good ones, then we should have them from the Internet. The first website I would like you to go is ROA textures. You can check here the address. Anyways, you will find the links in the description. And the thing about this website is that this is a construction website. I mean, it is not about 3D models or rendering, is about construction. So the texture that you will find here is something super, super real. They give us that texture in order to have a real view about that material before buying it. So we should go over texture browser, one-click, we accept and continue the cookies and so on. And here we can filter our searching. We can say e.g. material we want, let's say good. Then different goods pop up. Let's click this narrow boards. It looks like the price is €4, but we will be able to take this texture for free. Look that we have a view of that texture already applied on the floor, on different walls. Then here we have the size, the real size, the resolution. And if we go down, we will find here the possibility to download this texture for free. Just one click on Download will get a compressed file. Inside. We will find always three the apex files, one with the letter B, another one with the letter D, and another one with the letter S. This is because all the materials here are, the textures are what is called PBR materials. A PVR material means physical based rendering. They are materials based on different maps in order to describe a photorealistic aspect of that material physically and in terms of interaction with the light, which is something very complex. So we have here three months bump map, letter B, diffuse map, letter D, and specular map, letter S. Bump map is talking about the relief of the texture, the defuses about the color, and the specular is about the reflection. This is something unrelated more with renders than with SketchUp in where we are doing 3D models, we have not rendering. So here we are just interested in using the diffuse map letter D. But you better know that if you afterwards want to work in render software as we re or lumen, thanks to this website, you already have the bump, map and spec requirement. So once that we are back again in SketchUp, if we want to use that texture, we should go over materials, click on Default material, then click on Create material from zero. Let's type in the name of this new material, e.g. new. Good. We use a texture image. One-click here. We need to go over the correct folder. And once here, just pick up the image with the letter D, one click Open. The texture is already loaded. And pay attention here because normally we don't know the dimension of the texture. But if we check our material in the website here, we can find the real size of this material, 400 cm per 180 cm. Coming back to a SketchUp, we can type in 4 m and then the proportion comes automatically 1.80 m. And then let's just apply these new material, e.g. on this first queue. Click here. And here we have. Our excellent texture, three clicks, letter B. Here we have our cube with that wood texture. Second website that I would like to show you is called texture.com. The browser here is very intuitive. We can write here e.g. a. Stone, enter. And we'll find these different textures. We need just to click on one of them. Imagine that we like, let's say this Stonewall, one click, we have a preview. And then again, this will give us three maps of that texture. Map, the high map and the normal map. Again, we're talking about PBR materials, physical based rendering. The Albedo map is as the diffuse map before. It is the same but with a different name. This is the one important in SketchUp. In SketchUp, we can just work with the colormap, the diffuse map or the Albedo map. All of them are the same. The high map and the normal map will be useful in case that after a SketchUp, we want to work in a rendering software, you better know that I have a course about lumen in where I talk deeper about how to use all of these maps. Anyways, here we have a free texture. I think that we can download three or five textures free per day. Anyways, if you want to use this website a lot, you can pay the subscription is not expensive at all, but in this case, I will just click on here. The lowest resolution is enough. One click. And you can see that I have this texture, this Albedo texture already in my computer and ready to be used once in SketchUp again, we should repeat the same process as before. Default material, create new material. Let's type in a new name, new stone wall texture image. Then we select our image, One-click and open. And here we don't have the correct size of that texture, so the material is already created, unselected. So I would apply the material here, three clicks. Letter b. Again, we have the problem that the texture is very, very small. We go over edit. Let's change the size more or less. Here is, okay, it's up to you. We are done with this material. Finally, the third website that I would like to recommend you, and in my opinion, the best one of all of them is called a SketchUp texture club.com. Here you will find not just textures, but 3D models. You will be able to read about many news related with SketchUp, tips, advices, and so on. Anyways, we have to focus now about the textures. So we should click on here textures, we will find different categories, free PVR textures. We know already what PVR means, physically-based rendering textures. And then we have architecture materials, nature, elements, backgrounds, and landscapes. If I expand e.g. architecture, you can see how many different categories we have here. Let's click on concrete. Then we have two different more options where I'm plates, plates, and then we find clean, dirty that are handled. Let's click on that arrow. And as you may be already know, is a Japanese architect, very famous, and he lights a lot to work with concrete. Let's click e.g. on this one. And then we find here a preview and two options for downloading this texture. An option for a free user and another option for a club member user. In case that you are a club member user, you will find in your folder more maps, the displacements, specular, normal, ambient occlusion, and so on. If you are going to use a lot of SketchUp rendering, where I really recommend you to subscribe to this website. The price is super tip. If I am not wrong, it is around €12 per year. And then you can download endless amount of super amazing textures. I am a member, so I will download this folder. One-click again, we will get a compressed file and inside we will find a demo and different maps as the diffusion, the displacement, the normal specular, and the ambient occlusion month in SketchUp, remember that we can only use the diffusion map. It is called as well a map or colormap. So then again, go back to sketch out. We reset our material, we click on Create material, we select a new texture. We'll go over the correct folder and we choose the diffuse image. Click on Open. Here we have the texture already loaded. We don't know the measures because if we go back to this website, this information is about the resolution of the texture. Of course, the resolution will be better if we are a member. So we say, okay, let's apply this texture on this surface. I select the entire cue that are b. And now let's change the size of the texture. 1 m or even 2 m could be correct. One click outside, and here we are. Look the resolution and the details that we find here in this picture. So time to say goodbye. I hope that you liked the class. Don't hesitate to leave a comment in case that you have ended up. In the next episode, we'll talk about unspecific dusk, how to create a landscape in SketchUp through our projected texture. 50. Projected texture: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see how to create a landscape in a sketch. So first of all, I'm going to do a rectangle from your region using the left arrow key. I will create this rectangle. Then I would create a new material, as we learned in the last class. So create material, I will pick up a new image. These new image is called landscape. One click and open. The scale. Looks like it is too small. I will write down here one, okay, here we have our new material. So let's apply it on this phase. Let her be one-click. Here we are. The material is super small, so I will edit it. Let's say ten. Now it looks much more better. I could do it even bigger. So let's say 20, 20th, okay, Now I will adjust the height. Here can work. We have a kind of landscape background, which can be useful in our models or in our renders. Imagine that you want to apply this landscape in a curved face. E.g. I. Will create here a rectangle up arrow key. Here we are. Letter P, pool. Now I'll use the arc sides 51. Click second click. Create. This surface. Here we are now in letter B for applying the material, the landscape material is already selected. One-click. Here we have our landscape. The material now is perfectly apply it. But sometimes when we are working on curved surfaces, we can have problems with the texture. Sometimes the image is kind of broken with strange lines across. In that case, what we have to do is going to this surface, the plane surface, the plane texture, right bottom texture. And use this option project that lecture. We mark this obscene. If we come back again, texture, we can see that projected is marked. And then we apply that texture on these curved face just using the sample paint tool. Letter B, I hold down Alt key, one-click for stealing this texture which is already projected. And then another click on the curved face. If you are using the last versions of SketchUp, it is very likely that you don't need to use this projected tool because the texture is not broken on your curved surface. Anyways, if you have that problem, you know already how to fix it. In the future. We will use this kind of way for creating a landscape when we will be working in our final project. So time to say goodbye. I hope that you liked the class. And in the next episode, I will start talking about a new tray call components. It is this one, very important one. So we're ready. I see you in the next class. 51. Components: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see a very, very important thing in SketchUp. And it is called components. It is a tray, it is already expanded. It is a deep topic in SketchUp. So we have many things to learn here, and it will be paramount to understand. It's super good if you want to save time when you are modelling. So first of all, we have here this figure. We know that this figure is a component and this component is appearing here in this menu. We have the name and we have a description. If we select it, then as it happened with the materials are main thumbnail would appear in the upper part of the tray with the name and the description. At the same time, we have here this little icon. In order to expand our secondary panel, I would click and here we have this secondary panel. I will close it because I don't want too many things around us here. Let's do it simple. Anyways, if we go down, we have three options. Select, Edit, and statistics. Then just below, we have the possibility to control different aspects of the size of the thumbnails, tails list, et cetera, et cetera. Our little house. We know that this little house means in model. So if we hit it in the menu just below will appear just the components in the model. Right now, we have just one component called Suma. Then we have this little arrow. If we expand it, will find many different categories and at the right side will find a shirt, but in order to download different components from the Internet. Finally, here we have this little arrow pointing to the right side, which is called details, where we'll find more different options. One of them called Purge Unused, which will work exactly the same as with the materials. So after this resume, Let's draw an object. E.g. I. Will draw a kind of, let's say column 0.3 semicolon, 0.32, 0.5 m high. Control key, whose pool again, 1 m high. I will select this area, this face scale tool, one click on the corner Control key. And let's create this kind of shape, which could be attractive right? Now, if I select this element, three clicks, right button, we have the possibility to make a component from here, from this window, however, we could use as well. This second bottom in the main toolbar called Make Component, one-click. And this window will pop up in where we will find different categories. Some of them are quite important, not all. Here we have the definition. We can call it e.g. per gallon. I will leave the description empty. And then we have this second category, alignment, Bluetooth known any horizontal, vertical slot will see this option later. But to be honest, in my experience, I haven't used it a lot. Then we have this another option called set component axis. This one, I would say that it is important because if you focus on our canvas, we have the general axis and then we have the component axes here, much more smaller. It is placed here because we can't see the component box, but it is there. Its axis is always placed in one of its corners. So if I hit this epsilon, I can change the position. Let's say that we want the component axes here. So one-click. Then if I move the mouse, I can change the position of the different axis, red axis pointing this way. Another click here we are. Next option is called always face camera. As it happens with smelly sometimes can be useful. Usually we will not use it. Then finally, we find replace selection with component always marked. So our geometry will become a component. We say create. If we turn this option off, the component will go to the library components and this geometry will remain as normal geometry. So let's say create unclick, then the component box appears. And at the same time we find here the component in our component library. If we open the outliner, you can check how here there are two elements, Sumerian and parabola. Both of them are components and they are represented by these little square divided into four pieces. Take into account that a component is very similar to our group. In many aspects, I mean, we are collecting the geometry into a box, as it happens with a group, and it will allow our geometry to be independent from other geometry. I mean, the geometry inside a component works were not GLUT-2 other geometry, as it happens with the groups too. This is one of the main properties, but it is not the most important. So the main property of a component is the following one, Move tool. I will select this specific corner, e.g. Control key first copy here, asterisks, let's say ten copies. Here we are. Then I will select all of them. I'll deselect similar Move Tool, Control key. First copy here, Arthur is ten copies. Here we are. Now we have this kind of structure with many different instances of the same component. The thing here is that if we make any change in one of any instances, that change will be done in all of the instances at the same time. Let's do it. I will go inside this box. I will select this upper face. Post pool, one click, and then look the change that I am doing in this component. It is happening in all of them. Let's say that this distance will be 0.2. Here we're Space key one click outside. This is the main property of the components and as you can imagine, is super powerful. Imagine that we are working with Windows, with doors, with p elements, which will be repeated in our model many times because they are always the same geometry, we will need just to make one change and everything will be done in 1 s. This is something that not happening with the groups. Let's see now how we can interact with our components once they are drawn, if I select any of them, any of these instances, and I click right button, I will find here interesting options. E.g. I. Would like to highlight the possibility to change the axis, change axis, and then I can still change the position of this component axis. Another interesting upsilon is this one called make unique. If I hit it, this component now is a new one, is not an instance of the original one anymore. If I go over my component library, I can check here that there is a new one with a different name, parabola, one. We find here as well the possibility to explode this component, to destroy the component box as it happens with the groups explode, then there is no box anymore, just fried geometry. But the component remains in our component library all the time. If we wanted to delete a component from the component library, then we should first of all, the lake that component from our canvas. Let's erase Sumatra. Anyways, Sumerian remains here, and then the second step would be go over details and click births and used. Then smelly and parabola one have been delighted, definitely from the component library. However, if I select my parabola component here in my component library, instead of selecting any instance in my Canvas, I will be able to go over, edit and change that blue upsilon known any horizontal, vertical or a sloped. And we will be able to mark always face camera will see this both options in the next episode in where we will create a component of ourselves and we'll play with these options. Finally, we have a statistics just to check the maths of the geometry. Another important aspect that we have to take into account here is that we have this search bar. I mean, if I write down here e.g. chair enter will connect with warehouse library on the Internet. I can pick up e.g. this chair and then download these component, this term into my drawing. Let's say that this is a kind of shortcut for go into their warehouse. And we'll learn about this warehouse in a specific episode because it is without any doubt, one of the most important tools in SketchUp. If I expand this arrow, I will find different categories, e.g. let's say architecture or landscape connected with that warehouse. So to finish with this episode, I would like to point out two exceptions about components that I would like you to know. A strongly I said that if I select one of my instances and I make any change in its geometry, let's do it. So two clicks for going inside the box. I select this face useful tool, one click, and then let's make higher this upper part of the parabola. Here we are. Space key. One-click outside. If you are wondering why this, another particular hasn't suffered and it changed, remember that we made this component unique first and secondly, we exploded it. Anyways, let's apply a material here, materials, stone, marble. Once I picked up my material and I have my paint bucket ready to be used. Look that if I click on the component books from the outside, Let's do it. The material, this marble has been applied on all of the surfaces of these component, but just in this component, not in all of them, right? Not in all of the instances. This is because I apply it, the material from the exterior of the box. On the other hand, if I go inside the component box, two clicks or right button, IT component letter B for the paint bucket tool. Then I hold down Control T plus letter a. I select all of the faces inside this component box. Letter B, I apply this material in all of the phases of the component Space key one-click outside. And then these changes are in all of the instances of the components. So this is the first exception. Materials, it is not the same to apply the material from the exterior or from the interior of the bugs component. Second, exception, scale. It happens exactly the same when we are using tool, I will select again this instance of the component, the scale tool. Then I modify the scale of that particular looked at the changes are not happening in all of the instances, right? Just in this one. The reason is because I am applying this scale from the outside of the component box. On the other hand, if I select another instance of the component, e.g. this 12 clicks for going inside. Then I select all the geometry with three clicks, scale tool, and I change the geometry. In this case, all the instances are being modified by this scale transformation. Space key one click outside, and we are done. So remember these two exceptions because you can play with them in your favor. They are, I would say, very, very interesting and you will use it many times in the future. So it is time for saying goodbye. I hope that you like the class very much. And in the next episode, we will play with the components and we will create a new one using a picture of ourselves. 52. Creating our own component figure: Hello people and welcome to this new place in where we're going to play with the components. So we will create a new one using photo of ourselves. So first of all, I'll go over File Import. Here. I use this photo, call myself all supported image dice because this photo is tau, p and d format. It is not that date back, import one-click and you're reading random scale. Here. The picture, I will rotate the image first of all, one click and hold down. I choose the correct plane for the rotation. Second click and click. Now, let's go with the scale tape measure tool from this point to the head, more or less here, let's say 1.8 m enter. You want to resize the model? Yes, we are ready for doing the components caffeine. Mind that the picture that you will use of yourselves has to have a transparent background. You will have to go to Photoshop, cut your silhouette, delayed the background, save that image in a PNG format in order to keep the transparency, then you will be able to use it here in appropriate way. Anyways, once we have this photo ready, we can select it. But look that the option for make a component is not available. So we'll need to explore first, this image right button explode. Once the image is exploded, the image has became into our material. If I go over materials, I click on the little house. Here we have a new material called myself as the image, but we don't want a material right now. What we want is to create a component and now we have the option Make Component available. But firstly, I will make some arrangements so I can move easily these areas in order to adjust my figure and then being able to use this component in a more proper way. Now, be careful because we don't want those edges to be visible. So I should select them. I can click on the surface right button, select bounding edges, then deselect the area, then go over edit height. Now we are ready for selecting again our future component and click Make Component, definition, myself, description, empty, glue to, let's say non set component axes. We can check that the component axes are placed in the correct spot. Always face camera, yes. Shadows face some, let's say No. We'll see why this option means in the future. And replace selection with component. Yes, Create. Here we have our new component. It is already in our components library. And if we are with, we can check how the component is always facing the camera. It seems that we have finished, but we haven't. First of all, our component is floating a little bit. Move tool. One click on this corner, next click on the origin. Now it is not floating anymore. But the real problem is that if I turn on the sun, the saddle of our component is rectangular, right? It shouldn't be rectangular. And what is the reason? The reason is because although our background from Photoshop is transparent, when we turn our image into a material, that transparent background became something solid. So how can we fix this? First of all, we should go into this component. I will go over edit and high. Oh, I want those edges visible. Then I will use the free hand tool in order to draw the silhouette of myself. Let's do it e.g. like that. Here. I will continue till here. Then I will select this surface and I will delete it. Look that if I check the shadow, that poll is not now in the salon, which means that we are in the correct way. We have to continue below 18, that surface using the free hand once I have finished. And you must know that I have used the product projection camera on the front view, I could click on the surface right button, select Bounding MDS. I disinfect the area. Edit. The same with the edges of the perimeter. This time I would use the eraser and I hold down shift key in order to show you another way for hiding elements. Here we are. We are ready. We go out of the box and then we can check how the saddle now is perfect. I could select this component from the components library and use it over and over again. And if I go over edit, you will see that from here, I can still change the option about shadows faced some, Let's click it. If I orbit now around my components, you will see that at some point. So those are not matching with our components with our fingers. However, if I unclick this option shadows face sun, then our shadows will match again with our fingers. So my recommendation here is not used these shadows face son option. Finally, we have the possibility to change this another feature, blue two, we said nine, but we can say any horizontal, vertical, or sloped. Let's create first one, vertical plane, e.g. this one. Then I will say that I want my component blue to vertical plane. Once I have changed this Bluetooth option, and I go over, select, I, take another component and I move around my Canvas. Look that my component is glued to this vertical plane. Now it is perfectly place in that vertical plane. In this case, when we are talking about a human being, we will not use it. But now you know the sense of these two. So I will erase this guy. Edit, glue to non is the correct one here. So I hope that you liked this class. I encourage you to do it with an image of yourself. I see you in the next episode. 53. Styles: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we're going to talk about the styles. The style string is already open. The interface is similar to the previous ones. We have our main thumbnail, which is displaying how our current style looks like with a name and description at the right side, we can expand a secondary panel. Let's do it. Here we have different folders with different styles that we will be able to use in the future. Coming back to this upper part, we have the possibility to create a new style and the possibility to update their current style. If we make any changes, we have these three levels, select, Edit and mix. If I go over select, then we find two arrows for going backwards or going forward, we have our little house in model, Right-click on it. We'll see the styles that we have used in this file. In this very moment, we have just one. If I hover over this thumbnail, I will be able to read simple style. This is the name of this style. And if I expand, this little arrow, will find different folders in where I will find more and more predefined styles. We'll see this later. Right side, as usually, we find this arrow pointing to the right side called details with more options, open or create a collection, safe collection as a collection to favorites. Remove collection from favorites birds and used, and the possibility to change the display of the thumbnails. Well, once that we have overview the style stray, Let's go deeper. Let's move over the next level called Edit. Here we have 12345 possibilities. We have Ed settings, we have faced settings, we have background settings, we have watermark settings, and finally, we have Modelling settings. Let's go to the first one, edge settings. This is quite important because here, as you can imagine, we are talking about just the edges of our drawing. First of all, we find that NTS is on and, but IDS is off, profiles is on with number two, the rest are off except for the dust is optional. If I switch off edges, then in our drawing, we can see that some edges are off, completely off, but we have still some of them, the ones that SketchUp used to call profiles. If I switch off profiles, then we don't have any ads on in our drawing. I can make these changes if I go over, view its style. And here I switch on or switch off edges, back edges, profiles, depth, cue or extension. It is exactly the same. And I can use both ways for making these changes later, it will happen the same with this phase style option. Anyways, if I switch on edges, you will see that I have edges everywhere. Now, if I switch on back edges, then those back edges will be visible. This option is at the same time, the same as this one. Here, back ideas. Take in mind that this toolbar, it is directly related with these styles tray. If I switch off the back edges here, the mark here in my style stray is off as well. Then we have the profiles. If I click this profile option and instead of two, I write down ten. To be more clear, we can see that the profile is a kind of an Ed's around our CEP, which is, let's say, kind of perimeter of our sake, I will draw here a queue and you will see it even more clear. As you can see, the profile is that ads, which is around the same. The edges placed, let's say in the middle are not called profiles. So my suggestion here is to switch off always these profiles off. We don't need them at all. Depth cue is another option which is not very useful. Let's type in ten instead of four. And you can see that now some edges are thicker, but it's a kind of random process. Extension is talking about the lens of our ideas when we arrived to an end point, e.g. here, if I type in ten, this length is longer. If I type in 50, even longer, and then you're drawing maybe can look like caskets. On the other hand, endpoints will allow us to represent. Our endpoints with this kind of cross. If I write down e.g. 50, you can see now how our drawing looks like. Furthermore, detail, we'll play with the values of all of our previous options in a random way. So if I switch on this option now the representation of our row, it will be like that. But if I switch off, switch on, again deter, then we will get another kind of effect. Finally, the last option is called dashes. It comes on automatically and if we switch off, the dust is option, we cannot appreciate any change in our model. This is because this does, this option is talking about a different kind of line that we are not using right now in our model. So we should go over another tray call tax. If you have a previous version of a SketchUp, maybe this tax tray is called liar. And here we find that in this model we have just at that core and that all of our models in SketchUp will have this tag with this name, will be able to create more and of course to delete them as we want. But the thing here is that if we are working with this data right now, if we hit here, fault, one-click, then many different lines appear and we can choose not just the default line, but different line with dashes. Let's choose e.g. this one, then there is no change in our model. Because if we come back here to Eddie, Ed Dyess does is now that this is a one-click and then all of our edges now are displayed with this dashed line. This is something very interesting, unrelated with this task tray. So anyways, let's switch again to the default line, and it's time now to jump to the next option called phase settings. This nu is simple. We have the front color now in white and the black color in this kind of gray. We already talked about this in that episode in where we were trying to understand deeper fundamental concepts around the SketchUp. In this specific case, the concepts related with the front color and the color is the one that I called Reverse Faces. The thing is that in SketchUp, we have always, in every phase, two planes, the plane towards the camera with a color. This is the front color by default in white color. And then we have the back color. If I erase that phase, we can see, but color in all the phases in which this Q is made off. That back color in this style has this kind of blue or gray color. So the thing is that here, we can change those color easily. Imagine that I want my font color in these bright blue and the black color in this kind of pink. My suggestion here is don't change the font color. White is perfectly okay, but the back color, I recommend you to change to another one, I would say a more bright color, e.g. this one. Because this way, when you need to reverse phases, you will distinguish that back color super easy. E.g. imagine that here. This phase is not placed towards the camera. So the more bright your back color is, the more easy for you to distinguish it. If we come back to this menu, will find here the style bar. This style bar is exactly the same as this one, but it makes total sense because this toolbar is actually giving us the chance for playing with different features in our surfaces. These features most of the times are related with the transparency. So here we can switch on and switch off that transparency feature and we can change the value of that transparency faster means 50 per cent, nicer, means around 65 per cent time to jump to the next option called Background settings. Here, we'll be able to change the color of the background now in gray, imagine that we want a more whitish color, e.g. this one, we find as well in this menu the possibility to switch on or switch off the sky, the ground, and of course, the possibility to change the color of those features as well. Now this guy is off, but we can switch on that the sky easily and change the color as well. And the same with the round. Because remember, and I will switch off the ground again that the white color is not the ground. The white color is the color of this fear. But we don't have a plane right now as a ground. So if I switch on ground, then we have that plane plays at zero in the set. Axis. And the thing is that now we have some transparency. If we don't want that transparency, we can say that the transparency is zero. And then you can see now perfectly the ground when I orbit the camera around my model, if I keep the transparency at 50 per cent, which could be nice because when I have some object, e.g. let's say my Italian Pavilion, I move it along this axis and this new position, as you can see, thanks to this ground option and the transparency, I can distinguish how my object is not placed exactly over the ground, it is below the ground, so it is not a bad idea. If you make an style using this ground option, I could change the color. Of course, I don't like this when it could be a kind of gray, e.g. this one. And then you have this another option called so round from below in order to see that ground when you are looking at your object from below, if I switch off this upsilon, the ground disappears. I will keep this option on. I'd like to have an sky, but this is up to you. And once that I am happy with these changes, you can check how in our main thumbnail, our current ten years are already there. So I could click on this thumbnail in order to refresh, update my style. This style called simple style, I could have used as well this little button called update the style with changes, it is the same. Let's jump now to this next option, watermark setting. We have on display watermarks. So let's add one watermark, one-click over here, we have to find an image that we want to use as a watermark. We'll use e.g. this logo of the Tate Gallery in London, one click Open, and then different windows will pop up. We can change the name watermark. One is okay. We can choose if we want that watermark to be in the background or in front of the model as an overlay, let's say Overlay. Next here will be able to play with different aspects as the bright, we can create a mask. We can play with the transparency again, let's say next. And this is interesting because here we'll be able to choose how we want to display that watermark in our screen, e.g. to fit the screen tile across the screen or positioned in the screen, I will choose this last option. And I could say that I want my watermark in the right down corner. The scale of that watermark can be modified. And then let's click Finish. Now we can't see our watermark because the default rate is above the mat, but here it is in our menu. At the same time, we have a watermark called watermark one, a thumbnail with the image, and we have the possibility to create more watermarks. Or if we want to delete this one, e.g. we just have to click on here. Delayed watermark. Yes. Finally, we find this last option called modelling settings. If I hit it, then you will see this menu called modelling in where basically we can change the color of, let's say, different elements that we use when we are modelling and object, e.g. when we select an object as it is already selected, the Italian pavilion. Now, that selection, that box selection is in blue color. We can change that blue and say that we don't want that blue, but we want this purple. Now, the selection box is in that column. I prefer to keep the blue one. I wouldn't suggest you to make changes here, but of course, it's up to you. You can change the color when an object is locked. The guides, different aspects of a section, plane, section feel sexual lines. And this is interesting because here, there is this option called section line width. Here Aeneas gets up, is difficult to change the width of the lines. It is something that I really miss some time. So for me, this option is a little gift. Let's use it rapidly. I will hit the section plane upsilon, one click the name of the section is okay. I will select it and I will move it along the green axis. One-click here. I will use the section toolbar menu. I will deselect everything. And now the section line is visible. If I change this number three and I type in. You can see how these sex online now is much more thicker. I could change as well the color of that sex or line here. So this is interesting anyways then is to match, let's say five. Then we have more and more options. We can decide if we want to watch the hidden geometry, the hidden updates, color by dark guides, model, axis, etcetera, etcetera. This last part of the menu called match photo is related with something that we haven't learned already. Something called photo mats are very powerful tool in SketchUp. Remember when I go over File Import and then I want to import an image, we can use that image as image texture when we want that image to turn into a material. And then we have this last third option called new matched photo. This is something that we will see in the future. So this modelling menu is done, and now it is high time to jump into a different level. We have seen everything about this edit option and now we'll go over mix that in this menu, we find the same features we have already seen. So summing up, thanks to this menu, will be able to mix different features from different styles. Will be able to take the head settings from one style and mix it with e.g. the face settings of another style. But first off, doing an example, I'll go over select. And here I will expand this little arrow in where we will find different folders with many different styles, predefined styles inside of all of them. The first folder is called in model. This is the same as our little house. Then we have this another folder, call it style. Here we have asserted styles, color sets, default styles for the modelling, sketchy ideas, straight lines, style, bidder, competition winner. If I click on the first one, e.g. you will find here different predefined styles, e.g. this one called watercolor paper with pencil, I will click on it and then playing with all the features that we have already seen. The edges, the front color, the color, the sky, the ground, etc. etc. This style has create this kind of effect in our drawing. I will hide the section plane. Here it is, the result. It is interesting. Let's try e.g. this is another one called PSO vignette. If I move one step backward, then I can go inside this another folder called a sketchy edges. This is my favorite because here I think that you will find the ones which are more useful, the ones which at the end, maybe you will use it in your projects, e.g. let's use this third option, brush strokes. You have this kind of effect, or let's say this one called watercolor. You can create that filling in where your drawings are, a kind of sketch. Again, the section plane. Actually, I could erase this section. We don't need it. I was telling that maybe this kind of styles are very good when you are starting your project and imagine that you want to show your project to your teacher or to your client. You have the first model is not finished at all, the project. So you can use this kind of style in order to express your ideas in a very, let's say, fancy way. So I suggest you to explore all of these folders. We go back again to mix. If I want to mix different styles, then I should go over these secondary panel, select one of the styles that I want to mix. I will hit this little house in model and then e.g. let's use this one called simple style. The first one we use, and I will click and drag over the feature that I want to use, e.g. background settings, then I have mixed my current style called watercolor with the background of this simple style. Now, I have this gray background and I have an, a sky, blue sky, but I keep the edges the previous style. If I liked it and I want to save it, I could do two things. I could rephrase the thumbnail and then update this style called watercolor. But I would lose the original style called watercolor as it was. Or I can create a new one with these different settings. In my opinion, this is the best option here. So I will change the name makes and then I can just click on here update style with changes and they have a new style called mix. If I go over select house, you will find it here. Mix, and I haven't lost my watercolor style. It is not here, but I can find it if I go over a sketch here, ds, here, watercolor. We're going to finish the class here. I strongly recommend you to practice with it. This is something that you can do just when you open your file. And in the next episode, we will see how to save our own style in an independent file in order to use it. Every time we open a new file in a schizo. 54. Styles 2: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we're going to continue working with the styles. And in this episode, we will see how to save our own style. So we'll be able to use it when we open a new file, because e.g. here in our Canvas, we find this model in where we used our own style in the previous class. If I go over styles, we'll see if I hit in model that here we have this style color mix. But the thing here is that if I open a new file, I go over File New, then this file doesn't come with those styles, not with that mixed style, the one that we want to use, e.g. in this case. So how should I do for saving my own style? If I come back again to this file, then I should go over the thumbnail call mix, right button, save us. Then a new window will pop up and I will have to select a route for saving these style file. But pay attention here because I will have to create a folder in where I will save that style file. So the folder will be called mixed in block myosin, and I will save my style file inside this folder called mics. I open my folder, my new folder, and I save my new file. Good. Now if I go over file, new file, we can see that here. We don't have again, that style of ours. But if I go over details, open or create a collection, I search for that route and I find my folder called Mix. It is the folder what I have to select here, not the fire, because if I go inside the folder, there is nothing. So I have to go one step backward and select the folder and say Select Folder. So read because here it is in Spanish, one-click and then my new style appears here called mics. I hate it and I have, My name is tied ready for being used. Furthermore, some few things to point out here. This folder we have just created called mix with its style file is placed now here among all the rest of this tide folders. If we wanted to make that folder one of our favorites, because we can say that all the folders here are called in SketchUp favorites. We should go again over details and say Add to Favorites. We select again the folder, and we say Select Folder. Then when we open again a new file, if we go over the styles tray and we expand this little arrow, we'll see that our folder called mix is there. So we can use the file, the style file easily and we don't have to say details, open or create a collection and find our folder. It is already there. The second thing that I would like to point out is that if I go over Window Preferences, then here, if I go over files, you will find the file locations of everything here in SketchUp. One of those things is a styles. Here you will find the root in your computer in where all the styles Placed. You will be able to modify that route or to just open that folder. So maybe this place is a good folder in order to place your new styles. Anyways, this is everything about styles. I hope it is clear for you now and I'll see you in the next episode in where we will see another very interesting tray call, tax. If you have a previous version of SketchUp, it will be called liars. 55. 50 tags: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see a new tray called ducks. It is here, I will expand it. This tray was called before liars, to be honest, I preferred that name. But anyways, let's see how this works because it is kind of easy. But at the same time, it has some points that we have to take into account if we want to use these tags in the correct way. So let's start with the easy part. Automatically, we have one tag called untapped. When we draw in a SketchUp, by default, everything will go into this stack. But of course, we can create more ducks and we will be able to delete them as well in case that we want. So if we want to create a duck, we have just to hit on here at that, Let's type in a name, e.g. q cubed. Enter. In fact, I will create few tax more. One called program it. Another call a sphere. And the last one will be call cylinder. As you can see, our tags are placed now in alphabetical order. We can reverse that order, just clicking on here. And then symmetrical order will be ascendant or descendants. Furthermore, we have these colors. If we hover over details, one-click and we hit color by tag, then these colors will appear in our Canvas, colorizing each stack with its color. Now, all the dots are in the dark, cold and tucked. Then we have just this red color in our screen to the right of these colors, we have the word default. This is talking about the kind of line, the kinds of ads that we're using on each stack. If I hit on here, e.g. on this stack, then instead of default, which is a continuous line, we can use a dashed line, e.g. this one. You can see how our edges now are made of dust lines. Finally, we have this little pencil, which is saying us that this dark, the dark inward the pencil is, is the current duck. If I select my current tag, I hit on the pencil and immediately hit on another layer, then I will change my current data. This means that right now, if I draw something, e.g. this rectangle I'm drawing right now inside this sphere tags, you can check it by the column more to the right. We find these details, we expand it as usually will find more options. Birds is here again, and don't forget, color by tag will be able as well to the Late tag, the tag folder, etc, etc. Anyways, if we hit on any dark, e.g. this cylinder right button will find here more or less the same options. Expand or collapse. All select, all, delete, tag the lake doc folder, color by duck. Again here, this doc folder is talking about this option at that folder in order to get a better organisations of our tax in case that we have a lot of them, we can create easily a folder, Let's call it geometry, Enter. And then we have just to click on our desire. Duck and drag. Click and drag over this folder released. And then if I expand this folder, will find inside this cube duck, if I wanted to take this tag out from this folder, I just have to do exactly the same. Select my tag, click and drag and release outside of that folder, Let's delete the folder because we don't need it right now. Right button, delayed doc folder, easy. Let's see now something very important as it is when we want to move our entities, our geometry from one layer to another, e.g. this cube, I will select it three clicks. Now, it is placed in the taco untapped. And I want this geometry to be inside this cube tag. So I have mainly two options. I can use this toolbar which is here, and it's called ducks if you don't have it right now, remember, just go on this upper bar right bottom here. Look for this toolbar called tax. Then if I expand this arrow, I will find here all of my ducks ones. First, I select the geometry that I want to move here. I just have to click on the new tag, in this case, cubed, one-click. And then all of my selected geometry is now in these dark call queue. Again, you can check it by the color green and green. Another way for doing this process is by using the entity Info tray. One-click on here. Then remember that we have an option called duck here. As long as we have this geometry already selected, the entity Info is telling us where that geometry is placed, in what duck, but e.g. if I click outside, I don't have any selection right now, I will do a new one, e.g. this pyramid, then the entity Info Panel is telling me that I have selected 14 entities. They are placed in this tak, tak. I can expand this arrow and say, I want all of this geometry to be placed in the pyramid stack. One click on here. It is already done. Let's repeat this process with this fear. I select the sphere, one click on here is fear with the cylinder. I select the cylinder. One click on here, cylinder. I will erase this to the rectangle. I will place my taskbar again on its position. And finally, let's see how to delete attack because one thing is to delayed attack folder completely empty. And another thing to delayed attack with geometry inside e.g. this pyramid stack, phi selected right button. And I say the late tack, this window will pop up with this message. Entities in the model have been tagged with pyramid. What would you like to do with those entities? It means that we have something inside that tag, some entities, geometry. And then SketchUp is asking us what we want to do with that geometry. We want to delete the attack and all the entities inside. Then we have to choose the second option, or we have to delete the dark, but move that geometry to another tag. That case, we should use this first option, assign another tag and assign, as the word says, the new tag, e.g. untag, then I don't have the dark anymore, but I haven't deleted my geometry. That pyramid geometry is placed now in this untapped, that this is all the basics about the tax tray. I encourage you to use it and to get familiar with this tray because it is important. And in the next episode anyway, we will see the complicated part because using correctly this tax in SketchUp, maybe it's not as logical as you are imagining. So we will have to be careful about how we are going to do it. And we will understand why e.g. the cylinder has this dashed line when it's dark, is using this default line, which is continuous line. So I say goodbye here and I see you in the next episode. 56. Tags 2: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see what is the current workflow with tax in a sketch, because SketchUp has its own way for doing this and it is not very logical. I have to say e.g. as I mentioned at the end of the last episode, here we have a complicated situation with this cylinder. It has a dashed line. When if we check the kind of line of this tack, it is at a fault line. It means that it has to be a continuous line. What is the reason there? Well, the reason is that this cylinder was drawn beginning in this untapped tag. So all the geometry was placed inside that tag. Then we made a selection like that and we move all the entities to the cylinder. But we selected all the phases and all the visible edges. This is a cylinder, so it has a lot of hidden geometry, hidden edges. If I go over view, hidden geometry will see all of these hidden geometry, these lines which were not selected and they remained inside this untapped layer, which has this dashed line. That is the reason. So this explanation connects with what I'm going to explain now. What is the best workflow when we are using the tax in a sketch? So imagine that my current layer, Let's say that it is this untapped layer as it comes by default. But when I am drawing and I have organized these tasks menu using different layers as cube, cylinder, sphere. Then I decided to draw something inside this cube duck. Then my logic could be to change the current layer. So one-click, hear, one-click here. Now the currently it is cubed and then I draw something, e.g. this rectangle, then I want to draw something else. This time. I know that this geometry, I want to be inside the cylinder duck, then my logic could be changed again, my current layer, unselect the cylinder duck. So one-click, one-click and I draw another entity. This geometry I know is placed inside this cylinder. Let's repeat the process with this sphere. Duck, I change the current layer. Once the sphere, that is the current layer, I draw another rectangle. Cool, but this is not the correct way for using the tax in this case. Look that if I want to hide, let's say this cube duck, one click on the little eye. Something strange happens here. The line seems to not be complete. If I hide the cylinder dark, it is more clear. We don't have this EDS and something again is not complete here. If I hide this fear, that one click on here, then this window pops up. You cannot hide the current duck. Okay, so I will change the current tag. Let's say the current tag is the tag tag again, then I hide this sphere dark. And again, this is missing. Two big more clearer. Let's hide this cube dark. This is fear tab. I'll select this rectangle and I will move it a little bit along the green axis. Then when I unhide the cube and this fear that look, what happened, that you imagery was modify it because of my movement. So everything becomes a mess and y is happening this, what is the reason? The reason is because our logic says that if we are using different ducks, it is like if our geometry is isolated inside those tags and cannot be glue with other geometry, that is our logic. It's not the logic of a sketch. For a SketchUp, ducks don't work like that under the symmetry, can be blue even when the geometry is placed inside different ducts. So what is the good workflow for drawing in a schizo? Don't never change the current. The current tag by default is this untapped, dark and you don't have to change that. So if I repeat the same drawing correctly, I would start my drawing with this untapped dark as the current tag, I will draw my first rectangle. I will make a group. If I want that geometry to be isolated. I mean, we don't want that geometry to glue with anything else. I will draw my second rectangle. I will make a groove again. Then if I want this rectangle to be in another layer, I select the group and I move it to my desire, duck, I will repeat the same operation with this, another entity. I select it and I move it to my desired new tag, this time sitting there, Let's do it for the last time. I draw my geometry, I make a group and I change the tag this time sphere. So now what is happening is that the group, the box is placed in my cube duck, but the interior of the box, the fried geometry, as we use to name it, it is inside this untapped dark all the time. That is the reason because we have this does line on the edges. If we wanted to change that, we should go over here. One-click default. So this way I can hide, for instance, this cube tag and everything goes normal. I can hide this cylinder tag, everything goes normal. I could hide the cube and this fear. Select this rectangle, move it along the green axis. And when I unhide the previous DAX, my drawing hasn't changed at all. It has sent became a mess here. And I have all the control of my entities. So I give you a reminder, don't change the current duck. And when you draw, make groups or components in order to isolate geometry, if you don't want that geometry to glue with something else. And then afterwards is the correct moment for moving the entities to another layer in case that you want. I hope it is clear now, in case that you have any doubt, don't hesitate to ask me. In the next episode, we will see another tray. This time, we'll see the tray goal since this tray here. So be ready and see you in the next episode. 57. Scenes: Hello people and welcome to this new class where we're going to see a new tray called a. Since this tray is here, I will expand. It, will find here the possibility to add icing or to delayed our scene. So let's wait a little bit till we create our first. Firstly, I would like to talk about other tools related with this sin tray, like this. Three tools that we find here at the end of the main toolbar. We have position camera. We have this tool called Look around with this. And we have these two Cold War, the three of them are related with the TRE, why? Because the three of them are going to help us to place the camera in a very, very good position. Once this is done, we will record that position of the camera with many more properties through our essence. Let's do an example. Here. We have a professional project in where I'm working right now. This is a bit house and I have to do the interior design of different rooms. One of those rooms is the living room. The living room is placed here. Then if I go just scrolling in, I can get this position of the camera. But if I orbit here as I am placed in a, let's say a small space rapidly I can have travels, right? So in this case is when you are working in a project like that, my first recommendation is that you should create what I call our work is sin. I mean, in this project e.g. as I told you, I am in charge of the Interior Design, so I will work a lot in this space, in this living room, the ceiling most of the time is just something annoying. Okay, So while you are working, we can create attack in where we put everything we don't need, like e.g. the ceiling, this is something that it is already done. If I go over tax, you will find here this tag called serine so I can hide this tag and then I don't have the ceiling anymore so I can work. I can place my furnitures easily. I can have a better view of the space all the time and so on. So e.g. if this position of the camera, let's say that it is correct as a reference, then I can go over, uh, scenes and say, add a sin one click and I am recording right now this position of the camera with many more properties as all of this that we can read here, if I scroll down, the name is seeing one we can call this scene work is seen better at description. And then this is interesting because we have here all the properties safe with the scene. The camera allocation, which is obvious, top level hidden geometry, hidden objects receive all ducks, active section planes, style and fog, subtle settings and access locations. All of these things are safe with this sin, which means that if I continue working, e.g. I need the ceiling. Right now. I am here working on working again. And then I need that word sin again. I just have to hit on here two clicks, the tag goes out. If I had a section plane, e.g. it comes if I had some subtotals, settings, they would come as well, etc, etc. So this is my first recommendation. Create a word sin. Anyways, once you have finished your project, like in this case, all the furnitures are perfectly placed and then you want to create a final note. Work is seen, then it is the correct moment for using these tools. The first one is called position camera. If I hit on here and I hover over Miocene, SketchUp is asking me where I want to put this guy, let's say here on the main floor, one-click. And then the first thing that we have to check is is the eye. Down in the right corner, we can read 2.42 m. This is the high, high right now, I could say that it is too much, so I can just type in 1.6. We can adjust these high, high and then automatically the other tool called Look around, which will allow us to pivot the camera view around and a stationary point. If I click left button and I drag, I will pivot around a stationary point. It is like I am using just my neck if I would be a human being, but my body is completely still. I can move my neck looking at the upper part of my room or even my fit. This is super useful in order to select the best camera view. Imagine that we are happy with this position. We unhide the ceiling, tack, one-click here and we can add a new lesson here. We're the third tool that we have available is this one called Walk. It will allow us to adjust the camera view because using this tool, we will not lose the eye height. That is the point of this tool. So once it is selected, once you hit it and you hover over your scene, if I click on here, e.g. you will see a little gross, which is the reference for our future movements. The thing about this tool is that we will keep the high, high all the time. We will not lose it as if we were using the orbit tool. I click and drag and I have that little cross as a reference. If I go above the little cross, I will move forward. Below the little cross, I will move backwards. If I move over the left of the little cross, I will move towards the left side and the same over the right side of the cross. Here, our movements are a little bit complicated because I have to say that this file, it comes from articulate. So the movement are a little bit strange. Normally, it is easier to use this tool. Let's jump now here to this another project in where everything, the base, not just the furnitures were made in a sketch, then as you can see, we have this work is seen called tobacco in Spanish. So I can come to this meeting point. Let's say easily, I can work here, I can put my furnitures. And then once that I want to create a final scene, I use the position camera. One click on here, I check the IHI. 1.6 could be okay. I look around using the tool call, look around and I am not changing my eye, my position neither. And in case that I want to move, then I can use the warp tool, one click and drag, and then I move above, behind, left or right accordingly with this little cross, this time, I can control much more bitter the movements because as I told you, we don't have the problem as with the file before, once I am in my desired position, e.g. let's say here again, look around, I can check what is the best camera view, e.g. this one could be nice. I would need to unhide the ceiling and create another esteem just by clicking on Add a scene. Take into account that if I use my work tool and I position my feet far from the glitter cross, I will move more rapid than if I position the feet close to the retailer crops. Finally, if I find in my movement of all, I stop against the wall and I find this little icon which says forbidden. Unless I hold down Alt key, then I can go through the walls. Were coming back to our first project. Let's use the luca round tool in order to find Another nice camera position. Imagine that we like e.g. this one, and we say that we want to add a sin, perfect. The same number three will come here it is, with all of these properties, right? But the thing here is that the lines, the vertical lines are a little bit inclined. This is because we are using this perspective camera and it will be better if we use this two-point perspective. Now, all the vertical lines are completely straight because we have delighted that third point of the perspective, which is placed the upper part, this will be explained better in another class where we will see how to export our sins into IJ back. But now the thing is that we have made some changes in our sin and we want to save those changes. So we should go over sin number three, right bottom update as soon as SketchUp asks us if we want to save all of these properties, we say yes, update, then this scene comes with this two-point perspective. So if I move the camera and I go back again to a C Number three, we can see two point perspective here. The same will happen if we come back to a C number two, let's do it. And we realize that we haven't used another very useful tool which is not very well known. It is here if we go over camera field of view, I will hit it. And then in the measure bar, we can read 75 degrees. This is talking about our visual field as a human being. The normal field of view for a human being is 60 degrees, but we can play with it in order to give more information to our project. That is the reason because here I have 75 degrees by default, but we could say 45 Enter and then everything changed it. So I place my guy here again. I look around. I can use the warp tool. If I want to move a little bit backwards without losing my eye height, look around again, I check my better camera view. I can use even the hand tool in order to pan a little bit. And then again, look around. I could use the camera two point perspective. And if I go over camera field of view, we are using 45 degrees right now. If we don't like it, we can say 60. And then they fill of view is wider. Again. I can look around again if I want to move backwards, I have to use this fit tool. If I don't want to lose my I high. And once I am here and I am happy, then if I have my sin number to select it, I can say right button update as sin, and all of these changes will be saved. This update, the sin of sin is here as well. And these arrows will allow us to move this thing down or up. Finally, we have this Upsilon for in order to make modifications in our thumbnails. And eventually we can hide details or so details. Those details are talking about those properties we saw here when we scroll down as it is useful in SketchUp, we have this arrow in every tray in where we have more oxygens, which you can easily check, but the most important ones are already seen. You have to have in mind that the goal of having seen is that we can come back to that as sin whenever we want. It will allow us to finally create a J peg when we export this as seen as an image. So I encourage you to practice with your own projects. Create two or three nice scenes, make some modifications on them and refresh those scenes. Don't forget to use the two-point perspective, two-point perspective Upsilon, and the field of view. And in the next episode, we will see another tray which can be used as well in a scene as it is, the saddles tray. 58. Shadows: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see the saddles trip. It is already expanded and we have as well a toolbar called Show Hide settles. Here. We have the main options, but if we move to the tray shadows, as you can see, we'll find here many more options. So let's start from the beginning. We have this button, so hide shadows. It is the same as this one. So if I hit, then I am switching on the sun. In a sketch, we have now these cast shadows on the ground and thanks to these, sliders, will be able to adjust time and the day and a specific day, which will change the position of the sun and then it will make change as well, the cast shadows. So e.g. if my time is 12:00, I mean, it is known and we change the month, moving the slider to our summer months, not a winter month, the cast shadows will be very short as it happens in our normal life. On the contrary, if we are still using the same time, 12:00, but our month is, let's say e.g. November, the cast shadows will be much more longer, right? We have to control these settings in order to make the best of our project. Anyways, we have here more oxygens. It is the light. Now we're not talking about the cast shadows. We are talking about the light. So we can make that light lighter here, e.g. or we can make that light more bright. The next slider is talking about this time, years, about the cast shadows. We can make them lighter or darker. This another option called use sun for saving makes sense if this button, the first one, so hide Santos is turned off. So let's do it. We don't have cached silos anymore, but we are still using the SketchUp some because this oxygen is already marked, right? That means that we have some faces illuminated while others are not, right. E.g. this one, the difference is that we are not using cast shadows, but we are still using the position of the SketchUp son. If I unclick this option we have is still an artificial light because some faces are eliminated, but not all of them with the same intensity. But right now, as we are not using this upsilon, that artificial light has nothing to do with the SketchUp sun and then with this slider. So this option, in my opinion, it is not very useful and important. Anyways, we can mark it. Let's turn on so high shadows. Let's check these other options on faces, on ground from edges. To understand better this option, I will draw here a cylinder. Then we will see how we have cast shadows on the faces of this cylinder. If I turn off on faces, then you can see how our cast shadows is not affecting the phases of the ceiling. So to be more realistic, I recommend you to use this option on faces on ground, as you can imagine already, is going to allow us to cast shadows on the ground. If I turn off this option, we don't have Saddles anymore on the ground, but pay attention here because it can seem obvious that we will need to use all the time this on ground epsilon, but it will depend on its case, e.g. if I have this kind of situation in where I have a hole like this one, Let's draw it and then I turn on, on ground, I will move. Don't read the data slider. And the time, you can see that here we can find a kind of error, right? Because this cast shadow from the queue on the ground is turned on, is going through the whole plane as a horizontal plane, and it is not going inside the hole, is not working in a realistic way, right? So how we can resolve this problem? First of all, we have to turn off on ground, then we have lost the cast shadows on the ground. Obviously, in that case, we will need to create our own ground. So I will select this x and I will make this phase much more bigger. I will reverse phases. And then if I move the sliders, now, I don't have that problem, right? My cast shadows are working in a normal way. We're not creating that horizontal plane. I will turn on, again on ground as it happens here, right? So on round is not always an option that we have to mark here, e.g. it is better to create our own ground and unclick this option. Finally from this will allow us to make cast shadows from an egg. Individual ads, e.g. I. Will draw here a vertical. Now this is not making any shadows, but if I click from edges, you can see that now we have this x. Let's jump now to these projects. A Greek temple, and let's use the subtle Stray here. First of all, we have to turn on the shadows. Here they are. And now through these sliders, we will control the position of our cast shadows. E.g. here could be okay. We will use this example for explaining another important tool. When we are working in a project like that, maybe we want some elements to have an specific behavior in terms of cellulose, e.g. the roof. Sometimes maybe we don't want to cast shadows or to receive shadows. If we want one element to behave in a specific manner, we have to select it, go over Entity Info, and then we have these two options. One is called Dawn receive shadows, and the other one is called Don't cast shadows. So e.g. this roof, it is already selected. If I hit, don't receive shadows, it will not change now because we don't have any cast shadows on it. We have just the light of the sun. But if we hit, Don't cast shadows, then it will change a lot. What is happening inside the building because this element, this roof, is not casting shadows anymore. We could do the same with this. Another roof don't cast shadows and then create inside the building another effect with more and more light. Of course we are, Let's say that we are cheating a little bit or a lot. But sometimes could be very useful in order to put some more light inside our interior and being able to tell our client or whoever our ideas in a better way in a sketch. My last advice here is that you have to be aware that when we are using the saddles in SketchUp, we're consuming a lot of resources of our computer. So just turn them on when you really need it. The rest of the time when you are working, just modelling, my advice is to turn those off. So we finished the episode here, and I will see you in the next one in where we will continue modelling our Barcelona Pavilion using our new skills. 59. Barcelona Pavillion 3. Roofs: Hello people and welcome to this working project in where we are going to continue drawing our Barcelona Pavilion. After drawing the podium, the walls, and the Pindar's, it is time for the roofs. But before starting, I will draw here a little cube which we will use in the future to explain some concepts. So now Yes, Let's start with the roofs Control L, top view camera, parallel projection. And I will activate the X-ray. I will start drawing these roof placed at this side, which I think is a little bit easier. So as I used to say, You have many ways in order to draw in a sketch up here, e.g. we can use the rectangle, one click on this corner and another click on here. Now it is important that you have to be aware that when we are drawing with a parallel projection and using the top view means that we're not totally sure about at what high we are drawing. So now I orbit. We can see that our rectangle is drawn on the surface of the podium, on the surface of where it's placed, the image. The reason of this is because our first click was here, was this one. And the height of this point is the surface of the image, then the rest of the rectangle keep that height. So now it is easy to continue. I just need to select my rectangle, which is not blue to anything else. Because the rest of the things, our groups, I click em to move. First point, I constrain my movement to the set X and I choose correct reference of high e.g. here, I can orbit to check my row when it is correct. So now pause, pull, one-click and I write down the thick of this roof. It is 0.3 m. Enter. Here we have, I could switch off the x-ray. And the last step would be select these roof with three clicks. Right button, make a group. And now we have this roof in a protective box. Let's go with the other roof. I go here, top view. Again, X-ray, I can see the lines for the roof making this rectangle. So now I will use the line tool. First click here. Click here. Next point is aligned with this edge of the swimming pool. So I will constrain to the red acts and I will select this edge as a reference. Then I continue till here. Again, I will constrain this time to the green acts with a left arrow, and then this would be the edge of reference. Now the last line till the end point. Now I can orbit, I can switch off the X-ray. And if I click on here, we can see that we have the surface. Because again, as we before made different groups, these new rectangle hasn't been glue with anything else. So two clicks M for moving it, I can choose any point inside the rectangle or even outside. I constrain this movement to the set x, I choose a correct reference for the high. Now push-pull, one-click and I write down 0.3 m spacebar for select three clicks. Right button, make room. Here we have sometimes when we orbit and we are using the camera in parallel projection, then we have errors because of the graphic card, as you can see here with this cube. This is normal in SketchUp, so it is good to change the camera tool perspective as soon as possible. So now let's go with a tux. I will create a new tag called roofs Enter. And then looked at from this tray, I can't place my geometry in any of these tax. I have to do it from this tool. It is very, very easy. I have just to select the geometry, in this case, the roots, then expand these key. It appears all of the texts that I have in my drawing. Then I just click where I want to place that geometry. In this case, roofs click. And now this geometry is already in the roofs stuck. If I want to take it, the best way is just to click on it. And then if my geometry disappears, it means that everything is right. I will unhide it again. I will select the image Control H to hide it. And now we are almost done. I recommend you strongly that every time that you draw a roof in your drawing, put it in a different tack in order to be able to hide and unhide so easily. This is because many times you will want to work in the interior. And if you have the roof in your drawing, it will disturb you quite a lot because it will be in the middle of the camera many times that it is happening right now, I am zooming out and then you have to hello inside again. So bothering, but we have the roof in a different tag. We just have to click on the eye. And that's all. It is. Even easier than the to hide and unhide that we have learned before. Hide and unhide is more, let's say, for being used when we have to improvise e.g. we are drawing right now and then we have this pillar. I don't want it right now here in the middle of the drawing, then I can say hide, right button, height or Control H. But when we are working with, let's say a structural things like a roof, then it is much more better to place it in a different tack and work like we have just learned in this episode. So control you for a high that pillar, I will click here in zoom extents to show the entire model. Click on the eye of the roofs liar, and we are ready to continue in the next class. 60. Barcelona Pavillion 4. Glassmakers: Hello everybody and welcome to this new episode. Let's continue working with our Barcelona Pavilion. So in this class, we will focus on drawing the glass makers. If I click Control L, then I can see my emits X-ray on top view, I will hide the roofs. Here in blue, we can see this glass makers, which have an aluminum frame and are divided in vertical partitions as well. We can support ourselves watching some real images of the Barcelona Pavilion before drawing it. And I am thinking that I will place this image into another dark. It will be more easy from this point on to hide and unhide it. So here in tax at that, the name will be emits enter. Once the image is selected, I expand this menu and click on image, then I will hide it. If I go here and I unhide my image, I switch on my x-ray, I select the top view and the camera in parallel projection. We are ready to draw and we will start with this glass. Once we have finished this class, the rest of them will be easier because we will have the mechanism in order to do it faster. So I will orbit. I am thinking that I will not use the parallel projection. So I'll go to perspective again. We need here the thick of that glass. I will tell you it is 5 cm thick. So I will select the line. First point, second point at 0.05 m, then zoom out. Redox did more or less here. And again 0.05 m, but I have the automatic reference. So click on now, just end point. As you already know, the rest of the elements of my drawings or groups or components. So this rectangle can't be glue to anything else. I will switch off the X-ray post-school one-click and I will move my mouse just to the top of e.g. this wall. As you can see, I have made a solid wall. Now, I will use a new tool called offset. It is here, it belongs to the transformation tools, and once it is selected, I have to choose a surface. In this case, this one, one-click and I move my mouse, then you can see in the measure bar that we have a distance. This is the distance that we are performing from the bounding edges. So I write 0.05 m Enter. And now we have the frame of the glass maker. If I want to create a hole here, St. Paul, one-click and I pose just Tilly other side here, e.g. we have the level on phase. I can click here and a hole is created. Now we need the vertical partitions. We know that we have two here, one around here, and another one around here. For doing this, I will use my measure tool. I will create an auxiliary line here, one click, I move my mouse and I come back, click and I have just created an auxiliary line. Then I will select this auxiliary line, move first point of the movement. But I don't want a movement. I want to create a copy. So I click Control, I choose my final point. It will be here. And I write a split bar, three Enter. Now as you can see, instead of one copy, I have three copies which are at the same distance between each other. Now swimming to e.g. this auxiliary line. Here, I can draw these vertical partition in many different ways. I could do e.g. here, the plant floor and then post pool or even better in my opinion, I could use this vertical line in order to create a vertical surface and then extrude that surface in the horizontal dimension. So again, tape measure tool I will create from here in the red acts a new auxiliary line at 0.025 and the same in the opposite direction, 0.025. Then rectangle, first point, zoom out and zoom in. Here we are. So at this point, I just have to select these essays and be laid them. Go closer again to hear whose pool. In this case, just pull e.g. to these ads, which can be used as a reference. Perfect. Now, in order to do it in a different way, I will use the select tool. I will create a box from left to right. Once I have selected my new element movement, enter, I select the correct point for the movement. If I just move, I am distorting my geometry, but I want a copy. So I click Control and I select the correct spot to place these new elements. Mouth space bar, I click out, here we are. Now I could, with the eraser delayed these auxiliary lines because I don't want my drawing to be dirty. And as you can see, we have almost finished with our frame. We just need now the glasses. But first of all, I will make this frame a group. So select three clicks, right button may grow. Once it is a group, I will go in with two clicks rectangle, I will select this mid point. Somehow. I look here because if I want to work with select the opposite point for drawing this glass could be quite hard for me. I can do it, but because I have a lot of experience with this navigation tools, but the correct advice here is to use the X-Ray phi switch. On the X-ray, I am able to see these points which are hidden by the surfaces and select them in a super easy way, midpoint click. Now I can switch off again the x-ray and I have my surface or read it wrong. Let's repeat the operation here. Midpoint. Somehow, instead of orbiting x-ray, and I choose super-easy. The opposite midpoint here, midpoint, midpoint. Switch off the x-ray. And if I go to glass and mirrors and I choose e.g. this Miro number one. Then it appears this paint marker. And I have to click on the surface in where I want that material to be applied. Here. Maybe these material doesn't fit with the Barcelona Pavilion. So I will choose another one, e.g. this translucent glass blue click, I think it is better. Another click here. And finally here, then a space bar. And I click out of my group. If I go to the outliner and I select my window, you can see that here we have our group. And if I go inside, I have the glasses and I have the frame, just like free geometry. So escape within is here. This is a very important class. I hope that you will be able to update your drawing till here, because in the next episode, we will finish the rest of the windows and we will continue practicing with the material tray. 61. Barcelona Pavillion 5. More glassmakers: Hello everybody and welcome to this new class. Let's continue drawing our plasma occurs. So I will switch on my x-ray and we will start this class drawing this glass maker which is here. So I could start drawing a line between these two pillars in order to get the midpoint. And I reference, which I will use for placing correctly these new glass maker. Here it is, Now rectangle. So first point here, second point around here. We can check now the dimensions 8.14, semicolon 0.18. We know that the second dimension, 0.18 is not correct. It has to be 0.0, 0.5. So we can write 8.15 more or less semicolon 0.05 Enter. Now I select this element, I click twice my left button Move, and now I will check where is the middle point of this geometry. And I will move it to my reference. Here we are. Top view. It is more or less correct. So E for the eraser, and I delayed my auxiliary line once I have done this post pool and we take our reference for the high, now we can use the offset to 0.05. I will switch off the X-ray Post poll again and we will make a whole. So we have to find this level on phase. Click. Perfect. Now we have the main frame. These mainframe. Let's put it into a group, three clicks, right bottom may group. And now we have to draw the vertical partitions. At this point, we can check with some photos how many we have. Ai tells you already that we have seven. So in order to draw these seven vertical partitions, we will use components. Why? Because these elements are exactly the same all the time and they will be repeated not just here in this glass maker, but in the rest of the last makers in the pavilion. So I can use the line red x, 0.05, again, the red X. And I close my surface post pool and I pull till here, I select this element. Three clicks, right button, Make component. Let's call it vertical part. Create. Here it is. Now we need the references. So I will use my auxiliary line. This auxiliary line in order to be totally accurate, should be placed in the middle of this surface resistance, then it would be 0.025. Enter here we are. I will make another reference on the opposite place here, 0.025. And now I can select this auxiliary line, say Move, select e.g. this point I click Control because I want to make a copy. I place this copy using my reference here, and then I have to write split bar and the number of copies that I want. I don't want one but eight in order to have seven in the interior of the frame. Perfect. Now I can select my component, move midpoint and I use my reference. Once I have placed correctly the first one, I have to make copies. So again, I choose this midpoint move in my way. I click Control and I make a copy placed here, then I don't want one copy, but 123456. So asterisk six Enter. Here we are eraser and now I can delete all of these auxiliary lines. Let's go with the glasses. I can use the rectangle I looked at here instead of orbit and try to find that point. Moving the camera, we can use the X-Ray in order to be able to detect that point, much more easier. So I select the correct point and I go to the opposite midpoint. Click switch off x-ray. I select this surface M for moving first point, e.g. this one control for make a copy. I placed my copy here and instead of one copy, I want 1234567. So seven, Enter. Here we are. Now I could select all the elements of this glass maker. In order to do that, I will make a box. The selection tool and then using sift, I will say that this pillar and this pillar are not part of the selection right button make group, then I can notice that something went wrong because the box of this group is too large. It means that something is included in this group which shouldn't be there. Let's check it then double-click. Here it is, this line. It is included in my group, but it is not necessary, so I will select it and delete. Now we can notice that when I click on My group, the box is not that large. Perfect. Now we are done with this glass maker and we will learn another tool which is called Rotate. You will find it here in the transformation panel. But first of all, let's make a copy of this group. And then let's use the rotate tool. I click on it, and then you can see that we have this cycle for measure angles in a blue color. So we need to work with the blue color. I can just click e.g. here, one click, and then my circle is already fixed, then we need a reference second click. And from that reference, from that line which has been created between these two points, I will start measuring the angle. I move the mouse and you can see that the angle is changing. We can even write the angle by ourselves, 90, enter. Perfect. Again, X-ray on. I will move this element to its correct place, which is more or less here. And look now that this glass maker is shorter than the real one, it should be this large here. So first thing that we can do is e.g. go here, go inside this group, select this frame. Go inside this group again till we can select the surface post pool. And I pull my sire point. Here. I should do the same with this, another surface, this one. So Post poll again, in this case, I will push, but I don't have the reference. So I need that reference auxiliary line parallel, e.g. to this 0.05. Now I have the reference tool again, click on that surface till my auxiliary line. Here we are. I can switch off the X-ray. You can see that we have already the main frame. But in this particular case, the distance between the vertical partitions are different than in the previous glass maker. So I should erase all of the, let's say glasses, clicking twice in order to select not the as the surface, but the surface and the bounding edges. Here we are. Now I will erase as well these vertical partition, all except one. And finally, I will need again auxiliary lines in order to create my references. Here. If we check with some photos, we will find that we have nine vertical partitions. So again, we have to repeat the same operation. Auxiliary line, I take e.g. this 0.0, 0.025. The same operation on the opposite side, 0.025, zoom-out eraser. First of all, I will delete, which doesn't need to be there. So one-click, I see that it is part of a group. I have to go inside and double-click. Then I can select my auxiliary line and delayed scape for going backwards. Now I select again this auxiliary line. Move one point. I don't want to move my axilla line, but I want to create a copy. We're here at the end. I use my another reference. Click, then I write a split bar, ten enter. It means that we have ten copies, nine in the interior of the main frame. Time for placing the vertical partitions correctly, I select it moves. And let's start just placing the first one correctly. And then we have to make copies. Again. Mid point control for making the copy. First copy here. But we don't want one copy. But 12345678. So asterisk eight, Enter. Here we are eraser. And we delayed all of these auxiliary lines. Time for the glasses, I will use the X-Ray in order to detect these mid point. Is here, one first point and second midpoint here. Nice. Switch off X-ray. Let's make some copies. I select the surface m for moving, reference point, control for making a copy. Second point. Here, we don't want one copy. We want 12,345,678.9. So asterisk nine, Enter. Here we are. We are still inside the group, so escape. If escape is not working, then Spacebar and we click outside. If we go to the outliner to understand better the structure of this glass maker, we can see that we have a group. Inside that group, we have different components, which are the vertical partitions. And then another group which is the main frame. Apart of this, we have the glasses, but the glasses, I can select it here. You can see that they are free, yeah, symmetry and geometry doesn't appear here in the outliner, but actually it is there inside this first group. So once we have finished with this element, again, X-ray and we will draw finally, these two elements, which are exactly the same. So we will draw just one and then we will make a copy. They think about these elements is that the structure, the frame is shared with these previous elastic maker. So we will use these vertical partition, this one and this one as a structure elements. So first of all, again, auxiliary lines, I need something parallel to these new elements, e.g. this line. And I will place it just following this vertical line when I am able to touch the ground, click, now I can repeat this auxiliary line. The distance would be 0.05. Click and we can check that everything is right. Draw in another vertical auxiliary line here, another here. And then these contact points, we'll say if the drawing is correct or not, switch off the X-ray rectangle. First point, second point. Here. When we touch the wall, click Post poll, we pull and we choose the correct height offset. Click 0.05 post pool, and we make a hole when the level on face appears. In this point, I have just realized that many of my elements don't have the correct height. That is because when I draw the pillars, I did a mistake. This is very normal situation when we draw in SketchUp, it is almost impossible to do it. Everything perfect the first time. No problem. For the pillars. It will be super easy to correct it because they are components. So if I go inside any of them, I can say post pool this time, Yes, Go e.g. till here and correct the height of these elements. Click now I have to do the same with these two elements. So I go inside this group. I will go inside the main frame. I will select this upper part, move. First point, I can constrain to the set x and then I use a reference with this wall. Because of the glue concept, surfaces and SDS are going altogether alone. This movement in the set X, I go out from this group. And then I will do the same with this vertical partitions. They are components. It will be super easy. Post poll. Click, Fill here with the glasses. I go back and in this case, I can select e.g. this line M for move in. And again, because of the glute concept, if I stretched this surface from any point of this alone, the set Ax and Ay constrain this movement here. Then all of the surface and all of the edges go together and the job is already done. I can make this same operation with the rest of the elements M. I constrain my movement to the set x, and then I can choose this point as a reference. Here we are Spacebar and I click outside. Now I have to do the same with this glass maker. The vertical partitions are already corrected because they are components and they changed when I made the corrections here. So I should go inside the group of the mainframe. Again, one box just for the upper part. Move. First point, constrain the movement and choose the correct height one step backwards. I mean, we have to go out from this group. Spacebar, I click out, I click outside. Now I go inside the main group and I choose all of these edges. The edges m, any point constrain the movement, and I choose the correct height. Here we are. I can go outside of this group. Everything is already corrected. So we will draw in this element, we had the mainframe, but here we need to eliminate this part because we are going to use this vertical partition from this another glass maker. So I can, you just say Post poll, I go till here. But then we have a surface left. You can see it. If I hide this element, we have this surface left. So let's go with the eraser. Now we can go to Edit and height last or Control U. We can make a group of this frame, three clicks. Let's use an auxiliary line in order to detect the midpoint of this element. If we are trying to find it and we're not being successful, it is because we are not inside the group. So we need to go inside, again, auxiliary line, one parallel. And here we are. Now we are working with the real geometry, not with the boxes. And the program can find the references. Here we are. Spacebar, click outside. Now we need one of our vertical partitions and place it here, just one in the middle. So if I go e.g. inside this group and I select e.g. this vertical partition, you have to be aware of the fact that this is placed inside a group, and we don't want that. Our copy is placed inside that group. We want that copy in another room outside of this one. So in order to do this task, we have to select our elements, edit, copy or control C. Then I go back, I go outside that group. E.g. here I am in the normal growing. I say Edit, paste or Control V. Then I have my component ready to be placed wherever I want. Let's say here, then I choose the midpoint and I use the reference. Here, we're time for the glasses x-ray rectangle, I choose the correct midpoint, sum out. Second midpoint. Here we are switched off the X-ray. I select this surface and I make a copy. First point, control. Second point. Nice. Let's put all of these elements together inside a group. I mean these two surfaces, this component and this group. So I select the group for the mainframe, I select component. And finally I select these two surfaces, right button, make group. If I click on it and we go to the outliner, we will see that we have a group. Inside. There is one vertical partition, one component, and another group, which is the mainframe. Again, the surface is for the glasses don't appear here, but they are inside this group. Pay attention because e.g. now, when I select this group in which there is the mainframe inside this out cilia line is already selected. It means that this auxiliary line, it is inside that group by one. To delete it, I have to go inside that group and then I can select just the human tree. So I can select this auxiliary line and say delayed. I go outside. And then with just one click, I select all of these elements because they are all inside one group. I say M for moving. But I want a copy. First point, e.g. here, second point exactly here. We have the second glass maker already done time for erasing e.g. this auxiliary lines, this one as well. We are almost done. It is one of the most difficult classes of the course in terms of drawing. Because here you have to be able to understand perfectly when you are inside a group, when you are outside complex groups with different elements inside, at the same time, you have to use your drawing skills and make them better. So don't worry if you find difficulties for drawing these elements. It is part of the process. And I will see you in the next episode in where we will start using quite a lot the material tray. 62. Barcelona Pavillion 6. Textures: Hello people and welcome to this new class, where we will continue working with the Barcelona Pavilion. This time, we will apply materials. In the previous class, we applied a material here in this glass maker so we can hit the letter B or the paint bucket, then the materials tray is already expanded. And we can see that we have here this translucent glass blue select any ways we can Alt key and hold down Alt key while we hit this material, complete. And then we are totally sure that this is our material, translucent glass, blue. If I move over edit, and then let's say that we use this option called match color on a screen. I click it and then we can select a color in our screen that we want to use. Let's say e.g. this gray here in the upper bar, one click on here, and we keep the same properties of the previous material, but with this color, Let's change the name. I would call it new glass easily. So now let's apply our new glass material on our model. Firstly, I'll go here to this glass maker, and then I select it. I go to my outliner and I see the structure. I expand this key and I can see that we have some components and another group. I click on it and I see that it is the main frame. So if I want to apply my glass here on the quadric surfaces, we have to know that in case that I am outside of the group like I am right now, I select my paint bucket and I click just once. Then all of the geometry of this group, all of the things that are inside this box will be modified with this material. This is another beer, two of the groups, but we have to know when is the correct time for use in it. Of course not now. So I will undo this last step control set. I will click Select, I will go inside this first box and then we have these different surfaces like free geometry. So I can use the paint bucket here, creating these different transparent and glasses. The rest of the things inside this group, part of their structure and another material will have to be applied on it. Spacebar, I click outside. Let's go with this. Another classmate, just the same. I have to go inside the group. Let her beak and apply my new glass on the correct surfaces. Spacebar click outside. And more of the same just here. Okay, Let's go now to apply another material for data structure. Then we should go to the material tray, expand these key Anglo e.g. to metal. Here we will find different options. Let's pick this aluminium. One-click. The material is already loaded, and then let's go e.g. let's start with this first, last Maker, Space bar. One click, I go to the outliner and we can see that this group is different than the others. It was the first that we made and there is no more groups or components inside. So inside this group, there is just geometry, fried geometry. So if I click twice and I go inside letter B, I should go surfaced by surface applying these new material. This could be a slow process. So another way could be select all of the geometry using control and letter a, then apply my aluminium. And once all of the geometry has this aluminum, we will change just the glasses, which is easier and more rapid. So Spacebar, I click outside, I go to the House bottom. I select my new glass material. One click on this surface, another click here, and another click here. We can jump to this, another glass maker here, one-click, I go inside, two clicks. And for this vertical partitions, we know that they are inside a component box. So if I apply my aluminum from the outside, one click, we can see that that material has been applied to all of the geometry inside, but not on the other copies. This is something particular about components. If we apply a material from the outside of the box, that material will be applied on the symmetry of that copy, not in all the copies control set. Because we want to apply the aluminium in all the copies at the same time, then we should need to go inside these component box. Okay, We can click again, control a, all of the geometry is already selected. Then letter B, one-click and we are already done. Much more rapid. I click outside, and I go then to this group, the mainframe letter B. And I will apply my material from the outside space bar and I go outside. Let's repeat the same process with this. Another glass maker, of course, all of the vertical partitions are already done because they are components. So two clicks, we're going inside the main group, letter B. And I apply my aluminium from the outside of this group, the mainframe, perfect space bar. And I click outside the same here. I click twice letter B, one-click from outside of this room. The same with this last element. And we are done. So let's finish this class applied in this aluminum as well to the pillars. We know that the pillars or components as well. So it will be super easy and super rapid. I have just to press the letter B that I have my aluminum loaded. I can do it in any copy. I click twice, I go inside, control a for selecting all of the geometry. Let her be one-click spacebar, click outside. Let's just start working with the materials for the walls. This means that we have to import some textures. But first of all, I just realized that here it Mrs. an important wall, so I have to draw it. I'll click on X-ray and then I will use this wall for making a copy. I will put it on the correct place, let's say more or less around here. And then I have to make it a little bit shorter and go into this group, P. Click, and let's say it goes still here. Perfect. I go out W camera, parallel projection. It is. Okay. I can move it a little bit more. Upwards. Camera perspective, x-ray off. And here we are. I go to my dogs, I hide the image and now materials tray. And let's create a new material. So first of all, I said the material to paint with two default and create a new material. Once here I would call it Forums tool and click on Use texture image. We go to our attach textures and we choose orange marble. Here we are. The size is the size of the image. We can say, okay, we have created the material already. Now. Pay attention because this is very important. We are outside of our group. So if I click here from the outside, then this material is applied in all of the surfaces of the group. This could be very nice, but sometimes it has some inconvenience, e.g. now with this wall, we will see why. The first thing that we can see is that the texture very, very small. So we should go to edit and make this texture bigger. Let's say 3 m. Now it is more or less, okay? But the problem is the position of these different drawings of the marble. So we need to change that position from this menu. From the Edit menu, we can change the position. We can change just the size of the texture. And then we change the size. The position is changing already, but we don't have actually a real control of the position. So for doing this, there is an option in SketchUp. So I will go with the Spacebar, select into this group. And when I select a surface and I click the right button, we can see here that we have this option make unique texture. There is an option which is missing. It is called just texture and it's not here. This is actually the option that I'm looking for, but why it is not appearing here? The reason is because we apply the texture from the outside of the group, you remember? So I'll go backwards. Control set, control, set, control set, I'm here. Then instead of applying the texture from the outside of the group, I will go in letter B and I will apply this texture just to this surface. One-click, then right button and you can see the oxygen I was talking about. Then if I display this option, we can find position projected and edit texture image. Position is the option that we need. One-click. And then if I assuming we find for, let's say e times on the corners of our texture. The first one is for a scale and share the texture. The second one allow us to distort the texture. And the red and the green one are the most important. For us. With the red, I will be able to change the position and with the green. We'll be able to rotate my texture and at the same time, I will be able to scale and make it bigger or smaller. So zoom out and then I will scale first of all, my texture, let's say more or less till here to mouth, I will move it. I just have to use the left button and keep it pressed while I'm moving. I will go to here, then a scale again. Here for scaling, I have to move the mouse just in the horizontal line. Because if I move upwards, then I will make a rotation. So I will scale it till the end of the wall in its upper part, more or less here. Then I can move that texture again. And at the limit of the texture to the right edge of the wall. Here we are. And then we would be done with this side of the wall. Take into account that these changes that we just made with this wall, with this texture haven't been recorded here in the Edit panel. So if I go to the other side and I click, we can see that we have still these measurements. In case that we want to record these changes, I should go to this texture right bottom. And then we have to use this option, make unique texture one-click. And then if I go to Select, we find that we have two different tools. The first one, this one, and the second one, this one. So now we need this second one. I click on here, and here we are. The problem is that the drawings are now facing the other side. They are pointing to the right side. Then we have to rotate them. No problem. One-click right bottom texture position. We use the green item, we make a rotation, but without changing the scale. Here we are. And now we can just adjust the position e.g. here. Select and I click out. Now, I go inside the group again, letter B. And I use the same second orange marble to complete the entire wall. Here we are. Let's go now with this second one. This will be much more easier. Why? Because we will not be worried about the exactly position of the texture. So again, the fault material create new material, use texture image. Now we select the green marble. Let's name it as green marble. One-click from the outside of the group. Then on the surfaces has been affected by the material will go to EBIT. And from here, let's make that texture bigger for e.g. here we are, nice. Let's do it a little bit more bigger, six, even better, as you can see here, we don't have that problem about the drawings of the marble, so we don't need to go e.g. inside the group. Select this surface right button and make this surface, this material like unique texture. And then in that case we could play with the texture option with the position and all the stuff. So I go out and we repeat the same operation here. Default material, create new material, use texture, image, in this case the green marble to open green marble to as a name. Okay, one-click from the outside of this group. And we have it. Now again, we go to the Edit panel and let's say e.g. three here, more or less. Okay? Even bigger. Four-point, too, little bit more. 4.3, here we are. This could be nice. Again, in this case, we don't need to do the operations that we did with the orange wall. So as you can see, our pavilion is now much more colorful. Let's continue applying our textures to our pavilion. So first of all, we will apply the stone to the podium. As we already know, we have to go to materials, select the default material first of all, then create new one, use texture image. Here we will use this 1 st open. We can change the name stone. Then the material is already created, is here, and we can see the paint bucket charged with that texture, then I would apply it on my podium. Podium is a group. So if I click outside the group or their surfaces inside the group will be painted with this texture. Let's do it, one-click, and here we are. The problem is that the texture is very, very small. So I will go to the Edit panel here. Let's write e.g. 4 m. It's okay. We can take here with some photos how this texture is in terms of size. Let's make it bigger, 6.2. And here we are. Now the same process with this wall. One-click from outside. We can see that here we have this lines of the texture which doesn't fit exactly with the height of the wall. So we can go to edit. And right, 6.3 or six, or 6.4, even better. Now one-click to this wall. Here we are. Let's go with the swimming pools. First thing that we can take is that the bottom of the swimming pool has these stone texture and we need to change it. We need to put our gravel texture, which we already have it. So again, the fault material, create new material, use texture image. Here we have this stone pool open. We can call it gravel. And now Spacebar. I go into the group letter B and I click on this surface, the bottom of the swimming pool, one-click. And here we are. We go to the Edit panel and we change the size, e.g. 2 m. Maybe this is too big, let's say 0.7. Okay? It seems okay. The same process here, one-click because I'm already inside of the group. And we are finished with this. Let's go the water space bar and I click out. They think about the water is that we don't have the surface to apply that water. We have to draw with first. So in order to be organized, I will draw it again inside the podium groups. So two clicks, I go inside. And now you can see that here what we have is a rectangle with a hole. So if I select the Line tool and draw just one line, e.g. on this edge. I will close this surface. Then now I can go to materials, select water, I look for water. Here we are. We can select this water pool light, one click on this surface. We are almost done, but just almost because this water is placed as the same height as this floor. So in case and we want to put this surface below, we sorted select the Surface, Go to move and then look, because here we will find a situation. If I select this first point of the movement, and then I try, as I told you, to place these surface below because of the glue concepts, everything is moving at the same time. And we're distorting our swimming pool on our model. But we have learned how to resolve this. It is just doing are copied five press control. This copy is completely released, the original and it can be placed wherever I want. So I zoom in, I can constrain the set X and write 0.10 m. Here we are now Space bar and I have to click on the original surface in order to erase it. Let's repeat the process with this, another swimming pool. We have a whole line. We close this surface, letter B, I apply this water texture here and then move first point. But I don't want to move it because then I distort all of the geometry because of the glue concept. So I click Control and I make a copy. I constrain the set X and I write 0.10 m. Now Space bar, and I click on the original surface, which is at the same height as the floor, and I just delete it. Here we are. We are almost done. I can click outside the group. And before finishing this class, Let's go to tags. I will unhide the roofs and let's apply some colors on the top of the roofs, then materials again. Let's go to colors. White. I click outside the group. Then gray. I go into this group, letter B, and then apply this gray on the top of this roof outside. Inside. And I repeat exactly the same here. We're, now I can go again to tax and hide this layer. Well, let's put the end of the class here. I hope you have learned a lot about materials and I see you in the next class. We will finish draw with these other restaurants which are placed here. Here we have a bunch and we will finish as well. The toilets. 63. Wharehouse: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see a new tool call warehouse. This warehouse is a library that we can find if we hit this button, 3D Warehouse from the main toolbar, or we can go over Window 3D Warehouse. Let's do it this way. And this will be your welcome page. Maybe Trimble will ask you to log in with your account. This is a very easy process. Anyways, in this welcome page, we'll find some different models and different brands which can be used in order to get very sophisticated products and so on. So it is good if you check all the chances that you have around here in this welcome page. Anyways, normally, when we use the 3D warehouse, it is because we want to download a specific model. You have to understand that this library is huge. Many people from all over the wall are uploading their projects and what is even better lately, many enterprises are doing exactly the same width products from the real world. So let's see what is the best workflow in order to use these amazing warehouse. Let's type in here e.g. table, generic table. The result of our shirt is this one. We have many different models that we can download easily. But let's analyze this window because here, there are many options that it is convenient for you to know. If we look at the left side, we find here different categories. We can filter our shirts by animals, architecture, etc, etc. You might know e.g. that instead of table, we type in here car, then we have here many cars, but not all of the models will be cars. So now it is the moment for using this filter. I can filter and say transportation and Sub-Category, Let's say automobiles then all the models now yes, will be cars. Then we have these properties, the file size and number of polygons. And then if I hit advance, we can say if we want our models to be live components, dynamic components, geo-located, and we can filter the title and the author. If I focus now on this tax, you have to take in mind that your first search is gonna be filtered by this tag products. These products means, if we read this information, button, models are real-world products from verified Companies can be found here under the products. So as I told you, under this tag, will find products from the real-world. But sometimes we don't want this kind of, let's say, more sophisticated products, but we want a more generic model. Then we have to hit models and our shirts normally will be bigger. These models uploaded by the SketchUp community, people like you and me, then we have collections and catalogs. These both tags are more or less the same and they are used mainly by companies or individual designers. They can be super, super useful. Imagine e.g. that I type in a touchy this brand about furnitures. Don't forget here to change the category instead of transportation or categories. And then I could go over collections or catalogs. Then I could hit even the name of the enterprise or the designer. Click, I will say that this enterprise has 12th connections, coffee tables, sofa, bed, lamps, beds, 66 a lot so fast. So it could be a very nice way for having access to a high level models in SketchUp, if you like e.g. this profile, we can say here like in case that we want to download e.g. one bed from here, I can go in if I hit on this window beds, I find here 66 models. And if I hit in one of them, e.g. this first one, again, I can like it. I can add it to favorites or I can add it to a folder. But first, I have to create it. Anyways, these options are important but not the most important. Looked at here we have some information, 65 lights for k downloads and six K views. This piece of information will be paramount in order to rank this model in our search. Anyways, the most important options, in my opinion, are these ones, materials to polygons, 6,517. File size super-important, 2 mb, and the last date in where this model was modified, this is not very important. Anyways, the file size is super important because you have to take into account that in SketchUp, we don't have endless space in terms of geometry. So we have to be cautious when we download something from this library. My advice here is that it is nice if you imagine your SketchUp file like a human being in terms of the weight, if a human being is more than 100 kilos, that human being is going to be heavy, right? Too much heavy, the same in SketchUp, but instead of kilos, Let's say megabytes. So the maximum, I could say that it is 100. Of course you can handle 150, but then everything is going to start working slow like a turtle. So when you download a file, be careful because if your file, your bed or whatever is, let's say 50 mb is going to be two mass, 2 mb is okay. We can hit download and then this window will pop up, load these directly into the rest gets that model, we can say yes and we can say no here. Another advice, theoretically, It's better to say no. Why? Because we don't know if that SketchUp file is gonna be a mess, is going to have an error, is going to come with many more geometry than the one we are looking at the thumbnail. This library is amazing, but sometimes the models are super messy. Sometimes not, but sometimes, yes. So here I recommend you to say no. But then after checking few times offline, I have to say that this version in SketchUp is making a mistake because I say no. And it is the same as I say yes. What it has to happen is that SketchUp is going to ask you, where do you want to save that file independently? And then you will be able to open that file whenever you want. Check that everything is right. And in case that you want just one part of the fight, imagine the bed or the car or whatever. You can select it and copy to your original file. Sorry, because I can show you that process because my SketchUp is not doing that process correctly. And I say no, but the bed is coming to my file, so I will place it. And what I can do here, and I recommend you to do it always is go Over the outliner here, check how this model is made. Look that we can check here that we have one component with more things inside. I will expand this arrow. We have many groups, one of them with more things. Another group. We can select each group from here, from the outliner and check in our Canvas the selected group. So then we would be able to make modifications much more easier in case if we want to modify the material, the color, even the geometry, that is very normal when we download something from the warehouse, Let's do another example. We'll go over Window 3D Warehouse, and here I will type it in car. Okay, we have these products. Maybe we prefer to use the top models. And imagine that I like this model. The file size is 20 mb, but we have not just one car but three. So download, I will say no, but as I told you, these two is not working correctly. Anyways, I will say no. But as you can see, the model is coming into my file. I place it and then I have these three cars. I have the outliner open one component inside, three components more. If I open this component, another component inside, another component inside another component inside, look, this is what I wanted to show you. This could be really, really messy, right? So you have to use the outliner in order to understand the drawing. Because if not, if you don't use it, imagine that you are not using it and you start just clicking and clicking on the model inside. You will never get the surfaces in case that you want to modify something like the color or materials geometry as I told you. So escape. But my point here is to show you another important tool when you download something from this library. A very good habit is going over window model info here, go over statistics, will find here all of the statistics about this model, the one we have just downloaded. And then it's a very good habit to say birds and used because sometimes the file could be messy and maybe there are a lot of components which are not being used in the model. And they are just occupy in space. So let's birds and use, Let's fix problems, okay? And then after doing this is the correct moment for taking whatever you want from this file and bring it your original file. Let's say that e.g. here, the only car that you are really interested in is the white one, right? So we can explode this first component. Let's open the outliner. We have the three cars selected, these three components, but we want just the white one called adduct. Then I should go over edit copy and then go over my original file. My original file for this example was this one with the bed. Once here, just go over edit, paste and then we have here our white car, and we are occupying the least space possible. Coming back to our 3D Warehouse, if we look at the right side now, we see this dark goal, relevance. If I hit it, then we have more options like popularity, likes author, title, date, modified, date, added. These are filters for our search. To be honest, I think that relevance is not the best one. I would recommend you to use popularity. One-click and then our cars, our rank because of their popularity. What popularity means? Well, if I hit this first model and I see this piece of information, we see that it has 106 lights and 856 case downloads. This is the number important for popularity downloads, the one with more downloads. It is the first in popularity. Of course, one mother who has been downloaded a lot means that the model is good. If I go to the second one, we can see that it has 404 k is downloads and 66 legs. The third one, it has 378. K is downloads. 37 likes. You can order as well your search by lights. And then of course, if I hit the first one is gonna be the one with more lights here. Eventually, if I hit on my profile, one-click and then I have three oxygen, my public page, my content and 3D Warehouse settings. If I go over my public page here, you will have the models that you have uploaded, the collections that you have uploaded, the ones that you have created. The model is that you like or the collections that you like. This profile is done for the course, so I have none. And if I go over now my content, I will find something similar, but with some more options. Finally, 3D Warehouse settings will allow you to introduce some modifications in your account for this warehouse library as your display name, something about you, your social media, and you will be able to modify some preferences from here. So this is all about the 3D warehouse. I really encourage you to use it and I hope to see you in the next episode. 64. Terrains. Sandboox tool: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see another tool called terranes. Actually the real name SketchUp is sandbox. You should go over this upper bar, right button. Here, you will find sandbox. So first of all, we have here two tools. One is called from contours, and it says create a sandbox from contours, and the other one from scratch, create a sandbox from scratch. With these two tools, we will create the terrain with the others. We will modify that terrain. Let us start with the first one from contours. This means that we need to have some contours already. I will click it and this window pops up. You must first select the contours you wish to use to create a sandbox before using this tool. So we need some contours here. Let's go over File Import. I want you to go to your attached files once here, pay attention because we don't want to import an image this time. So here we have to go over this window, all supported image types. We don't want this now, one-click and let's say AutoCad files. One-click. Here, it will appear this file, cat, sandbox, One-click. Let's go over opsins because we will have to adjust the scale. So I move over here, this last option, and I will say meters accept, and finally inputs. Here we have some data about these Import File Close, and here we have our terms. First of all, let's check how this AutoCad file has come here in SketchUp. If I click it, we can see that we have our box or a component. So let's go over the outliner and we can see that we have a component actually inside. There is nothing. Now, let's go over these ducks stray one-click. And then we can see that we have one, that this one will be a strange name. If I hide it, everything disappears. So all the geometry is here. And once we have understood the file that we have just imported, it is high time to work on it, because here what we have is just edges. If I go inside this component, click, click, I can select these edges and they are just, as I told you, SketchUp edges altogether. The thing here is that they are not all in the same level, they have different elevations. We can appreciate this better if I go over camera parallel projection and then I hit e.g. right, you can see that all these edges are not at the same level. This is important in case that you want to generate a terrain. Anyways, let's come back over perspective. And then in order to use this first tool called from contours, what we need to do is to go inside this component box and then select all the edges. I am already inside the box. So Control a and I select everything inside. Then I hit these first two from contours. One-click, it takes some time. And finally, SketchUp has generated are real new phase. This phase, let's say, or these phases are joining the different terms in order to eventually create a terrain. The thing is that now, besides that new terrain, we have still the alto cut edges. If I hide this stack, then we can see just the new terrain which is placed in my untapped duck. I could click out from this box, from this component and I can check this new terrain. The second way for creating rain is the second tool called from scratch. Here, we don't need to have some concerns before we start using this sandbox tool, will need just to hit the tool from scratch. One-click, then have a look at the measure bar and we can read grid spacing and we have this measure 3 m. Then we have this pencil active one-click and I move along the red axis. We can read now the length second click, and then I am moving along the perpendicular axis. Again, we can read the length because actually we are creating agreed, another click. Our rate is done. This grid spacing is 3 m, but we can change that if I go back control set just when I hit the tool, when I can still read grid spacing, I can say e.g. ten. Enter, click, I move along the red axis again, but the grid spacing now is ten instead of three. Second click, then I move along the orthogonal axis, another click, and I have my new grid here. I recommend you to don't become crazy with these rates. I mean, don't make endless grids super big because then your SketchUp will look because it will be too much information. Anyways, let's work with this grid. So once it is already drawn, if I select it, we can see that actually it is a group. So let's go in to click, click, click. And then let's use this first to call smooth, which will allow us to modify this terrain one-click and then we can read on the measure or bar, radius 10 m. And if I hover over the grid, we can see this cycle in red color. So we can change that radius easily, just typing in e.g. 50 Enter. Then this cycle is much more bigger. And when I click and release and I move my mouse up, down, you can see how this cycle is grabbing all the vertices from the grid, of course, the vertices inside that cycle. So we can modify this sandbox this way and create a kind of mountain or even a whole, a valley, something like that. Let's create here a mountain. So second click when I am happy, then I can still change the radius. Let's say ten Enter. I can still modify this mountain. One-click, I have the *** to grab one vertice here. So be careful with that. Let's make the radius bigger. 30. Here we are, and that's all you can say. It is easy to use this tool. So let's move to the next one. The next one is called stamp. In order to explain this tool, I will go first of all out of the group and I will draw a kind of concrete slab, 1-click the size. Let's say it will be ten semicolon, ten, push-pull tool, one-click 0.3 m. I select my slab. I will make a group perfect, and then I will move this concrete slab inside my terrain. I can constrain the axis, one-click, another click. I can change my camera view, let's say parallel projection, top view. From here, I can place my slab much more easier in the correct position. Here. It seems that it is placed in the middle of the whole I don't like it. So let's say more or less here. Okay, let's imagine that it is the place in where we will construct something else, a house or whatever. Once we have fixed the correct place, actually we can elevate this slab. It doesn't have to be in a specific point along the set axis. Because now what we're gonna do is first of all select the slab, then click own stamp. As you can see, a red offset line will appear and that distance right now is 1 m. But we can change that distance. That offset, Let's say e.g. five Enter, nothing changes. But if we select again the group and we hit again stump, now the offset is 5 m. Once we're happy with the offset, we select our group. So Spacebar select again stamp. We are happy with the offset and then now we have to heat on the sandbox one-click and the tool is now working. As you can see, we are creating modifications on the terrain in order to adjust that offset with our slab in a very realistic way. Now I am moving my mouse up and down in order to set where we want to place that slab, let's say here and we are done. Space key, one-click outside. This slab could be erased, and now we could continue drawing on this space, our house or whatever. Let's move to the next tool called drape. We use this tool, we will be able to modify our terrain, but not in terms of the geometry, like it happens with the stamp tool. This tool, let's say that would allow us to draw on our terrain, e.g. imagine that we want to draw one path, that path, let's say that it is natural. It is not like a road. It is not modifying the terrain. We want that path to be gas going along the terrain in a very natural way, then we can start drawing a rectangle. One-click here, another click here. Select that new rectangle. I select the face letter M, one click, I moved, then that rectangle along the blue axis. Once here, I can use the X-ray camera, parallel projection, and top view. Then I can draw my path from an orthogonal point of view. In order to draw the path, I will use the Arc tool. So one trick here, sites, let's say 24, the Davao. And then be careful here because if we are using the x-ray for a SketchUp, this phase is not there, and when I draw, it will take the references from below, from the terrain. That is not what I want. So I will turn off x-ray and I would draw my path. Let's say that one-click, second click, another arc, tangent to the previous one, click, click, I continue drawing this curve. Let's do it finally like that, perfect. Then I will use the offset tool. One click, second click the offset or distance that say 5 m. Nice eraser. I will delete the left overs and then I need to close this path in order to get a new area here just for the path. So before selecting anything, move tool, and I'll go directly to this end point, one-click, then I can move it along the rest of the EDS. And I do the same with this, another end point. It will not be perfect. If I don't like the result here, I will press Escape and I can use the line tool is okay. Now I achieved to get this area. This was my goal from the beginning. I can erase the rest of the things I will orbit, delayed the leftovers. I will select my path three clicks, right bottom, make group. Once I have my group, I'm happy with its position. So again, top view, it seems that the position is good enough. We don't have to be very accurate here. Then let's use this drape tool. The path is already selected. One click on drape, and then we have to heat the sandbox one-click. And here we are. That path has been projected along the orthogonal axis to my terrain. Now I can delete. The path is not useful anymore, and we have that path drawn on my terrain camera perspective. And then we can use this path in order to change e.g. the material. So I told you we haven't modified the geometry, but maybe we want here to use another material because this is a road, this is a path, this is a river, whatever. So let's go over materials. Let's choose e.g. landscaping, fencing and vegetation, and I hit e.g. these gravel, then I need to go inside this component. And as you can check here, we have different phases. So letter B, paint bucket and I'll use my gravel as the material for this path step-by-step till here, then I'll jump here. So we are done. Time to move now to the next to add detail, this one and the next one. Let's say that they are kind of twins, flip heads. And thanks to these both tools, we will be able to make small, tiny modifications on the terrain to understand better how these both tools work. I will go over view Heav'n geometry. Then we will understand better how a SketchUp is generating the terrain. Because we can think that we are working all the time here with rectangles, many rectangles next to each other, generating these different elevations of the phases joined altogether to finally get these sandbox where this is not correct because here in SketchUp, as in many other softwares, and I mean 3D softwares, all the models are created by using triangles. Rectangles here is exactly the same. So when we activate the hidden geometry, we can see those triangles, right? It happens exactly the same if I move over this first terrain created from concerns, as you can see here, everything made of triangles. So if I hit this first to call add detail, one-click and first, sorry, I have to go inside this component so I can select any ads. Then I hit the tool, add detail. I hover over my terrain. And then a SketchUp is asking us for a point. Imagine that I hit this midpoint, one-click, then another Ed's appears and I can modify derivation of this new point. The result is that I am making a modification on the terrain. Actually are little, tiny modification, but a modification. Let's do it again here, one point here, then SketchUp creates more triangles around that point. And I can set the height of that new point. To be honest, in my work experience, this tool is difficult to use because it creates this kind of too much sharp or triangular geometric filling in our terrain. But anyways, it's good that you know, that it exists. This another tool, flip heads, one click. It will allow us to flip the edges, the selected edges, e.g. this diagonal one-click and the diagonal goes the other way. Thanks to this flip, sometimes the geometry will suffer modifications. Not always, but sometimes, yes, e.g. here or here. As you can see, the mountain is not the same, but again, it's difficult to control any ways. Sometimes the result can be good. So once that you have a complete overview about these sandbox in SketchUp, we will finish this episode here. You have to know that there are several plugins in order to create terrains, a part of this sandbox, they are always not easy to use. I will show you some of them, at least one when we arrived to these plugins episodes. And in the next episode, anyways, we will see another native tool from SketchUp, like it is this geo-location. It is very powerful. It has to do a lot with this sandbox and it will allow us to import at arranged in a very realistic way from all over the wall. 65. Geo-location: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see the tool called geo-location. We can find this tool if we go over file geo-location, add location, we have another way for getting this tool. If we move over model info, clicking on here on this little cycle, one-click model info window. Then we go over geo-location at location one. Click on here. At location, this window will pop up and then we'll use this search bar in order to find the part of the wall that we are interested in. Here we can see Bali in Indonesia, where I am living right now. But imagine that we are interested in taking the terrain of the Acropolis in Athens. So we have just two right here, Acropolis. Search. Here we are. Then we have to select the area that we want to import into our model. So we hit Select radium, and then we have to move this rectangle accordingly with the area that we want to import. We have different options here like the peptides satellite or a street map that is not very important. Anyways, we can zoom in or zoom out. And then the radium that we are going to import is going to be bigger or smaller. I will select more or less this region and then we hit Import, will receive this message. This model is accurately, you're located country Greece, location, Athens, latitude and longitude. And we could clear the location, or even we could add more imagery, which means to add more pieces of terrains next to this one that we have just imported. Anyways, let's close it because we have our new terrain here. But as you can see, it seems that now we don't have a terrain, right? It is just a flat image. Let's go over the outliner. You can see that here we have two groups. Both of them are locked. One is called location snapshot, and the other one is called location terrain. If I move over tags, we can see this more clear. We have the tag called location, a snapshot and another tag called location terrain, which it comes hidden. Unhide this tag, then we can find our terrain. I hide now the location snapshot, which actually is just a flat image. Then we have here now just the terrain with that snapshot image, which comes in another tag as the current material, apply it on this terrain. So let's see that this tool is giving us the terrain and the photo, separate it, and that photo is actually the material, apply it on the terrain. So if I go over materials and I hit in model, I will find here this location is snapshot as a material. Once we have understood the things that we have just imported, we can start modifying it in case that we want. Let's do a little exercise in order to practice the skills that we learned in the previous episode. So now I want you to use an attached file called Parthenon. This is a Greek temple very famous, which is placed here on the top of the Acropolis. So we'll need to open that file independently. And once that it is already open, I will select it. I will go over edit copy. I'll go back over my original file, edit, paste. Here we have our Greek temple, right? I can check that this Greek temple is not inside a group. So first of all, I will make a group here. And then I will place these Greek temple, this Parthenon on here. But we can check that this string is not completely flat. So we'll need to use the tool called stamp. But for a better workflow, I will hide the location terrain and I will unhide the location snapshot because you will see that it will be easier this way. So first of all, I will model the concrete slab inward. Later, we will place the Greek temple, so rectangle, I will create a rectangle from here to here. Once my rectangle is done, I will select it. It is not glue with my temple because my temple is a group. So here I have my rectangle push-pull tool, let's say 0.1. I will select this model right button, make group. Once I have it, Let's place it on the correct spot. I will take it from here, from this corner, zoom out. Let's move to this part of the Acropolis camera, parallel projection, top view, zoom out. First, click on here. I will rotate this element first click, second click More or less here. It seems that maybe this rectangle is two big scale. I would take this corner. I would do it till here. More or less. Nice. Once I have it, I can orbit. I can move it along the blue axis. Let's go over ducks. I will hide location, a snapshot. I will unhide the location terrain. I will select my location terrain right button and look that box in the red color means that we have our group completely locked. Unlock. Now I can work on it. We selected a stamp tool. We have to set the offset. Now, let's say 5 m enter. We deselect our concrete slab, then we'll repeat the same process stamp. Now we have those 5 m as an offset. We could say even more, let's say ten. So we select it again. Stamp ten, Enter, select outside, and we repeat the same process. Stamp here, 10 m. Then we hit the Sandbox, one click. We all wait for having a better view when we are happy with the high of our platform. Second Click Here we are. We can delay the concrete slab and now it is time for placing our Greek temple in the correct spot. So we have to move it from one corner, let's say deal here, okay, then we need our rotation. Let's place this corner in a more accurate spot. Here. Rotation, one-click, blue color. Second click on Insert, click here we are. Now we just need to scale a little bit. This temple, it is too big. So this corner, and let's say tail here, little bit bigger. Here. We have our temple perfectly placed on the Acropolis. I encourage you to do this exercise because it will clarify a lot how to use these new tools. And I hope to see you in the next episode. 66. Photomatch: Hello people and welcome to this new class where we're going to see another tool called photo mat. This is a very special tool, I have to say mainly because it is completely different to the rest of the tools here. And this gets, in order to use it, we should go over File Import here. I want you to go to your attached files. Be sure that here the option selected is all supported image types, because now we are going to use an image again, but here we will not click, Use image as image, not as texture, neither, but new matched photo. So we mark this third option. We select this image called photo mat. We're angry here. Important. Then if I zoom out a little bit, we'll find the photo in front of us with all of these lines in different colors. Some axes, kind of messy interface. So we'll have to sort out all of these things in order to understand how to use this tool, which actually is kind of powerful, you will see. So firstly, I want you to focus on the right side, because here in our default tray, a new tray is already expanded. This new tray is called maths photo or photo match. We will have to learn how to use all of these options at the same time. Here we have a new tab called photo months. Anyways, if we focused on our Canvas, you will see that we have this yellow line. This line is going to work like the horizontal. You have to think that now we are going to work with some theoretical aspects related with the perspective. I mean the clinic perspective in where we have the horizontal line, this is the line aligned with our eyes. Then we have two points, then we have two vanishing point of this perspective. One is this one, and all the red lines are going directly to this vanishing point. And then we have this another one, and all the green lines are going to this another vanishing point. Then we can find a third element, which is paramount here. This element is the general axis with the origin here. So we can move this region and the axis as well altogether and place it in the most convenient point for us. Now, you don't know what is the most convenient point, but I know it. So I will zoom in and I will place this region right here. As you can see, this blue axis is aligned with this edge of the building and the region is exactly at the level of the ground. You will understand later why this is a very good position. Anyways, once I have placed the axis, I have more elements which needs to be adjusted. We have this discontinuous lines in red color and this continuous lines in green color. The thing here is to take one of these lines and align the line with one of the heads of the photographic, but not any Ed's one, which is going, the projection of that is going to this vanishing point. So e.g. this one could be fine, right? So I'm assuming I can click and drag, place my discontinuous red line there. This point is correct, but this one is not. So I can take this end point, click and drag and move it till it is placed in the correct position. I will do the same with this, another discontinuous red line. E.g. I. Can do it with this another line of the swimming pool right click and drag and I released when my red is continuous line is completely aligned with the head of the photo. Now I have to repeat this same process with the discontinuous green lines, click and drag. I will place this first point correctly here, zoom out, and then I will click and drag this end point here. Now, let's repeat the same with this second green line. I will use again swimming pool, but you can use another line of the photo which goes to that bunny seen green point. Here we are. Now, everything makes a little bit more sense, right soon, you will understand why we are doing all of this. What is the purpose of this tool? Now, it comes the most tricky part, in my opinion, because our axis and our vanishing points are correctly placed accordingly with this photo, but not the scale. Now we have to focus on the scale. Look that we have point lines, vertical lines. Vanishing lines, which goes to the vanishing points. And all of them are making two different grids. One grid here and another grid here. Those grids are made of rectangles, right? So the measure of those rectangles, the distance between e.g. this dotted red line. And the next one is going to be our references for the scale. That is one of the keys. If I go now over this much photo tray, you can read grid on or out. Then you have here different styles for that grid inside when we are using this tool inside a room, outside, like in this example. Now the name here is above an outside, which will be used when we are trying to replicate a photo like panorama photo in where we can see things from a very high point of view. The first two are the ones that we will normally use. Then we have here planes, red and green. We have red and blue for displaying green and blue for this another plane, you're going to have to pay so much attention here. The most important part is coming here, spacing 1.52 m, that is the spacing of the grid. It means that the distance between the lines of the grid are always 1.52 m. So these are not rectangles but squares. If the spacing is 1.52 m means that e.g. from this red line here on the ground till the next one. This one, we have 1.52 m right now, and this is sensitive. It is too short to be real. We have here a wall of a building with some doors, the main entrance, and then even more high ceiling. So 1.52 is not real, it's not correct. So it means that we have to change the scale, right? Okay. So here my advice is to find something in the photo as a reference. Something that, you know, the real, the real measurement, e.g. adore. This entrance could be used as a reference because we know that the height of this door should be 2.1. This is the normal high for an entrance. So we can typing here 2.1 m Enter. Now we can check how the read is bigger, and then the next step is hover over any axis. I will use the blue axis, click and drag, and then I will adjust that grid to my reference. Here we are. We have this red dotted line and the next one, I want that line to be exactly on the top of the entrance here, because I know that this measure is 2.10 meter, then I can zoom out and I know that my model is now in the correct scale. We don't have to touch anything else at this moment. We can even click here. Don't. All of these auxiliary lines, because they were, auxiliary lines have disappeared, right? If I zoom out, I can see the photo and the axis. But look what happened when I obey, everything disappears, right? This is normal. So if I want again to come back to my, let's say photomask view. I just have to click on here for the mass one-click. And then again, the photo is in front of me with the axis placed accordingly to that foot out. I don't orbit because I don't want to lose this point view. And then it is the correct moment for a starting drawing. Because our goal here is to model this building, the building of the photo in the correct scale without having any measure. This is the power of this tool. Just with one photon. We can model that space or that building using this tool. This is something powerful if you think about it normally, in order to model something, we need to have measures. We need to go to that place, measure things. This is true using a tape, whatever the height of the building, this is 3 m, 2 m, 0.5, draw a plant floor, draw some elevations, and then we can model in 3D that building with this tool. You can do it just with one photo, although not all the photos are correct for using this tool, you will see a photo like that with very two distinguished vanishing points. If you don't have a photo like that with this chronic perspective perfectly marked, then this tool is not going to work. But anyways, let's start drawing. So once I have set all the adjustments is a matter of using my normal SketchUp tools. I will start using the rectangle and I will draw this wall because my purpose here is to draw this q. So one-click here, then I move. If I want to change the plane, because this is not the plane that I wanted to draw. I can use the arrows of my laptop. Then I have changed it. And I can move over this and say more or less here. If I want to do some adjustment, I can select this line and I can move it as usual. Then I can select this face push-pull tool, one click and release. And I pose that phase till the end of the queue accordingly to the photo, one-click here, then I will orbit and look what I have just drawn this cube in 3D. So for drawing using this tool, we should go to the normal mode here. Now SketchUp this one, and then go back to the photo maths mode in order to continue drawing. This is the process, go and go back, go and go back. Because we will have to check many times if we are drawing correctly, mainly at the beginning when you don't have still the knowledge about this tool. So once we have drawn this cube, Let's go with this second one. I have here an intersection point, right? So this could be a very useful reference for drawing this, another Q line tool. This time, I'll go here to this intersection point, one-click. Then I draw a line along the blue axis, still here, zoom out, then I check that I am drawing this line along the red axis, okay, till this vertice, another click, then I can go up till this point. Perfect. And then look because here I will orbit because sometimes it is better to continue drawing in this sketch abnormal mode in order to draw this phase. For me, it is easy. If I do it here like this way, right? Then I have the face. I can even reverse faces. I can go back again to photomask, zoom out, push-pull tool, one-click where these ads, if I orbit, I can exactly post that phase till the end of this, another cube. Again for the mats zoom out. Here we are. Let's draw now these two PRs. In order to do this, I will use an auxiliary guy. One-click here, another guideline here, another one here on the ground, I will orbit. Everything seems to be correct. Nothing is floating or out of its place. Then I go back again to Format Line Tool. I will select this point, starting point. I will constrain this line to the blue axis. I will stop that line here using this reference, the limit, perfect. Then I can draw this line and this another line. And I have my new surface. Once here I can hit Post poll tool one click on this face, and then I adjust to the limit marked on the foot here once I have one pillar, and this is the result. When I check it in my 3D model, I could repeat this same pillar in this another place, right? I don't have to follow the photo again because it is a slower process. So I will select it with one box from left to right, letter M. Control key for doing a copy. Here we are. Photo mats. Again, I have my pillars, I have my two cubes. Let's go with e.g. these secondary entrance line tool. One. Click here and look because when I'm clicking on here on the floating, Let's say floating in space. I am not totally sure that I am clicking on the correct spot in order to be sure it is good. If I support ourselves with the guidelines guideline, one click here, then I have this guideline here, which I am sure that it is placed on this plane. Then I can draw another guideline. Using this. Another line, I move along the blue axis field here. And then I am totally assured that if I draw a rectangle from here to here, it is placed correctly. But let's check it. We are weight and we can check that it is drawn correctly on this cube. And then I can use now the postpone to easily what is the depth for this entrance for tomato postpone tool? One click. Here we have the reference. Perfect. So this is the process photo mats again, let's draw now the swimming pool, e.g. again. We'll support myself with the guidelines. One-click here, I have to take one parallel here. This one could be, okay, then Line Tool, click here, click here, then along the green axis, still here, Perfect. Then along the red axis where we don't know because the photo is cut. So I could use here a guideline again, another guideline here, and another guideline here. So now if I orbit, I have just to follow the guidelines in order to finance my swimming pool. Here. Here. We finished here. I already have my face, my area, perfectly drawn photo mats again, because I need the depth postponed tool, one click and I pose to where I can't appreciate it. So let's say X-ray till here. Turn off X-ray. We orbit. Nice. We can erase this cover. We have here, the swimming pool. Let's continue with this building. We have this wood floor. This is gonna be easy to draw. One click here on this corner. Then I can look the green axis by clicking the left arrow. I take this reference and I close this line till here, then another line from here to here. And I have this another tool in where I will have to apply a material, wood material in the future. If I need to reverse faces, I do it like here. Reverse phase as with the swimming pool, right? Reverse Faces. Okay. And I will have to do it with all of these sites of the swimming pool. So one-click, another click, another click. I'm using Shift key in order to add elements to my selection and then right button, reverse phase. So this is the process, as I told you. Now it's a matter of working on working again, putting more and more detail into our model and then apply materials. Get your scenes, get your images or whatever you want. The thing is that you have made a sophisticated model jealous without one measure and using just 1 ft, I encourage you to finish this model, finish this entrants. These different windows, make the different planes for the grass, this little path for parking the car. As far as you already know how to use their warehouse, you can download a car, you can download some plants, download some chairs for the swimming pool, and apply materials, water in the swimming pool, grass for the garden, glasses for the entrance, for the windows. There is a lot of work here ahead. So this will be your homework. You are, if you have been following the course. So time to say goodbye. And in the next episode, we will see another tool in SketchUp called dynamic components. 67. Dynamic components: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see the dynamic components. What you are watching right now on the screen is some dynamic components which have been taken from here from our components tray. So if I expand the tray and I make a search, pay attention because some of these components have this green stuff at the right down corner. And that sign now means that they are dynamic components. Those dynamic components, their own toolbar. I will take it from here, dynamic components one-click, it has three buttons. The first one will trigger the interaction behavior of that dynamic component. One click on here, and then when I hover over this track, e.g. you will see that the tool is ready to be trigger one click on here, and then the geometry is changing. We have different tracks, right? On the other hand, if I click on the calf, then the color is changing, right? So depending on the component, their behavior will be completely different. Let's take this bet one click on here, and then the size, the geometry is changing. If I click on the sofa, look at this forbidden icon appears, we can think then that this sofa is not a dynamic component, but it is not true. The thing is that in order to use it, we have to use the scale tool, this time. Scale tool, one click and then look that it is strange because we don't have all the typical graph points on the corners. On the midpoints, we have just this one. Let's see. And then look because when I click and release, the sofa is changing its geometry, not just the scale, right? This is because the element is dynamic. So sometimes we should use this trigger option and other times we'll have to use the scale tool. If I hover over this mailbox, then on this door, on this little door, I can click and then the door is open or close here. The same thing. If I hover now over this stirs, it happens the same as with the sofa. If I tried to click and trigger with, this option is not working at all. But if I select it, Scale tool and scale the element, then you can see how these terrorists is becoming wider, but the railing remains completely, still, is not changing. On the other hand, if I scale this theorists in this another dimension, look what is going on. So when you are using a dynamic component, first thing that we have to do is to shirts for all the options available. Let's check now this another two options. The first one says view and configure the attributes of dynamic components. So let's select this track. I click on this second option, and then here we have a panel inward. We can read clearly all the behaviors and options about this dynamic track. We have a kind of instructions in order to use it correctly. If we expand, this window, will see the different colors available. If I click this time on the stairs and I click on this second option, look that in this case, thanks to this menu, we can type in the measures that we want for these stairs. We can type in here the rise and the run, let's say 1 m and 1 m apply. Here we have the result. Finally, we have this third option. It says create and customize their behaviors and data of dynamic components. Thanks to this option, will be able to create our own dynamic components or change the behaviors of any of them. If I select e.g. the track and I click it, we find two windows, the info panel and the functions panel. In order to use the basics of this feature we will use here and a specific file. It is called door Barcelona Pavilion. It is attached with a course. So you will have to append selected Edit, Copy, go back to our file because we will work on this file. And then once here, Edit, Paste. Here we have our door, which actually it is a dynamic component. Once it is selected, if I use the trigger feature, you can see that the door has some movements. So we'll learn how to do this using simple geometry from schizo. First of all, I will rotate the door because I prefer to work with the door in this position. Again, trigger, it works. Okay, Then let's see with this second upsilon, one click. There is nothing here, there is no instructions. The reason is because once you are creating your dynamic component, you have the option about using this tool and create, hear those instructions. We will do it as well. If I go over this third option, then here we can see the info panel with some behaviors associated with our door. So it seems we are ready. Let's analyze now the geometry of the door. I will expand them, the outliner, I will select my object. It is a component. I can see that there is a component with two groups inside. One group is the gloves, the other group is the frame. Okay, so first of all, let's replicate this geometry. I mean, let's model a new door using the normal tools of a sketch. So I will measure the door. One-click, second click 1.17 and the height is 3.10. Easy rectangle, one-click. I will use the arrow key and the measure was 1.17, 3.10. Trick here we're, then I will measure the thickness. It is 0.05 m, 5 cm. So then offset to one click on the surface, and I will type in 0.05. Here we are again, time to measure. Let's see 0.05 again. So push-pull tool, I will use the frame 0.05. Here we are. Once here, I will erase this surface and I will create a group with the frame make group. Now I need another group for the glass, right? Tango key, x-ray midpoint here, midpoint here. Let's see. Here we are, we have the rectangle. Now, two clicks. Make group time for the materials. Letter B, I hold down. Alt key IS still this aluminium. One-click from outside on the frame. And the same with the glass. Here, we're good. Once we have our geometry already modeled, now is the correct moment for creating a component. Then, once the component is already done, we will add dynamic component properties. So first, we select these both groups and we click on the option to make a component, let's call it door Barcelona Pavilion. No description. Blue to non set component axis is very important, but we can change it later. Now. We can see that it is on the left down corner. So it's okay, more or less replaced them with component is already marked. So Create. Once we have our component created and it is already selected, then I'll click on this third option, create and customize the behaviors of our dynamic component. One click on here. Then we have to add some attributes. If I click on info, we can see here the name of our component, and here we have the upsilon add attributes. If I click on here, then this window pops up because we have different attributes available, we can change the position, the size, the rotation, and we have some behavior. The one we're looking for is this one onclick because we want our door to change when we click on it. So I select on click. And then we have this bar in order to describe what we want to happen when we click on the door, It's time for going through this, another window functions. I will click on it and I will expand this arrow here we have a lot of different functions. Thanks to these functions, we will create different behaviors, movements, and amazing things in our objects. The one we're looking for this time is called animate. This one animate. We want to create an animation. Then once it is already selected, we can read it on this bar and we have to click Insert. Then it is already inserted here in the previous menu. In the previous window, we have the component door, Barcelona Pavilion, the behavior onclick, and then this bar with this function. Inside this function, we have different options. One is called attribute, and then we have state one, state two, etc, etc. So we have to define this attribute and this states. If I go this time here at attribute one click, we can read the names of the different attributes. The one we're looking for right now is this one rod set. We want our rotation on the ground floor, so we have to type in exactly this world. Oh, the set and our unset in capital letters. We go back here, behaviours onclick, we insert again our function because it was deleted. Then here attribute with type in, set, our unset in capital letters, a state one. Now we are talking about that rotation and the degrees that we want to use. So we can say here zero and second estate that say 90, we erase the rest of the things. We can close this window, select the trigger Upsilon, and see how our door is working. It is working nicely, but the rotation is working on the opposite direction. So if we want to change that, we select again our door. We go over their behavior bar. We go inside this bar and we change here this state, instead of 90 -90 enter, we close the door, we use the trigger Upsilon and now is working exactly the same as our reference. Look that if I select these components now and I say right button change axis, then I can change the position of the axis. This window pops up. When I release position, I accept, I select my new position. And then when I trigger the movement, now the rotation takes as a pivot point, that new position of the axis. Look that here, if I select the reference and I say right button change axis, we can see that the position, the pie votes of the rotation is not on the corner. It is more at the right side here in our new model, right bottom change axis. Now it is more or less in the same position. Finally, if I select my door and I click this second option, we will say that it is empty, completely empty. So if we want to use this component options, we should go over this third option. Once here, go over the attributes bar and then will find this arrow called details. If I hit it, then we'll be able to expand this window and choose between these options. By default, it is selected. Users cannot see these attributes. But imagine that we mark this second option. Users can see this attribute one-click. Then we can change the display level, and then in this third bar, Find the unit. In this case we have just degrees, we can say Apply. And then if I close this window and I go over this second option, then we find a new bar. But pay attention because here, if I try to type in a new measure, I can't. So let's go back over the component attributes. Once here, let's click again on details. And instead of just users can see these attributes. Let's select users can edit as a text box, apply again, we'll go over this second option. And then if I try to type in and you measure this time 45 and I apply, we can see how our door is open now using these 45 degrees rotation, Right-click -90 apply, then I have this new rotation on my door. Finally, if I click again over this third option, I click again over details, and this time I select this last option, users can select from a list. Then I can add options for that list. I could type in e.g. open enter a value, let's say -90, I add another option called close enter value zero. I applied, I close this window, I go over this component option and then I find here Alice open and close, open. Remember that it is associated with -90. And if I select Close and I apply, the door is closed because that level is linked with zero degrees. So this is the way for using these component options. Now, I will close it and this door will be used in the future when we will be working in our Barcelona Pavilion for the main entrance. Well, time to say goodbye. I hope that you liked the class and I'll see you in the next episode. 68. Animations: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we are going to see how to make animations in SketchUp. We will use this model about the pyramids in Egypt in where actually I am working right now for history channel in YouTube. So you can see the model is already very elaborate. It, it has a lot of work and now it is ready for, let's say, make the best of it. If you know nothing about these pyramids, I will tell you a little bit. This is the main pyramid. It is called the Khufu pyramid. It is the tallest. And then we have a girlfriend pyramid and this one, man corral pyramids. The three of them are the tombs of those funds. And the rest of these constructions mainly are more tombs, smaller, but tombs as well. So this Giza Plateau, actually it is a super big cemetery. It's pyramid has two temples. This is the Pyramid Temple, and then we have the valley temple. The both of them are joined by these corridor. So in the old times, Egyptians used to bring here the forearm using a boat. They used to prepare the body for going to the paradise, the deep sand paradise, of course. And then in a kind of ceremony, they bring the body along this corridor to this next Temple in where there is no much information about what they were supposed to do here, let's imagine another final ceremony. And finally, the body was hidden inside the pyramid. Well, this history not important. We are in a SketchUp class, but I think it could be interesting as well for you. Because when you want to do an animation, it is important to have a story to tell with that animation, and that is exactly what we're gonna do. So we will do an animation in where we will pretend to arrive to this Giza Plateau by boat. We will enter this valley temple. Then we will put the camera up in order to have a better view about all the pyramids. And finally, we'll move the camera till here more or less to have a general view about the three pyramids altogether. Once we have our mind clearer about how we want to tell our story, let's see how to do it in a sketch. Animations in SketchUp are based on the scenes, will create some scenes and we'll make the camera move from one scene to the next one. And in that path, SketchUp will generate a kind of video. So let's go to our first spot. Let's say more or less here. Look that I am using the i. Maybe here could be okay. We'll go over a since at a scene here we have a warning about the style. So let's say that we want to save as a new style, create a sin. Now let's move to our next spot. Let's say here, just in front of the main entrance, I will pan a little bit. I can use this tool called position camera. One click on here. We can move a little bit back, maybe here again, palm. And when we're happy, we click on Add a sin, the second one. Here we are. Let's use now the work tool because we don't have to lose our eye height. So I move the camera forward and when I arrive to the middle of this code here, I can use the eye to have a better look. And again, add sin. Now we said that we wanted the camera to move upwards. So this time I will orbit, I will zoom out. I would use the eye and I will look at the pyramids. This could be a very nice view at a scene. Again, we have forest since already under final one we are with again, we use the eye. Here we have this panoramic view. We can zoom out a little bit more. We can see the three pyramids. We can see even from here, the famous sphinx here. So at the scene again, once we have, let's say, record all of our sins. And we can say that they are like row, since maybe we'll have to make some modifications later. Let's create our first animation. I move over view animation. Here we can add a scene, update the scene, the latest thing, mainly the same things that we can do here from our scene tray. But then we have two options that we don't have their play and settings. If I click on play, the animation will start a scene one, the camera goes to the same two, then stop and we go to the C Number three. Then a C Number four, stop again and a sin number five, and then it starts again to SN1 in an endless loop. So I will stop and I'll go now again over view animation. But this time I will click on Settings. Then this window pops up. And actually it is a window that we already know. It is the model info windows. So we can arrive here just by clicking on here model info or going over window model info on the first option is called animation. We have two categories, a scene transitions and delay. Thanks to the first one, we can set the time transition from one scene to the next one. Of course, this option should be turned on enable a scene transitions if we want to record that path from one scene to the next one. And then here we have that time 2 s. If we want to move the camera faster, then this time should be shorter, right? Instead of 21, e.g. and if we want the camera to move slower than we need to adjust the time here and increase the time of day transitions. Let's say e.g. 4, s, the double. Then we have this another category called a delay. When the camera arrives to the next scene, that delay could be one-second, zero or 5 s. We can adjust that delay here according to my preferences. I could say that here the best obscene is zero in order to make the movement of the camera more fluid. Once we're happy with these settings, we can close this window. And let's go overview again. And he may seem play as sin one. We can see that the camera moves now a slower sin2. We don't stop on the scene to scene three. Then we move again. The camera goes slower. And then the final sin, sin number five. And we start again. If you find some error or something that you want to adjust even better, we can do it easily. I will click on stop first of all, then I will go over a scene number two here to make the movement better. I will pan a little bit to the right side and I will update this update then a century. You can see that we are going through the pillars. That is not very realistic. So here again, I will move the camera to the right side. I will update this scene. Then I'll move to a scene number two. And from here, I move to a scene number three. Now is much more better. We are not going through the pillars and everything seems correct enough. Time for exporting our animation, we should go over File Export Animation. Once here, select your route. If I expand this window, you can select the file that you want to export for. It's okay for a video. And I recommend you to hit this button called options. Here we'll find this export options which are very interesting. The resolution which can be HD, full HD. This is up to you, not less than HD, Let's say full HD. The aspect ratio comes automatically. Here we find this interesting, obscene about the line scale multiplier as it happened when we export a day back. This value is talking about the thickness of our edges in our model. The thing is that in this model, in this pyramid model, I am not using. So I will not modify this value. We can see here a preview of that frame size. One-click and we can check this aspect ratio. Then we have this frame rate. 24 frames per second is okay. We can change it anyway, but 24 is okay. A value 20-25. Maximum theory is okay. Then always mark this anti-alias rendering for better. Or let's say a smoother rendering precisely on the head. Yes, we have this upsilon loop to a starting same. This means that when the video finishes, it will start again in an endless loop or not. So I will not mark this epsilon item one that flew. This third option, always prompt for animation. Upsilon is not very interesting. Then we have restored defaults in case that we want to undo all of these settings, we don't want to do that. So let's click Okay and then Export. Once my video has been rendered, I can select it and open it. Maybe we can do some adjustments in order to try to improve this animation. E.g. we haven't used the saddles and maybe we can make the camera to move slower. So if I want to use the saddles, I'll go over a scene number one. Then I would turn on saddles and I will update my sin. I have to repeat this process with all the scenes here. So a c number to turn on the saddles and update the scene. A scene number three, turn on the saddles and update the SCN. See number four, turn on the saddles and we update the essay. Finally, we have to repeat the same with this final scene, number five, and we are done. Then I move over view animation settings. And I will say that I want my transitions to be longer. Let's say 6 s instead of four. I close this window and I am ready for going over File Export, Animation, pyramids plus settles. Let's call it like that. The options will be the same. Okay? Exports. Again, once our animation is done, Let's open it. Pdms plus Saddam's is here to plead. I could say that the result now is much more better. Anyways, as you can see, it is not super, super sophisticated way of doing our animation. We can still feel those stops, those delays when we arrived to the next thing. And we don't have, let's say, very accurate control of the camera. But this is what we have in SketchUp natively for doing an animation. Anyways, when we talk about plugins, I will show you and a special plug-in for doing more sophisticated animations. Because I think that it is a very interesting area and that plug-in, in fact is kind of much more powerful. So I hope that you liked the class and I see you in the next episode. 69. Plugins 1: Hello people and welcome to this new class. Inward, we're going to see a very important tool, like it is the plugins in a SketchUp. First of all, we would understand what a plugin is and then where we can get the resources for, download them first of all, and installed them in our SketchUp software. Afterwards, we will go one-by-one learning how to use the most important ones, in my opinion, as it is the solid inspector, the solar north, select an isolate round corner, et cetera, et cetera. So first of all, what is a plugin? Well, a plugin, you have to understand that it is an extension of a SketchUp in order to have more skills which will allow us to model in a better way. And where can we download those plugins or how we can do it? Well, we have different resources. Firstly, we will see the native resources. If we move over, window will find here what is called extension warehouse. And just below we can read Extension Manager. If I click on extension warehouse will find here our house, but just of plugins, many of them are free, not all. Here we have a search bar. We can expand this and filter our shirts by these categories. Then we can read feature extensions, we can read top extensions, we can read top developers. Anyways, I will recommend you the most important ones here. So first of all, we'll start downloading these live to. This plugin is made by this developer, TomTom, and it will allow us mainly to use any plugging made by these developer. If we don't download this plugin, we will not be able to use Plugin of this TomTom author one-click or Here we go inside, we have here a description and I want you to click on install. This window will pop up and we have to click on Yes. And then another window will say that the process has been successful. Accept, and that's all super easy, right? When a step backwards. And here you can download as well these clean up plugging. It is interesting because as the name says, it will clean up our model, erasing edges which bell or materials that we are not using, or even components that we are not using either. Another interesting plugin is this one solid inspector. I have all of them already installed in my computer. And anyways, I made a list of all of these important plug-ins that I want you to download in the comment of these episodes. So you will have the name of the plugin and literal description and the link for going directly to the download page. Once that we have understood this extension warehouse, I will close it and go over this. Another option Extension Manager. This extension manager will show us all the plugins that we have installed in our SketchUp will be able to read the author and we will be able as well to enable that fluorine or disabled, that. If I go over minutes, I will be able as well to install the plug-in. But the most important option here is this one just down here in where we can read in style extensive. This button will be used when we want to install a plug-in from the outside applying which is not placed in that extension warehouse that we have dust sin. So I will close this and then it is the correct moment for talking about other resources, not native resources. The most important one, it is called a sketch location. If we type in a sketch location on Google will find here the website. And once we are inside, will find huge community about SketchUp inward will find a lot of resources. If I hit on community, will find here a big furrow which is updated every day, will find tutorials, will find a SOP with textures, model extensions and so on. And mainly the most important part is this one called lagging store. You have to understand that this sketch location is the official biggest resource about the sketch. Here, many authors, many developers, upload their plug-ins and we can download them easily Many times for free. You will have to register yourself. You can have a free account. There is another option in where you will have to pay, but I recommend you to use the free account. Once you have registered yourself, then. You will have to log in. I did it already here. If you expand this window resources, you will find this another option, plugging store, download. You hit on here, and then we will have to hit on Download. Now, in order to download what it's gonna be a file with this extension, our B set. This will be a manager tool, and thanks to it, we'll be able to download any plug-in from this sketch location on library, but from our SketchUp file that it happens with the extension warehouse. So coming back to a SketchUp, we should go over window Extension Manager again. And then we'll have to hit. This option is styled extension, the one I was talking about before. One-click, we look for our fire, the sketch location tools. One click Open. Once it is already installed, we can close this window. And then if I hover over this upper bar, right button, I will find this plug-in called extension store. One-click. Here it is. Anyways, if I go over extensions, one-click here, I will find as well a new option called a sketchbook. If I hit extension store, then this manager tool will be opened. And from here we'll be able to download all the plugins from that library, from that sketch location on library, but just from here from our SketchUp file. Like if it was a kind of native extension, we can look for our plugin using different filters, like recent buy downloads or authors categories. So once you are here, I want you to look for one author, one developer, which is very, very interesting because he has a lot of useful plugins. My name is Fred six. So I will click on Fred R6. Here we have his plugins, but the first thing that we have to do is go over this one, leap Fred or six. If we don't download and install this plugin, we will not be able to use the rest of them. Like it happened with that developer called TomTom. We can get some info and then we connect with Google. And we can say Install. Let's choose our root and choose how to install folder. Once the plugin is successfully installed, we say Accept, and then we can download more plug-ins. This author, you have a list, so step-by-step, just follow that list. But e.g. this could be loved is important to download it. We'll see it in the next episode, round corner as well too. So unsure phase or animator will be seen in the course. So we can close this window and we can say now that we are ready for a start downloading a specific plugins as these ones that we have here, and start learning how to use all of them. 70. Best plugins 2: Hello guys and welcome to the second part about the plugins in a SketchUp in where we will start learning about specific plugins, will see what I consider the 11 most important plugins in SketchUp. The first one will be the one called solid Inspector. Then we'll see solar north, select an isolate round corner, say bender, Bezier, sublime, could be love and joined Post pool. Further scale as power bar and sorrow. So let's start from the reading. The first one is called solid inspector. If you want to download it, you should go over Window extension warehouse, and here you will find it easier. If I scroll down here it is, It is free as all of these plugins. So once you download it, it is here, this is its toolbar. And this plugin mainly will help us to detect and we solve problems when we are working with solids. Remember that we had that toolbar called solids. I will open it. Solid tools, here it is. And when we were working with this toolbar with solids, we needed first of all, that this tool recognizes our model as a solid, e.g. this element now is just free geometry. But if I select all the entities together, I make R group. And then I say that I want to use it as a solid. I select any of these tools, e.g. Union, and then I hover over this group. The tool is recognizing this element as a solid. There is no problem. But e.g. if I go inside this group and I draw a little line, this time is clear, we can see it perfectly. This is an error. And now I use the same tool, union, I hover over my group. The message says, not as solid. In this case, it is very easy to recognize the line and just delete it and we solve the problem. But sometimes I can assure you that it is not easy when our model is complex. We have worked a lot on it. Sometimes we make the best of our cells in order to resolve the problems and we can't do it. Then we have this tool. Then I select the element, I hit Inspect and repairs solid groups and component. One-click. And here we have the problem. Stray head, yes, one, we have to click on fixed and that's all easy. Let's go now with this second plugin called solar north, this blurring, you will find it again over the extension warehouse. The toolbar is this one. We have two options. We have the option for display the North one-click. Then we can see on this orange line the direction of the north. And of course, as you already know, the direction of the North, it is the key for the position of our shadows. So if I turn on the son of a SketchUp, the North is here in that direction, pointing to that direction from the origin. That means that this side of the cube is the north part of, let's say, this building. We don't have light here, not direct light at least. But thanks to this plugin, we can change that position of the North, then change the position of our shadows. I will click on this second option, set North, one-click. Then I will use the origin as the first 0.1 click. Then I can change that direction. Let's say that the North now goes from the origin to this direction. Second click, as you can see, shadows changed accordingly to that direction. And now this side of the cube is the north side. And here we don't have direct light. In my opinion, this is one of the most important and useful plugins when you are working with architectural projects, always you will have to use it. And that's the reason because it is here in this specific list for you. I will turn off the saddles and let's move to the next one. Select and isolate. Again, this plugin is in the extension warehouse, very easy to download. Looked at. This orange line is still there, marking the direction of the north. So I will click on here display North. So I was going to say that select and isolate works in a different way. We don't have a toolbar. So when we want to use it, we have just to select the entity then right button. And here we have isolate and reveal. This plugin goes directly to this window. I would click on it and then the rest of the model is hidden while our selected entity remains there in our Canvas, this can make our life much more easier in SketchUp. Now I can make some modifications easier in case that they want or whatever to restore the drawing. Before just write bathroom again and isolate and reveal again. Super easy plugin, simple and powerful, in my opinion, the next plugin is called round corner. It is this one. In this case, you will have to use the extension store one-click. We'll go over authors that say Fredo six. Here you will find the round corner deploying has three options. The first one is called round corner, the second one, sharp corner, and the third one bevel. The explanation here is easy. The first one, we'll round the corners in a more organic and soft way. The second one will be a little bit more geometric, and the third one even more. Let's see how it works. First, we have to select our element. And in this case, look that this cube is a group. If I hit round corner, is not going to work. So I have to expand or explode my group and then hit round corner again, this toolbar pops up. We have a lot of options, but the most important one is this one called offset. If I click it, we can change the value now is 1 m, let's say 0.1, okay? Here we can check easily what this offset means. Actually, it is the distance from the edges of the cube to this green line. And that offset will be used for round the corners. Once we're happy with the offset, we can go generate geometry. One-click and here we have the result. If I go over view, hidden geometry will understand better the geometry of our new queue. Let's use the second option of the plugin with this second queue. Again, we select the cube, we exploded. Now it is not a group anymore. I will select it. We'll say sharp corner, one-click again. I have to adjust the offset. Let's say again 0.1, okay, generate geometry. Here we have our new cube with the new corners, little bit sharper. And the third option, the two bevel, again, we select, I will explode it bevel again, the offset. Should we change 0.1? Enter generate geometry. And here we can check perfectly our bevels in our corners. When we are done with the plugin, will have just to click on here Exit Tool. Next plugin is called CLF CEP vendor. It's toolbar is this one just one bottom. You can download this plugin from the extension warehouse and it will allow us to bend linear entities as this window. First of all, we have to draw our curve path. So I will use an arc one click on here, second click on here. And let's say that our path will be this. We'd have to check that this element is a group. It is a group then Line tool. And let's draw a line from here to here on the base. Next step will be to click on our group, say bender. Then we hit that line, one-click and we will be able to read end and start. I will active the x-ray. Here. You can read a start and end. That will be the measure which this plugin will transform into this band curve line. So the last step will be to hit on this curved line. One-click. And here we have the transformation enter, and that's all super powerful. I will turn off the X-ray view. Hidden geometry of next plugin is called Bezier a spline. Again, you can get it from the extension warehouse. And this time we don't have a toolbar. In order to use it, we should go over draw bezier curves. One click on here, the plugin is loaded. And then when I want to draw, one-click, second click and look, we are able to draw curves and we don't have to use the arcs, because as you already know, using the arc is the way in SketchUp for drawing curves. It is not a very sophisticated way. So thanks to this tool, we will be able to draw curves in a more, let's say, accurate way. The next plugin is called, Kirby loved. The author of this plugin is frayed or six. So again, you will have to use this getLocation library. It's toolbar is this one. We have three options. The first one is called loved by spline, second one, loved along path, um, third one is skin contours. Let's start using this first option. Imagine e.g. that we have these edges. And to be more clear. I will erase this one and we want to create a surface through these two edges. Of course, if we try to close a face in a normal way, we can't create that phase because they are not coplanar, they are not making a plane. Then it is when we have to use this gloopy could be loved. We will generate a kind of curved face joining those two first lines. In order to use it, we select this first line, second line, and we hit the tool. Once we have our surface already done through this tool bar, we can change the number of segments. We can simplify or increase the geometry. And we can, even if I hover over my face, I could modify these edges and then create a new kind of curved face. Once I'm happy with the result, I have just to click on here, finished and generate geometry. Here we are. If I go over view hidden geometry, then we will understand better the face. It's the geometry. With our changes. We can use this same tool as well. In cases like that, we have a rectangle, this rectangle, and we have a cycle here. If I select both of them and I hit this first tool, could we loved them? We have this geometry joined that rectangle with that cycle. Again, I can make some modifications when I am happy, finished and generate geometry. Let's jump now to this second feature of this could be loved, plugin, this one called loved along path. Here we have an example where we have a rectangle, we have a path, we have a cycle. As you can imagine, we will create a surface which will start from this rectangle and we'll end on this strike. This is similar to this follow me tool from a SketchUp. But remember that if I use that follow me tool, I can say that e.g. I want that to go along this path. But then what I cannot do is to turn that, let's say curved cylinder into our rectangle at the end. This is the power of this new tool. In order to use it, it is easy. We have to select the three entities at the same time and just hit the tool. Here we have our new surface. Again. We can make some modifications and we are happy green button. And finally, we have this third option called a skin contours. We will use this tool when we want to generate a surface and we have three or more edges. In the first example, we had just two ideas. Remember, but here we have 123.4. If I select all of them and I use this first option, this window pops up, I will say, okay, and it is not working. Sometimes, maybe it would work, but the surface will have some errors. So anyway, it will not be good for these kind of situations. However, if I select these four edges and I hit this third option, then I will generate the surface perfectly. Again. We can transform the geometry manually or we can make some modifications through its toolbar when we are happy, green button, Phoenix and generate geometric super powerful tool, this could be loved. Next plugin is called joined Post pool, but as far as this video is becoming a little bit long, I will finish the class here and we will continue with this plugin in the next episode. 71. Best plugins 3: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to continue with the plug-ins in the last episode we finished here, we will going to talk about this joint postpone plug-in. The author of this plugin is fructose-6. So you already know how to download a plugin from the specification and I'm sorry, this is it's toolbar. And first of all, you have to understand that this joint cost pool tool is related directly with this tool from a SketchUp. But here we'll be able to pause and pull in many different. So it's color represents a different way for doing this postpone tool will be able to pause and pull along a direction, will be able to put some pool, multiple phases individually. We'll be able to compact post pool on average direction, et cetera, et cetera. But the most useful unimportant feature here is the blue one. This is the one that you will use in your normal life in SketchUp, it works like that. If I use this model and I select this face and this another phase at the same time, if I hit Post pool from SketchUp, I can't do it because I have to do it individually one by one. Thanks to this tool, I can select as many surfaces as I want and then hit the tool, one-click, It's toolbar appears. And the most important feature here is the offset. The offset means actually the measure of that push or pull. One click on it. Let's say 1 m. Here we have the result. We made an extrusion with that distance using this measure. But look that we joined the space between those two volumes. I mean, if I undo this movement and I postpone tool like normally in SketchUp, one-click here and I say 0.5. Here, I do the same as far as we are doing an extrusion using the orthogonal direction of that plane. We have here. This whole, thanks to this joint cost pool, we can extrude different areas at the same time. And furthermore, we will join those empty spaces. So it can be super, super useful. Control set, control set. Again, I select, this time all the surfaces joined Post pool and looked at here, we find two more options. If I hover over finishing, the first one says erase original phase, and the second one says keep original phase and reverse if necessary. So if I hit the tool, one click and now I hover my mouse, I am adjusting these offset manually. Second click, and here we have the result. We erase the original, Let's say volume. We don't have that reference anymore. If I hit this second option, the second finishing, then that first reference, that first volume remains here. Depending on each case, it will be convenient one finishing or another. This tool can be very useful as well. When we have a case like that, we have a curve, a curve surface actually. And we want to extrude that surface. That is something that we cannot do using these push-pull tool of a sketch. If I hit it and I tried to do it, this message appears saying cannot post full curved or smooth surfaces. But if I hit this blue opsin joined Post pool, one click on my surface and then look, I can do it perfectly and create this kind of curved wall. Super powerful, super easy. And it makes our 3D wall much more wider. Let's jump now to this next plugin. This plugin is called Fred scale. As you can imagine, the author is fructose-6 will give us more options when we scale something, it's toolbar is this one. We have many different options, so we will see just the most important ones. This second one called box scaling, in my opinion, is one of the most powerful. It works laid out if I select e.g. this cube and I hit the tool, then this graph points appear like it happens with the normal scale tool in SketchUp. But look that if I place the mouse here on this corner, this axis pop up. And when I click and I hover the mouse while I tap tabulation key, then this window appears where I can set the measures of the cube alone every axis. So let's say that I want along the red axis a measure of 3 m, along the green axis, 0.5, and along the blue axis, 6 m. Okay, here we have our result. Again. I hover over the corner, like if I want to do a uniform scale, one-click and then I tap tabulation key. Then I take the position of the axis and I set my new measures, 11. One. Okay, here we have our new cube powerful, right? Remember that if I want to do the same with enormous scale tool of a SketchUp, I have to select the queue, then hit the scale, then select the correct graph point. Then here, type in the new measure, let's say 2 m Enter. Then repeat the same operation along this blue axis, 2 m, enter the same alone. This another axis, 2 m enter using these for the scale tool. One, hit another click Tab key, and I write here all the Mercer's just through this window. The second option that I want to show you is this one called box a stretching. This is very interesting because e.g. if I have a situation like that, a window with one glass and the frame around, and I want to scale it something very normal. Then I grab the correct point, and when I stretch my window along that direction, I am doing my glass wider, but the frame too. So I'm losing the correct measures of the frame. In order to resolve this situation, I have this tool called box stretching, one-click. Then I hit this graph point, one-click. If I stretch my window along that direction, you will see that my frame remains exactly the same. Time to jump now to this next plugin called DHS power bar. The toolbar of this plugin is this one, super, super long beak. Many options right here, we will see some of them. The first one is related with the ability to extrude curves. We saw before how to extrude a curved surface here using this impulse pool tool. And now let's see how to extrude a curve when the curve is aligned. Remember that if we want to use the normal postpone tool, we can't do it. If I try to use this join push, pull tools, I can not neither. So here we have this option, extrude lines. I select my curve, one-click on here, second click, I select the direction of my extrusion. I select as well the height of that extrusion. We can read it in the measurements panel, let's say 2 m Enter. And here we are. In my opinion, this is very, very powerful tool. And I have to say that I haven't founded in another plugin, just in this one, in the middle of many, many, many tools. The next option it has to do with this situation. We have a rectangle here, but we lost the face, something normal in a scepter. If we want to recover that phase, we know that we have just to draw one of the sites and the phase is coming again. But thanks to this tool phase finder, I can do it easier just by selecting my ideas and clicking the tool. Imagine that I have many different phases. Then I select all of them. I hit the tool and I recover my areas just by one-click. Very interesting, e.g. when I import a floor plan from AutoCad, we will see it in the future. This another situation has to do with this tool offset x, and it will allow us to offset an EDS and individual. Remember that we have these two call offset here in a SketchUp, a native tool. And if I hit it, I will be able to use it just through phases. The tool detects a face and then one-click. And I can make this offset using the edges around control set, thanks to these new tool, offset x, I hit it and then the tool detects individual edges. I click on this one, e.g. and I can offset easily using this orthogonal direction. I will type in that offset, e.g. 0.25. Enter second click, and here we are. We repeat the same operation. One-click, I should type in the new measure 1 m enter. And secondly, it is simple, but I think that it can be useful as well. Another interesting tool here in this super huge bar is this one called Meroe. It will allow us to Meroe things to make symmetries. Remember that in SketchUp natively, we don't have an, a specific tool for doing this. So if I want to do a symmetry taking this volume as a reference, I should select it first of all, then use the scale tool. Select the correct graph point, going to the other side, a scale minus one, and click again. But I lost my original volume. So I should have done a copy. Summing up is not easy. Final set. I select my volume again. I click this mirror tool, one click, and then I have just to click on one point in order to generate my plane and new plane, which will be used as the axis for that symmetry. So I select this another point on the blue axis. And here we have the symmetry accordingly to that plane. Is C powerful and super useful. Next tool, this one called mover. I would select this cylinder. I will hit the tool and then look because I will use the arrow keys in order move this element. This is something that of course, I cannot do without this tool and maybe sometimes can be useful. The jams that the object is doing when I fit any arrow key is the distance written down right? Now in my measurements bar 0.1. I can't change that distance. Let's say 1 m enter. And then when I tap any arrow key, my object is jumping 1 m. If my distance, let's say that it is 0.01, Enter, I can do tiny movements with my entities, which can be useful as well. Finally, I would like to show you these three options, random scale, random rotate, and random scale and rotate. So imagine that we have a situation like that. Many different entities. This time they are cubes, but they can be trees or whatever. We want to change them, Let's say randomly. So I can select all of them. Click this first option, random scale, and then I have different variations of the scale in any cubed. If I hit this, another option call random rotate, it happens the same but with a rotation. And if I click this third option, random is scale and rotate, I change the scale and the rotation. So as you can see, this bar, this plugin has a lot of, let's say, tiny plug-ins because most of them are not super, super powerful, but they are interesting and useful. So I think that this plugin, actually, it is a good one. Um, don't forget what for me is the most important skill here. The ability to extrude lines, even curves. Well, finally we, This Sarah to plugin. This plugin is here. You will find it on the extension warehouse and it will allow us to cut objects super easy. Imagine that we have these stairs, but we need to cut these stairs using a diagonal. In this case, we will use the plugin server to look that our element can be a group or not. Let's do a group here, a group, and then I will support myself with a guideline in order to do this lies in a more accurate way. So first protractor here, Let's say that my angle, I want to be more or less like that. Here we have our guidelines. Then Sarah to one-click, first click on the diagonal, and second click holding Control key on any point of the diagonal. Two. Here we are. We have a slice in all of our groups. And I had two groups, the stairs and these square as the ground. So if I go inside my group and I select this right part of the stairs, I can delete it easily. The problem now is that I lost the surface, but we know how to recover it. Ecd, right? I can do it this way or I can do it using these two we just saw a few minutes ago. If I don't want to slice this another group, I can erase that line and that's all this tool will be used in an exercise in the future in where we will analyze some components at the same time and you will see how powerful this tool is. Anyways, we have arrived to the end of this episode. I hope that you like it. If you have any comments, don't hesitate to do it. And I hope to see you in the next episode. 72. The special one. Fredo6 animator: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see another plugin, the one called Freedom Six animator. It is this one. The developer, of course, is Fredo six. So you will need to download it from the education on rivalry. And it will allow us to make animations in a more sophisticated way than the ones that we can do using the scenes. So let's see how this plug-in works. I will use this model about the Egypt's pyramids. This model is attached with a course so you can try to replicate the animation that we will do here together. It will be simple because the plugin is a little bit complex. So it is better to start with an animation. Not very difficult, but as you can see here, we have a lot of elements and the animation could be, let's say, super intricate. But as I told you, will use just the three pyramids and the rest of the things will remain still. So first of all, we have to hit this first option animator, and then these toolbars will appear. We have on the left side a timeline here, different options. I want you to focus just on this ones, the blue one and the green one. The blue one is for insert a new movement. And the second one is for using a new camera. Then here we have this option, play the clip animation, and here we have the speed of that animation. With those elements, we can do amazing things. But before starting our animation, we have to be aware of the fact that we have to prepare our model, placing the things that we are going to move in the correct starting spot. So I'll go out of the plugin Exit Tool. And if we are going to move just the three pyramids, the Khufu pyramid, keyframe, pyramid, Menkaura pyramid. Then we have to place the three of them at the starting position. So I will select all of them and I will move them along the blue axis distance, let's say 1,000 m. Why so high? Because I don't want them to appear on the camera view in the beginning of our animation, I want them to fall down from that app position to the ground. I should remember that high 1,000 m. Once this step is done, I can go to the plugin. So one-click and time for using the option for inserting unit movement in the timeline, I click on these blue opsin, new movement. Then I have to always look for the element that I want to move. Let's say this pyramid, one-click on the pyramid and then I have different options to select. I can select that component which is inside the main group, or I can select the main group with all the geometry together. This is the one that I want to select. So one click, the element is already selected, and then I have to select the kind of movement that I want to do. I have different options. I have this first option called translation. This is the one actually that we want to use, but we have a screw, we have rotation, we have spin, we have scaling, we have explosion, we have path, and we have apparition. So as you can see, we can make amazing things here. Let's choose translation, one click on translation, then we have to select the direction of that translation. We want to move our pyramid along the axis. One click on here, then I hover over the canvas and I will click on any point. First point, e.g. here, I select the direction of our movement and I will type in the correct offset. Then remember 1,000 m. Enter. Here we have our first movement. If I want a preview, I have just to click on here, play animation for the sequence. And I can see my preview. Once I am happy, then let's click on here. This blue bar will appear on my timeline with this panel on the right side. Thanks to this panel, I will be able to modify that animation. I can change even the name. Let's call it Khufu, like the name of this pyramid. Okay, I can change the duration. And I have here an interesting ostium, this easing. Now the ECB mode is linear, but I have different options. I invite you to explore all of them. For this animation, I will keep linear easing, but sometimes it can be, let's say. Good effect to use different precincts. So time to jump to the second movement. Then we'll have to go again over these upsilon, insert a unit movement, one-click and we hit on new movement. Again, we have to repeat the same process. We select the element that we want to move this time, this second pyramid, one-click. Then we have different components inside the main group, but we want to move on the group together. So one click on here, translation, set axis, one click on any point, we choose the correct direction and we set offset 1,000. Again. Let's preview this second movement. It seems that everything is okay. I can change the name from here as well. One-click and let's call it different as the name of this second pyramid. When we're happy, we save the sequence and exit. That new animation is here at the end of the first one, we have on the right side, again our resume of that animation. And if we want to preview the whole animation together, we can go over here and one-click first 1, s one. Everything seems to be okay. Let's go with the third one. So new movement. We select this third pyramid, one-click all the group together. Translation, set axis, one-click offset 1,000. Name of this animation. Main cut out. Save the sequence and exit. The new animation is here. So let's see the three of them altogether, but this time from another point of view. So be careful because if you zoom in, zoom out, maybe it's not working like in the normal way. So we have to use an SketchUp zoom tool. When we are done with the toll, this window pops up and says temporary exit. To sketch up, the plugin is asking us if we want to return to the normal SketchUp view or we want to still work inside the animation. So we don't want to exit and we have to say, no. Let's have a preview about the whole animation. First, pyramids, pyramids, pyramids, everything works fine. Just, I would like to let you know that you can change the position of any animation. Imagine that you want the third one and the second one go down together, then I should move while I am holding down the left button, this animation and place it next to this one, e.g. here we're be careful because when I select an animation, e.g. this one main corral, when I move it, if I move too much to the right side, I can read disabled and then the animation will not work. I have to move closer to the animation. Then I can read start time. I released left button, and here we are. So you can play with the position of any animation once they are already recorded. That is interesting. Anyways, I want Mancur out to be the last one, as it was said in the beginning. So the first one will be Khufu, the second one will be Catherine, and the third one will be main Kara. Hi time. Now to learn about another tool of this plugin, this second option called insert a camera in the timeline. Look that now I have in my timeline, this red line exactly at the fourth. Second, if I hit the tool, insert a camera in the timeline new camera, then this toolbar will pop up. I have different options for setting that camera, but I think that the easiest, this one capture current view camera. This works exactly the same as the scenes. So I have just two orbits. Use the i2 in order to be happy with my camera view. Let's say e.g. that the first one will be this one. Once I'm happy, I say no because I want to remain inside the plug-in. Click Capture current view camera, and I hit Save the sequence and exit. Then look at this icon representing the camera view is now here in the fourth second of my timeline, I have another panel summing up the features of that camera. So now I can select this camera and place it e.g. in the beginning, let's say here 0.00 s I released, I have my camera now in that position. And when I click on play the clip animation to have a preview, the camera goes to that point. The interesting thing here is that I can create another camera, new camera, I will orbit around my pyramids, let's say till here, capture current view camera save, and then my new camera is positioned here at the end of the animation. If I hit the Preview, then we can see how the camera goes from that first camera view position to the next one, like it happened with the essence. Nothing new here. If I consider that everything goes so fast, we can make the animation goes slower easily. I can say that I want this first animation called Khufu, and I want the duration of that animation, let's say 4 s, the same with the second one, 4 s, and the same with the third one, 4 s. Then I have to sort out all the blue bars. This first one is good for. The second one will be keyframe at the end of Khufu. And the third one will be men carried out at the end of Catherine, looked at the cameras, remains in their position. I will change the position of the camera, the second camera. So let's play this second camera here at the end of the animation. And again, let's have a preview. Now, everything looks much more better. So once we are happy and we want to export our animation, we should go over this option, generation of video. Let's name it as pyramid video. And then we have different export options. By default, the plugin will export our animation images sequence. So we will need a video Edition software later in order to create that video. Anyways, the plugin give us this option to export the animation already in a video format. But first, we have to click on here once you have downloaded and installed that little software that it is needed in order to have these options you can select before not move just MP4, the frame rate, 25 frames per second is okay. Speed factor of 1.0 is okay. The dimensions of our animation, could we change here? These are pixels. So maybe here we can say 1920 and the height is coming automatically. And finally, generate video. It will take some time depending on the power of your computer. Once the render of the video is done. And it took some time around 20 min. In my case, I have here the MP4 file. I have to open it. We can check the result. As you can see, thanks to this plugin, we can do amazing things. This is just a simple example. So I invite you to use it and don't hesitate if you have any adapt to leave a comment and I will respond to you as soon as possible. I hope that you liked the video and I'll see you in the next episode. 73. Barcelona Pavillion 7. Stairs: Hello everybody. Let's go with our pavilion. So now in this episode, what we're going to do is to go into detail. I mean, we are going to draw these stairs here and these other esters from here. A part of that it will be means the band and the details of these toilets. So let's just start with this esters. First of all, I will switch on my image, view and camera in parallel project. So here I can count how many steps has this ester. So from this point, I have 1234567 lines and I say lines because I'm going to use the Copy tool. So if I orbit, I switch off the image again. I will use my auxiliary line in a vertical position, one here. Then I selected move and copy, and I placed my copy here, but I don't want just one copy. I want seven copies, so I will say split bar seven Enter. And here we have the width of each step. Now we need the high for that task. I will use the measure tool, 1.55 m and it should be divided by a, the result, it is 1930 7 cm, but we are working on meter. So it should be nice if I go here to this little man, click on it, then we have this modal informing you. And here we can change units super easy. We go to length and instead of meters, we said centimeters, we close. And now we can introduce our measurements into centimeters. So we said that the height of each step will be 19.37 cm. We have everything we need. I will go to rectangle first point, second point, then p. And let's say that the high is 19.37 cm. Then I will select this element and I will make a group now move into the correct position. First movement here, second movement here at 19.37 cm distance. Then I will make a copy, one copy, but we need more. So asterisk seven, here we are. One of the steps is our leftover, so I will erase it. Now. I will erase as well all the auxiliary lines. I will not need them anymore. And my next step will be to place correctly the stairs in the correct group. First of all, I will make one room for all the single steps. Now, all of them are into a box. And now I will place this box into the podium box. In order to do this, I will go to Edit Cut. Then I will go into my desire box, in this case the podium click click. And once I am inside, Edit, Paste in Place. And here we are. We have all perfectly arranged. And at the same time, you can see that ministers have already the texture of the podium. That is because we applied before that material from outside. So everything inside the eggs, that material Escape. Let's go to the, another ester here. Image on. We have here first kind of platform. Let's draw it. First point here, second point, more or less. Here, I will switch off the image again, P. And let's play with that thick all the time like a constant that 1930, 7 cm. Here we are. Now. I will make this platform a new group. And I will use a single step from this term in order to make the new ones. So I go in, I select a group of any of the steps, e.g. this one, once it is selected, Edit Copy, In this case, I go out and I say Edit, Paste, not paste in place because now I don't mind. I will place this step here and then I will rotate it first point, once my desire plane of rotation is correctly, first point, second point for adjusting the reference. And now I can choose the angle, let's say 90 degrees. Here we are M for movement, I choose the midpoint in a group. And again, here I'm looking for the midpoint. Here we are. Now, I put this step in the correct position, x-ray and I will need to make a hole in this first platform. So I will use my auxiliary lines. One reference here, another reference here, one more here, and the last one here. Now I have to go into the platform group line, first point, second point. And I close my area, switch of the x-ray. I can take that. I have already this area, so I can push it to create this whole. I go out from my group and here we are. Now. I erase this up cilia lines and we can continue with the sisters. But before that, I am just realizing that we should move a little bit this platform, that step, 19.37 cm. Now, here we are. Okay. Now again the image, let's count how many steps we have here. 12345, and then the platform. Okay? You see, I select my first step, one point, Second point, we make a copy and we want four copies, not just 15 steps in total. For the next platform, I will select one step. I will make a copy, but we don't want a copy, but a platform. So I will pull this step in order to create that platform. Here, a measure so we can switch on again the limits top view. Remember that we are working in parallel projection for important in order to measure things. Measure Tool. And this is more or less 210 cm, more or less. Switch up the image again, I go into inside this group, I am already, then I can use an auxiliary point from this corner, I write 210 cm enter. We have this grows as the reference, then p. And I go till my references. Here we are. Again the same operation. I use. One of the steps, make a copy, place it in the correct place, then another copy here. But we don't want just one. But how many? Let's count 123, 456-789-1011, 11 in total. So we said that we don't want one, but 11. So 11, we can check it now again, it seems that there are two which we don't need, so I will delete it. I counted too much too fast. I hide the image again, and then I select all of these elements. And I say that I want to make a group. Once we have this rule, Let's place it into the podium group again. So edit, cut, we go into this box, edit paste in place here where the stone texture is already applied in all of these elements. So we have that work already done. We'll go out of the group and we are finished with our stairs. I invite you to follow me and copy this process in order to draw both the stairs, because it is a very useful exercise in order to improve your drawing skills. But at the same time, to understand better and better those movements between groups, which are very, very important in order to master SketchUp. So keep working. And I see you in the next episode. 74. Barcelona Pavillion 8. Bench and toilets: Hello everybody and welcome to this new episode. Let's continue working with our pavilion. This time. We will go into detail with the toilets. And at the same time, we have to build to model this band which is placed here. So let's start with the band, which is easier. And then we will jump to the toilets. In order to do this view x-ray, I'll go to my ducks and I unhide image. As you can see, we can't see perfectly well the image because of the texture. So we can use here different style. We are working now with a sided with textures. But we can use e.g. this wireframe in which we are going to see yes, the edges. Here we are. Now we can see perfectly the bunch. So I choose the rectangle. We can see that we have here 1234567 models. We will draw one and we will copy it six times more. Let's start. First point. Second point, more or less around here. Now I will orbit because as you can see, this rectangle is drawn not in the correct height. This is because we don't have surfaces. And then this draw, when went to the bottom of our drawing, I would choose it. And I will move it on the blue axis. Here we are. I recover my say that with textures, and now I will extrude this element, let's say 10 cm, or maybe a little bit more. Let's say two more. Here we are. Then I will make this element or group no more x-ray. And now I will copy it six times. Not one copy, but six. We can check if everything is correct. We can see that our drawing is not much in perfectly with the image. Doesn't matter. I will erase this last element and we will leave it like this. Now, I will select all of these elements and I will create another group. We'll move it on the floor. And now the high will be 3 cm. Nice. Let's go with the legs of these bands. I will create a rectangle with these dimensions, 30 cm, 3 cm. Here we are. 30 cm as well. Here we are. I will create a group with this group. Now, I will place it in the correct position, midpoint, midpoint. Here we are. Now. I will move it along the blue axis, still. Here. Here we are. We have our first leg correctly placed. Now we have to make some copies, right? So move one point, be careful because sometimes with the move we can rotate as well. Control first copy, but we don't want one copy, but 12345, the risk five. Here we are. Then we have to arrange this last leg. Moves. First movement here, second movement, let's say 15 cm. Nice. Let's do the same here. So one copy, redox. So I use the right arrow of my laptop. First position, second position, 15 cm in that direction, finished. Now, we have to apply the textures, right? So I will create a group with all of the elements of these bands. Make group. Now materials, I click on the house and here we have this stone. We could go as well to the paint bucket. And you just take the material clicking on the stone, then one-click from outside of the group and it is already applied. Let's go with the toilets. So top view. And we can see that here. We have this glass with one door here for the entrance. Then we have here kind of wall, another wall here with different doors. At the same time. We have here one class and another one here, which are kind of Windows. So let's start with the walls. In order to do this, I will use the wire frame to be able to watch the image easily. Then auxiliary line. Here we have our reference, then again textures. And now we have to go inside this group. In order to make the elements glue with each other. First element letter T, let's say 10 cm distance L for the line to here. And now it should be this area. This is the sign that we have done correctly our work, then push or pull. We create this wall nights. Nice. Let's go with the other wall. It is around here. So the same process, letter T, auxiliary line. It is more or less here. Okay. Again, textures. Again line. But be careful, go inside the group. Yes, we are already inside. First line, auxiliary line, 10 cm l. Here we are. We have the area whose pool? We have the wall. Nice. We can use the eraser in order to eliminate the different auxiliary lines. This auxiliary line is not inside this group, so I can't erase it from here. And let's draw the halls of the different doors. So T again, here, let's say 80 cm, another 84, the door and the high will be 2.10 m. So 210 cm. Here we are. Now we can use e.g. that referenced in order to create this auxiliary line. Here it will be the same measurements, 80, 80. Here we are, in this case, again, 210 here, let's say 10 cm and 80. Everything prepare for doing the whole rectangle. First point, second point, P. And we pose still will receive this message on phase. Click perfect rectangle again. First point, second point, p. Same thing. We can go e.g. till this line, which is part of the plane of the other side. Here we are rectangle again. One point, Second point, P on phase perfect eraser. And we eliminate all the auxiliary lines we have already used. We can go now outside of the group. We can erase this auxiliary line. And let's go then with the holes for the windows. Take notice that we are working with a parallel projection. If you don't like it, we can always change it easily here and go to perspective. So here t Again, let's say here 2 m, 200 cm high, 50, distance from the corner 20 and the width of the window 160 rectangle. First, we have to go inside of the group rectangle, P on phase. Perfect. Now, let's go with this, another window. So t, We have here the references. So we can use them in order to create this auxiliary lines. Here we are rectangle, one point, Second point P. We can repeat the same operation here, rectangle, click, click, push, pull. And we choose e.g. one point of this EDS. And we create the whole period. We can erase auxiliary lines. Scape, Spacewar, scape, eraser. Perfect. Let's jump now with these glass. In order to do this task. As you can imagine, there are many different ways. I will show you just one. But feel free to draw this glass as you really think that is the best way for you, okay? So in my case, e.g. I. Will take this glass maker and I will make a copy. Let's put it here. Now is very, very high. Let's go to the ground. Here we are. Now let's place it in the correct position. So W and camera, parallel projection, I will move it more or less. Here is okay. I can see that those walls are too short, so I have to make them longer. Not very difficult, right? Yes, I have to go inside this group p, select my shirt phase and extend this element. Let's say e.g. if I go here, I can see perfectly here, okay? And then I have to order it. Go again. Same distance here. Spacebar. And I go out from the group. Okay, Now I will work with the camera in perspective. And remember that this element is a group and in the interior, we find different elements like this. Vertical partitions, which are components, or these glasses which are just free imagery. So first of all, I will erase these glasses, these free geometry. And be careful here because you have to click twice in order to select the surface and the edges. To click twice and then erase. If you don't do that and you just select the surface. You will see that here you have different edges as leftovers, which can be very annoying in order to delayed later, right? So it is much better to do it properly. Yes. When you select here, I will use the side. In order to orbit better. You can see that it could be very, very annoying. Okay, Here we are. We continue to cliques. Two clicks to click. Perfect. Now I will erase this vertical partitions, these components. I don't need them, I just need one. And with this structure, I could use e.g. the scale tool. If I select it and I say a scale, I go to the midpoint, this 0.1 click, and then I go to my desire point. Here, we're, well, it's not here. It was a mistake. It is here. The problem about this is that I have changed the thickness of these two vertical elements, this one and this one because it was on a scale operation. So if my thickness was, remember 5 cm, then I have to recover it. You have to go inside this group, T, one auxiliary line, 5 cm. Here we are for boosting or pool. And we have the reference. The same operation here. P, not from here, but from here, 5 cm P. We go the reference. We can erase these auxiliary lines. Now I go out from the group and I will place this element just in the middle, midpoint. Then midpoint of the other whoop. I go out and then I would need to place the glasses. So I go inside the group again. Rectangle, midpoint here, Sumatra, x-ray and midpoint again here, midpoint, sum out, assuming perfect, I switch off the X-ray. I need to apply the glass material. So Paint Bucket. One-click here, new glass is already selected. So one-click and one-click spacebar escape. Well, as you can see, this has been a little bit, maybe difficult to draw this way. We have used the other glass maker in order to do it, not from zero. So we have to fix the other row in, in order to adjust it here to these new placement. Let's do now this other one. So again, top view camera, parallel projection, wireframe. Here it is. We have here a door, so we need some references of cilia line. I will orbit here we have one reference, then the next one, let's say 100 cm, perfect. Again, say that with textures. Let's repeat the same process. So I will make a copy of this glass. I will place it here on the edge. Then I will go inside the group. I will erase this glass, this glass tube, and these vertical partition as well. Now a scale. First I have to choose my group at scale. Then I select the midpoint. Important thing, my reference. Perfect. Now I have to adjust these elements because as far as we are working in the horizontal dimension, some measurements have changed. So I go in letter P, 5 cm in the green, x p. I use my reference again, the same operation here, 5 cm letter P, t as my reference. I can erase the references because it should be super clean. The drawing. Now, rectangle X-ray. We can choose this midpoint. We can go till here. Perfect. Switch off the X-ray, then let there be new glass is already selected. One click Spacebar, escape. Perfect. I can see that here I have this element leftover. It should have been erased it before scape. And last time. Another copy. Let's add this side. Again. I go in, I select the group scale midpoint till here, escape. Now again, I go in letter t5p. But here we have the problem that the glass is interrupting is separating elements. So let's erase the glass. I don't want any problem. P here. And again, p5p here. We can erase auxiliary lines. I go out of that group, rectangle, x-ray, midpoint, midpoint, x-ray of letter B, Spacebar escape. Here we are eraser. We eliminate these auxiliary lines. Camera perspective. Here we are. We can go to tags, hide the image. You can see our improvement. Remember here that if you want to make it easier, much more easier, you can use this plug-in called fred, a scale, and specifically the tool called box stretching. Thanks to this tool, we can select directly the frame, click on stretching. And then when we re-scale this frame in this horizontal dimension, our frame, the thickness of our frame is not gonna change, is going to remain as still. So if you download this plug-in, your life in SketchUp will be easier. So type, say goodbye. I hope that you like the class and I see you in the next episode. 75. Import dwg: Hello people and welcome to this new class in where we are going to see how to import a d, w d from AutoCad to sketch it. So first of all, we should go over File Import once here. Pay attention because this window down here should be expanded and then choose AutoCad file, the data do d or d, x f. Once this file is selected, your article is going to appear not before, then you can select it. In this case, we're going to use this attached file called floor plan. And then first of all, we should go over oxygens. Here the most important part is about the units out of that works in millimeters, but in SketchUp, we're working in meters. So here we have select meters, accept, then we can select Import and we'll have to wait a little bit while all the entities imported to our file. Finally, this window will pop up, summing up all the information about these entities. We can close it and here we have our new geometry. As you can see, the scale is correct. Compare to our person, we have a kind of floor plan, a simple billion, with some walls and furniture placed in the interior. If I try to select any of these entities, we can see that all the elements are inside a group or a component. So first of all, let's open the outliner. Here we have our component. If I expand it, then we can see that we have a lot of components inside. The second step should be to go over tax loop that we have here. A lot of tax, exactly the same number of ducks as in our AutoCad file. Once here, we have different options for working with our AutoCad file. My advice is first of all, to organize the tax. In this case, our scope is to model the walls. The walls, because the furniture's will be taken from the warehouse or different 3D libraries. We will not model the furnitures. But thanks to this floor plan, we know where they should be placed. So what we have to do first is to select all the tags and then say that we want to erase them, right bottom, delayed tax, this window pops up and then we will assign all the entities inside those tags to the tak, tak. This option is correct. We say, Okay, then we have just the default tag with all the entities inside. Once this is done, let's go to model our world. Here, we have two options. Then I will make a copy in order to explain better these two options. The first option and the most intuitive one is to select our components, say that we want to explode it. And once we can access to our geometry, tried to close the different surfaces in order to push and pull all of them. I mean, this is a line, this is a line, but we don't have surfaces, right? But if I select this line tool, e.g. I, close this line, here, we have a new phase. We can push, pull this new phase with the current height. Let's say that the correct height, 3 m. We can model the walls using this method, but I don't recommend you to use this method. Why? Because first of all, it's a kind of dirty method. We have to close the different areas, sometimes works nicely, but other times I can assure you that we can find travels. Then we have to push poll, as you can see here, we should reverse faces. Sometimes the geometry is glued to another geometry, like it happens at this point. And then we have this line from the bottom to the top of the wall and then we should erase them. So it's a kind of, as I told you, dirty process, we can commit mistakes. And in this case, it is not the best one. What is the best one? The best one is to select our floor plan, our components, and then just look it right bottom. Look, it becomes red. And this is good because now if I use the line tool, I will use the imported geometry just as a template. So I will draw new lines from SketchUp in order to model those walls. So now I have to be a little bit patient, but in the end it will be much more better. Let's do it. I can use the hand tool as well. Line again, zoom in and zoom out all the tools that you already know. This is the most tricky part because you can see that the lines are a little bit messy here. So better to zoom in a lot at this part. Be careful, this is not a straight line. We have here two lines. And once we finished, our area will be able to postpone this area that say 3 m high, just with one movement. We have this line here because as I told you, this is not a straight line. We have two lines, but everything is much more clean here. Now, I can select these walls easily, just by three clicks and make a group, if I want to do the same here, is not gonna be that easy. Because as far as we have some geometry, which is glue, we will select more things, not just our walls, but coming back to our good model, we have the walls perfectly organized in one group. And now we could just take some furnitures, the warehouse or another 3D library and start doing the interior design using that component, which is already blocked as a guide for placing those furnitures correctly. Tech in mind anyways, that this process is the best one in this case, but not always. Actually, at the end of this model, we will do a more complicated exercise in where we will play with the imported AutoCad file in a different way. So I hope that you liked this class and I will see you in the next episode. 76. Export jpg: Hello people and welcome to this new class. Inward, we're gonna see how to export a day. This is something that actually we have already seen when we learned about the seams in sketch. We already know that in order to export a J peg, we have to go over File, Export, choose the graphic. But in this class, we will go deeper. So we will work with this model. It is an interior design project about our living room. If I open the tax tray, will see that we have three dogs. They're sitting right now is hidden. I can unhide it easily and we have another tag for the furniture. But let's go to the point. If we want to export a J peg, the first thing that we have to do is to create a scene. So let's create our first lesson. We'll use these options, the camera options. So I hit the position camera and I will choose an attractive point of view, e.g. this one from the South. Once here, I could make some adjustments. I will change the high, high, let's say 1 m, even a little bit less, 0.5 or 0.75. This could be nice. Like if we are lying on the sofa, then I use the I in order to be more precise, I will unhide the serum. And once we're happy with our point of view, I will add a scene, save us a new style is okay, create a sip. The second step will be to be more and more accurate and precise with this sin. So what else can we do here? My first recommendation is to go over a styles. Once here, edit it and check that your profiles are turned off. Look the difference. If I turn on the profiles, many lines will be thicker without any sense. So profiles, and we continue. Next thing which is mandatory is to go over camera and look that here we have three options for the camera, parallel projection, perspective and two-point perspective on these estates when we already have our architecture modeled and we want to export as a PECC, we should select two-point perspective while click on here, maybe you can't appreciate it, but we have erased that third vanishing point, which makes our vertical straight lines to be inclined a little bit in a normal colonic perspective. So when we are using this two-point perspective, our vertical lines are completely straight and this will give our image more quality. So if we wanted to add this new change to our sin, we should go over the thumbnail right button, update a sin. The next thing that we have to take in mind is their field of view. If I go again over camera, will find here this option called field of view. I will click on it. And then on the measurement bar we can read 60 degrees. This is the normal human field of view. Actually it means 60 degrees. It side. We can play with this value and make it a little bit wider or more narrow depending on our project. In this case, 60 degrees is okay. So just make sure that, that value is on your sketch. Once I am sure about my field of view, I would add just a little bit the normal point of view because I think that maybe here is more attractive. Pay attention because now I have lost my two-point perspective. So I should go over camera two-point perspective again and then update the lesson again. The last thing I can play with is the shadows. In this case, as far as I am in an interior space, I will not turn on them. But if you are working in an exterior space, I highly recommend you to active the cellulose. So let's say that we are ready to export our day Beck File, Export 2D graphic. Once here, we should select the root and the name of our file. Let's call it interior design, living room. If I expand, this window, will find different formats for our file, PDF, EPS, JPEG, PNG. So let's choose J peg. Then look, because here we have these options. I will click on it and then this window pops up. And here we find very interesting options. The first option is about the image size. We can use the view size, which has these measurements, this width and this high, the image will be quiet, panoramic. And then we have this option called line scale multiplier. By default, this multiplier is three. We can change it if we click this option, use View sides. But if I unclick this option, then I can change the line of scalar multiplier, which is quite interesting because thanks to this tool, we will be able to play with the thickness of our edges. So I will make some proofs in order to show you the difference. The first one will be this value three. If I keep going, I find this another level called rendering. We always have to click anti-alias we are talking here about to improve the smoothness of our MDS. And then we have this another option, J Beck compressor. We should go over the maximum quality when we are happy, Let's click. Okay, so here, in order to be more organized, I will add the value three. For the line scale multiplier. I will create a new folder in where I will save the different images. Let's call it living room JPEG export. If we go over this folder now, and I open this J peg, here, we have our result. As you can see, the thickness of our edges are quiet, Let's say visible. Let's do another proof now, changing that value. And instead of three, we will type in one. So again in SketchUp, one-click or minus sin File export to the graphic. I select the same folder, same name, but this time, instead of 31 options, here, I type in one, the rest of the things are the same, Okay? Export. And I will do another proof with 0.5 times to check the results. This is our first image. The line is scalar multiplier is three and we can check the edges. Now, the multiplier is one and we can perceive a huge difference. And now the multiplier is 0.5. So this is up to you. I like the lines to be very thin. So maybe the best option is this 10.5 or this one. We can say that the image is already done. On the other hand, once you are here, the logical step is to go to our rendering software and try to get an imperialistic image. Here, I saw you an example of this living room. This render was done in Lumiere won, which is my favorite rendering software. Actually you have aluminum cores available in my profile. So time to say goodbye. Now, I hope that you like the class and I'll see you in the next episode. 77. Exercise: modern auditorium: Hello guys and welcome to this new episode where we're going to build an auditorium based in some floor plans. They can from AutoCad, this is the final result, so we have some work ahead, but this will be a very good chance in order to practice many of the skills that we have learned recently. So once we are in our new file in SketchUp, let's go over File Import. I want you to go to the thorium folder. And here we have to select our AutoCad files. Then these gut auditorium file will pop up. We will select it. Just make sure in options that the unit is meters. Accept the file in AutoCad was made in meters. So here we have to select meters as well, then import. We find here some information about these new geometry. We can close it. And here we have the floor plans and one elevation about our building. If we focus on the outliner, we can check that everything is a component. So the first thing that we can do is to explode it right bottom explode. If we continue checking the outliner, we can see that we don't have any more groups or components. So everything here is just free geometry. Next thing is to open the tax tray. Here we have some tags in Spanish, sorry for that, but we will translate them immediately. So if we start from down to up, we have here interior. Actually, we will not work on interiors. So we can delete this stuck right button, delayed dark, and we don't want this first option, assign another tag. Actually, we want to delayed these entities. So delayed entities. Okay. And then I will delayed as well all these floor plans because they are related with the interior of the building, then we have what is called in Spanish Harlem. We would call it ceilings. We can say if I hide and unhide the ceilings, we can see that we are talking about this floor plans. Then we have this one, what is called the romantic Spanish. We will change the name. This means enclosures. Then we have these auxiliary attack. If I hide it, we can check that it is not very important. We will work mainly with these floor plans. Anyways, let's leave it like that. Let's start modelling. The first thing that we have to do is to create the surfaces that we want to extrude, right? Because here we have just lines. So we can go one by one using the SketchUp tools, e.g. the line tool. Then draw this line. We have this surface already done and then go to this next one. But this will take us a lot of time. Here. We will use a plugin that we have already learned for making faces. I remember it was part of this J H s power bar. You will find it here. Phase finder. There are more plugins with this skill, like the one called tools on surveys from fructose-6. Anyways, we will use this one. So we can select all of our floor plans altogether and say phase finder, just in one movement, we have everything done once here. Don't forget to delete this face and this face because we don't need them. They are not part of the building. Next step is about to extrude our faces. And here we find the same situation as before. I mean, we can use the push-pull tool of a SketchUp. I will type in 3.7. This is the high for these walls. And I can repeat this same process over and over again, but we have many, many faces. So we can save time if we use another plugin, this time, the one called forensics joined Post poll. And to be more precise, this blue option called joint postpone. Thanks to this tool, I can select all the faces together, hit the tool, one-click unreleased, and I type in the new measure, 3.7 Enter. We have to wait a little bit, but everything is known perfectly. We exit the tool and I will use it again with the ceilings. So I select all the geometry joined Post poll, one click and release. And the offset here is 0.3. And once it's done, time to exit the tool, we can check that we have that extrusion already done. Nice. Now, next step, don't forget that everything now is pretty geometry and this is not good at all. So we have to organize our geometry in groups or components. This time, I will use components because it is easier to call them with names, and then we will get a better organization. So e.g. I. Select this first was of the first floor. I say that I want to create a component and I type in here name, floor. One f x1 create. If I open the outliner, we can check here the name. Let's repeat the same process with this second floor. Right button, Make Component F to create the same here, right button Make Component f, three, create. And last time, right button may component F for Create. Now let's do it with the ceilings. I will select this geometry red button may component, and this time I will call it C in capital letters, one, ceiling, one, create another time. Make Component C to create one more time. S3, create. And finally, Make Component C for Create. Once this is done and our geometry cannot glued to each other easily, then I will join the different elements in the correct order. So here we have the walls of the first floor and here it's ceilings. So I will move it from this point, this specific point to this, another specific point. Again, the same process with these walls. I hit letter M, the circuit. First click on here, second click on here. Now the ceiling, I select the ceiling of the second floor, letter M, first point, zoom out, zoom in, second, click third floor letter M. I select the correct point, and I move that flow to my building. Ceiling, letter m, correct point. Zoom out and zoom in. Here we are. And finally, I select this fourth floor and I place it here again, the same with the last ceiling. We have already a 3D model with all the walls and the ceilings altogether. Once on this stage, it is time for the Windows. And in order to do this, windows will use a dynamic component. The name is window dynamic component. So I can select it and drag and release. Here we have our window. And the good thing about these dynamic component is that we will not lose the proportions of the frame. We can scale it, but the proportions of the frame will remain still. So once it is selected, I will choose the correct spot. I will rotate it. One-click, second click, click, time to scale it first in this horizontal dimension, and then I will scale it in this vertical diamonds. You can check how our frame remains always with the same proportions. I will make a copy. I will place it here because this window has a different size scale. Again, I choose the correct graph point and I have a new window. Now. I will make another copy for this, another window with a different size. We have three different sizes of Windows. Not more. I select the correct graph points, and here we are. Now, I will have to copy and rotate. This window is the same as here and the same as here. Well, once we have all the windows correctly placed in our model, now it's time for checking this elevation. I will click View, and here you can check that we have one wall inclined. The inclination is six degrees, and here we have a reference at 1.68 meter. So if I go over my model, again, I go over camera perspective because I changed to parallel projects. I go over the correct fossa. This is the correct fossa. Then look because here we don't have some lines. In order to repair this, I can select everything and go over this tray called soft and reduce here the angle between normals, let's say six degrees. Now, those lines appear because those planes are not coplanar. So it is correct. Then I was saying that we have to cut this wall with that inclination, right? So first thing that I can do is to go over these elements, select the area, right button, Align, View, then camera, parallel projection. I can go out from that component and I'll use the guideline tape measure tool. One click on here, and our reference was at 1.68 m right center. Then I can select the protractor. One-click first click on this point, second point on here to set the axis. And then I precise the angle six degrees. Once here, I will use another plugin, this time the one called sorrow, too. This one. So I will hit it one click on here, I hold down Control key, and second click on any point of this guideline. It seems that nothing happened. But if I orbit, I can see that we have here a cut. First of all, again, camera perspective. And now I can go inside each component and select all the leftovers and delete them and look here because if I go over view component, heavy, hide rest of model, when I go into a component, the rest of the model is hidden and I can work easy. So now I can select this geometry and delayed them. Look that we lost these phases, but we will repair that altogether late. So go out from this component inside this one, and I repeat the same process. The same here. Again, here with the ceiling. I'm finally here. And here. One, we have our cut perfectly done. We have to recover those phases. If I select all the geometry together and I hit the same tool as in the beginning phase finder. Everything is fixed nicely and we can delete our guidelines. Now. Once this is done, it is time for doing the glass makers of the main facade. Let's start with this one. We could use the line tool, one click on Clear, another click on Clear. Let's go to this corner and another corner, and we close our rectangle. Here. We have our surface. We can select faces and edges. Right button Make component, let's call it glass one, Create. Now, I will go inside. I will select this line, letter M. I will make a copy here, placed exactly on the opposite edge. And then it's split bar six, enter Spacebar, one-click outside. Let there be for the paint bucket tool, I hold Alt key and I steal the glass of the dynamic component and one-click from outside. If I want to be more accurate, I can go in again. I'll go over view component edit and I will not use this option. Hi, rest of model. Now I want to unhide the model because my idea is to select this horizontal line and make some copies. One here, another one here, and the last one here, spacebar, one-click outside. It looks nice. I can select it. Maybe I can change the position of the axis, red button, change axis, one, click on here, and other polygon here. We go here. And then I will move it a little bit along this direction. Let's go now with this. Another facet we can this time use the rectangle tool, make components. Thus to create. Once here, I will go inside the component. I will select this vertical line, letter M. I make a copy placed on the opposite. Let's split bar six, enter Spacebar, one-click outside letter B, add key, and I apply a material. Once this is done, I can select the component from outside and make some copies, not one but two. And here we are. Let's go now with this part of the building for abductor workflow, I would change the position of the dinner or axis because here, as you can check, We are not parallel with the unit axis, so it is better to make a change. So one click on Axis tool, I will use this point as our reference point, second point and click here. Once this is done, I can use the Rectangle tool easily. I will support myself with the left arrow key. Good. I will select this edge. We'll make a copy and a split bar six. I will repeat now the same process on the other side, line tool, one click, click. I can lock the axis here and close my surface. I reverse faces. And again, I will select that in order to make a copy and split bar six. Once this is done, I will select this glass maker and holding Shift key, this glass maker as well. Right button, Make Component. Class three, Create letter B. One click both pluses half. Now the correct material, once this is done, I can make some copies. The first one place here, arteries to now we have these three glasses missing. I can change the axis again. One click on here, one click on here to here, rectangle tool, first, click, second click, Reverse phases. I select this line, letter M. I make a copy and a split bar this time that say three. Once this is done, three clicks, right? Pattern, Make Component, glass for create, clutter, be one-click from the outside letter M. Let's make a copy on this upper floor and another copy on the ground floor. As far as this glass has to be smaller, I would use the scale tool x-ray, and I will add my glass to this space key. One-click outside. I turned off the X-ray right button on any of the axis. If I take the result, I can see that here I committed a mistake because on the ground floor, we don't have this glass maker. It is a kind of corridor like that. And here we can maybe make a movement along this direction. Let's check the measure here, 0.60. So I will repeat the same distance that m, 0.6 and everything looks nice. We can delete this geometry. We don't need them anymore. We can select all the model and place it on the origin. This is a good habit. We can go over ducks and erase these three tax. They don't make sense anymore. So 123, right button, delay that. And this time we want to assign another tag, the one called untagged. If I open the styles tray, you will see that our edges have the profiles on so we can turn them off in order to have a better view about our model. And once all of these things are done, we can say that we have finished to model this auditorium. I really encourage you to try to do it by yourself. It will help you a lot to master SketchUp because you will be forced to use many of the tools that we have been learning during the course. I say goodbye here, and I will see you in the next episode. 78. Avoiding slowness: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we're going to say, what do we have to do if we want to avoid that, our file becomes slow. I have to say that this is something then euros in SketchUp because it's ketchup has one weakness. In my opinion. It is precisely this thing. It is a software which can not move a lot of polygons. While other softwares like 3D Max or rabbit or something like that, are able to move a lot of polygons. Here in SketchUp, we have a limited amount of them. That means that we cannot use models over and over again if we are not sure about the weight of them, here we have a project about an interior design. And my task here was to take furnitures from different libraries, place them correctly, doing an interior design project, and then afterwards use our rendering software in order to get a photo-realistic image. So we can see here a bed, some pictures, some tables. And the thing is that when I go over my 3D Warehouse and I search for a bed, e.g. bet, and we filter our circuits by popularity, it is paramount that you check the file size. Here we have 24 kb, that is super, super thin file. Remember that I told you a rule which says that an SketchUp file is more or less the same as a human being in terms of the way. So if your file in total is more or less 80 kilos, kilos is the same as omega as you are on the limit. If you exceed 100 mw, then the file is going to become as low. So under this rule, when you download something like e.g. this bit, be conscious about these file size, 24 kb is less even than one Mega. So as I told you, is super thin escape. Let's check the second one. The second one is 6 mb, much more heavier but still acceptable. The next tip is about this types. If I open the styles tray and I go over edit edges, by default, you will find that your file is used in a style with this option called Profiles active. As we already know, this means that some edges will be repeated in our file that will make our MDS thicker. But in terms of polygons, it will increase dramatically the number of them. So my suggestion here is, of course, to turn off profiles always don't use them. The drawing, the model will be cleaner and a SketchUp will be able to move our geometry much more faster. Talking about the styles, I would like to remark as well that we have always this option available called styles. By default, we will be using normally this option called sided with textures. But the tip here is that if you are finding problems with your file, I mean, it becomes a slow. You are not able to move your graphics correctly, then you can change to another style option, e.g. this one, just say that inward, we will lose the textures of our materials. We will keep the colors of those materials. But as far as we are losing textures as e.g. on this picture, we have less information on our model right now. And we can orbit and move the geometry again faster. So we can work using this style mode. Just say that. And just in the last moment when we are creating our scenes or we want to export our day back, then, we recover these upsilon, say that with textures, the next step to avoid our five, to become slow is to work correctly with our tax. This time, I will go over the tax tray, I will expand it. And here you can take the different decks that I use here on this file. The dip here is to create a tag for the heaviest models. Normally, the heaviest models are the furnitures or the vegetation in case that we have it. As you can check in this file, I don't have vegetation, but I do have furnitures. So if we are having problems with our graphic card, we can turn off the furniture stack, then we can orbit much more better. Keep working and turn on the furniture's again, just when I need it. The fourth tip is about to go over window model info. And then once here, we can find an option called statistics. If I hit it, we can count here all the information about our geometry separated in different levels at these faces, components, guides, groups, et cetera, et cetera. The interesting thing is down here where we can find two options. First one is called birds and use. And it will delete all the materials and the components which currently are not being used in our model. So by doing this, we will decrease. The size of our file and we will be able as well to move our graphics more rapid. The second option called fixed problems, it is related with informatics staff. Time to time is convenient to use this obscene in order to avoid this kind of failures in where suddenly our SketchUp file stops working, switched off or strange things like that in mind that this option called birds and use, as I told you, is about components and materials. So we can purge them individually if we move over components. Once here, I hit the little house In model and then all the components that I have used on this model from the very beginning till now are going to appear here. E.g. this boat, I don't remember now, but probably I downloaded this boat. I made some tries in order to place it, but finally, I decided to not use it. The boat, the component is still on our library and it is taking some space. I mean, it is increasing the size of our file. If I go over details and I say birds and use, then the bot and all the different components, which on this library, but not in the model, will be eliminated. I click on here. It takes some time. And finally, the boat is related as many others and the size of our file has decreased. We can do the same. If I go over materials in model, it happens exactly the same as with the components we have here. All the materials that we have used from the very beginning in this file. If we go over the details, we can say birds and use, remember that if we go over window modelling for, and I use this obscene birds and use we will birds components and materials at the same time. The next tip is about the use of the setups. We have to be aware of the fact that if we are using the shadows and I will turn them on, our file, will become much more slower. It is logic because as you can imagine, when I orbit the camera, then the computer has to calculate again the position of those saddles. And then if our file is big, it can consume a lot of time and resources. So here the advice is to work always with the saddles off and just use them when you really need it normally when you are creating your essence. The next tip is about the scenes. I will open this thing straight here. You can check that I have three estates. And my advice here is to don't use a lot of scenes in your files, just the ones that you really need. Why? Because always, when you create Anniston, you are increasing the size of your file. Take in mind that e.g. this is sin, one taken from a very high point of view in order to have something like a meeting point. When I am lost orbiting around the walls. Then I hit C Number one, I am in a very good position again to place my furniture or whatever. Well, any sin if I scroll down, has normally all of these properties included. This means that we are saving just in this scene, the camera location, the hidden geometry, the hidden objects, they're visible tax dissection planes, the style and ****, the shadow settings and the axis location. All of these properties are saved with this sin. So imagine that we have a lot of sense, 1087, our file is saving again these properties with different values, of course, then our file will increase. So the tip here is to use just the scenes that you really need, not more. The last step is what is called proxies. In order to explain this better, I will open a toolbar called VRA objects. We re, you have to know that it is a rendering software which works as a plugin here in the scatter, and it will allow us to make renders of our model. It has different toolbars. One of them, this one called we re objects, in where we can find these two options, Export proxy, import, proxy. We will use them mainly with trees, because trees have a lot of geometry and we want to reduce them. So if I go over Window 3D Warehouse, I type in three. I download e.g. this one, 2 mb download. Yes, I placed these three here in the garden. And if I zoom in, you can check that there are a lot of polygons, right? Well, it might mean that we don't have to use just one tree, but a lot of them because we are modelling a park, e.g. I. Can assure you that our scatter file is going to become a slower and slower. So thanks to this option, once the tree is selected and I hit Export proxy, first of all, we have to define the file path. The name will be three 3D, okay, let's say that they want to save it in my desktop. Save, then I will click on Export. Then our tree has changed dramatically because we have reduced a lot the number of polygons. We can say that this tree now is much more smaller, so we can make many copies and our graphic card will not suffer moving these geometric at the same time, when we render an sin with this tree inside, the appearance will be perfect, will be as the tree in its previous state. So I think that this tip can help us a lot if we want to use VRA for our renderings. Anyways, in the next episode, We'll talk deeper about what is the best rendering software in my opinion. And I will compare we re with Lumia. Furthermore, we have here another option called import proxy, or we re, imagine now that we are working in another SketchUp file and we want to import that tree already as a proxy. Well, take in mind that we saved already a file in the desktop, so I can import that file directly, is this one called three 3D. This is the extension. We are a mess. I select it, I click on Open and the tree will come already as a proxy. So the thing here is that you can create a proxy library in your own computer. And this way you will have a better workflow. With this last tip, we have arrived to the end of this class. I hope that you liked it a lot and I will see you in the next episode. 79. Best rendering softwares: Vray vs Lumion: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we're going to compare the two most important softwares in terms of rendering in market nowadays, in my opinion, one of them is we re, and the other one is called Lumia. The first feature that we're going to compare is the SketchUp compatibility. If we are talking about compatibility, in my opinion, be re is a little bit better than Lumia. The reason is because we re is incorporated into a SketchUp as a normal plugging. This allow us to use it so easily while we are working inside SketchUp. On the other hand, lumen is a program separated from a SketchUp into which our models can be imported. Furthermore, if we decide to work in the array, we don't need an excessively powerful computer for the program to run. Well. On the other hand, Lumia really needs a powerful computer, especially a very good graphic card. So maybe you even cannot use it in your current computer. Finally, we re, is available for Mac and lumen nowadays is still not available for Mac. If I jump now into SketchUp, you can see here we re toolbar. Once it is already in start, we have three toolbars. Actually, we re for a SketchUp, we re objects and we re utilities. We want to render e.g. this cube. We should go over this third option, render. Then this window pops up, and here we have our first random. On the other hand, as I already told you, lumen is an independent software. So we need to run the software out from a sketch up. Here we are in the lumen interface, which is linked with our SketchUp file. You can see here the same queue. The good thing that we have here in SketchUp in order to increase the compatibility with Lumia is a plugin called Live sync. It is this one. Lumi on live sync. You can get it for free from the extension warehouse, Window, extension warehouse, and here you will find it easily. The good thing about this plugin is that our SketchUp model will be synchronized with our aluminum file. So if I click on Start live sync and I make some changes here on this file, let's apply e.g. a. Material, this brick wall. I will select all the cube. Let her be one-click. Here we are. Then I have to save the file. Save. If I go now over my Lonian file, the changes will appear here automatically. If I didn't have that plugging in stock in my sketch file, I should rephrase the link from here, from Lumia, and then the changes will appear again, but that process should be done once here again in Lumia. Anyways, I will live in your attach documents of discourse, both softwares, we re and aluminum In order that you can install them easily and for-free. The next aspect that I would like to have into consideration is the quality of the renderings. I will say that we re, is a little bit better accordingly to this aspect. But just in case that you really want to get super hyper-realistic image and you really are required to achieve that high level in your render, then we re, is your software. But in case that you are looking for getting very good, render photorealistic as well. But you really don't need to be exactly as it is the real-world, then lumen is perfectly okay. And the good thing is that you can learn it much more easier. Talking about the learning curve, bloomin wins this much because actually it is one of its strengths. It is very intuitive. And after working with it a little bit, after doing a course, after practicing with some projects, you will have spectacular results. I would say as well, that the learning is also fun as it happens we've sketched. On the other hand, ray has greatly improved the interface as well as the learning curve even so, it still has a slow learning curve to have high level results. The next feature is the rendering time. This is something paramount when you are doing a random here, lumen is incredibly good. They're rendering time is really short, and it also has a real time preview of the render that you are doing while you work. This is something powerful and it makes your life easier, intuitive, while it gives you a lot of joy while you are working. On the other hand, this is not happening with we re the render time. It can be very, very long. It does not have a previous preview. So the only thing that we can do to achieve that preview is to make low quality renders before the final one. Here aluminum wins. Clearly, this aspect is actually related with the next one, call videos or animations. You'd have to keep in mind that for doing an animation, we need around 25 normal renders per second. So imagine the time that we will need in the array for doing a 1 min animation. We need a lot of time for doing just one render. Imagine if we need to render 200 or 300. On the contrary, thanks to that short rendering time Illumina ion, they VE degeneration is really attractive and easy to do. Furthermore, Lumia has a large library of characters, effects, sounds, weather conditions, landscape, environments, etc, etc. Which will help us a lot to increase the quality of our animations. We will be able to introduce fire, waterfalls When etcetera, etcetera. So here we arrive to the final question. Which one do I stay with? We re or nomial? If we count all the points taken from the different features. Sketchup compatibility, quality of renders, the learning curve, rendering time and be videos or animations. We re, has 19/25 points and Lumiere has 23/25 points. So in my opinion, luteum is the best rendering software currently. Of course, this is my opinion. And as I told you, it depends a lot on what are the requirements of your future renders. But talking in general, I would say that I prefer Lumia. Actually, it is the program that I have been using for a long time in order to render my models. Here you can see some examples of the most recent projects modelled in SketchUp and render it in Lumia. I would like to let you know that I have aluminum course in where we will learn everything about lumen from beginner to expert with a model, which I'm sure that it is very familiar to you because it is the Barcelona Pavilion, the one that we have been modelling during all these SketchUp course. During the course, we will learn everything about this software and we will finish it during an animation like this one. So time to say goodbye now. And I hope to see you in the next episode of these SketchUp course. 80. Barcelona Pavillion 9. Furnitures: Hello guys and welcome to this new class, where we're going to continue working on our Barcelona Pavilion. In the last episode, I remind you that we worked on this part of the building with the toilets and with this binds. This time, we will import here some different furnitures. So first of all, I want you to open the file of the main entrance call nor Barcelona Pavilion. Once the file is open, you will have to take both doors. They are dynamic components. We can check if the file is ready to be used in our building. I made some adjustments in order to make your life easier. You copy and paste these doors in our file. So we select them, Edit Copy. We'll come back to our file and edit paste. We select the correct paste point. Here it is, it matches perfectly. Let's use the dynamic component bar. First option, trigger. It, opens nicely and nicely. Good. Then let's make a copy in this, another position in where we have as well, these two doors click here and better here. We can take that in this position, the doors are not wide enough, so we need to make some adjustments. Let's do it. I will move this left door to this position. Right door exactly here. We have this space. So the best option is to draw a line in order to mark the mid point. Then I will use a plugin, the one called Frieda scale. I will select this component. Box is stretching because I don't want to lose the proportions of the frame. The same thing with the right door box is stretching till the midpoint spacebar eraser. And here we are. We can check that it continues working nicely. If you are wondering why these doors are not bigger now, as far as they are copies of this, another doors, they are all copies. We have two components, the left door and the door. It is because I made this change on the scale from the outside of the component. I didn't go inside the box, but I changed the scale from the outside. I explained this when we talked about the components. We can make changes from the outside on the scale, on the materials, and they will not modify the other copies. Time to open now the file called furnitures, then we select these four objects, edit copy. We come back to our File, Edit, Paste. Let's place the four of them. Here. I will close the Fredo scale tool and now it's time to place those elements on the correct spots. Let's start with this door. I will select it first point, zoom out, zoom in. It matches perfectly. Trigger tool. We will make a copy. Rotation tool, 90 degrees movement. Here we are. Trigger. Finally, let's make another copy for that. Another door. Again, we have to rotate the door. Letter M, I orbit. I placed the door, their trigger tool, and here we are. Space key. And let's go now with the static. I select the statue first point on the basement to Mao. And assuming here in this position of the swimming pool, more or less here could be okay. But if I want to be more precise, I can go over camera, parallel projection, top view. And then from here, I can change the coordinates much more easier, right? I can use the image now as a template so I expand the tax tray and unhide the image. Let's move a little bit our statue to here. Now it seems okay, I hide the image again. And then now I have to be sure that we are in the current high. So I will select this specific point. I will move now along the blue axis, and I will constrain that blue axis. And I will select e.g. this point at this corner. To be sure, we'll turn on the X-ray, one-click at this corner, turn off x-ray. And now it seems, okay. Base came to view again. And let's place now this, this table and these chairs I could unhide again, the limits turn on x-ray even better if I use this time the wireframe option. Then with this information, I will select first this table. I will move along the red axis, then green axis, still here, more or less. I will make a copy. I will place it here. Another copy. I will delete this table, this copy, because I want to select this and make two copies at the same distance. One here, Arthur is two. Here we're now I will select the chair. Again. I will move the chair using the axis. One here. Then I will make a copy another chair here. I will make another copy. One place here, or maybe a little bit closer to the table. And another copy on the other side of the table, more or less here. Space key. These elements are different. They are an, a specific term that we will have to download from the warehouse. So again, I will hit say that with textures as a display mode, I can change the camera perspective again, turn off x-ray, and here we have our results. I have to hide aim at Surrey, but everything looks nice. Let's take now that served from the warehouse so we can practice how to search a specific object from that library. We should go over Window 3D Warehouse. And here I would type in church, barcelona. We can filter our shirts by popularity. It seems that this one, the fourth one, has some material suppliers. So let's check its properties. The file size is the most important thing for megabytes is okay. So let's say download directly into our sketch, our model. Yes, and here we have our chirp. It looks nice. Let's analyze it on the outliner. It is a component. The component has one group inside. That group has more different groups inside exactly four. So if we want to change the materials, e.g. let's say that we want our new chair with this same materials. First of all, letter B, Paint Bucket. I hold down Alt key and I still this material. Then let's go to our new chair. I will select the correct group, this one, first letter B, one-click from outside, then space key, I select this and other one letter b, again, the same. Here. It seems that we have some elements still in black. I select them letter B, one-click from outside. Letter B again, We'll still the material of the legs, the space key again, I select these legs. Look that they are free geometry. They are not inside any group. So I can say three clicks, letter B and I apply the new material space key, one-click outside, one-click outside, one-click outside anterior. Once I am happy with my new feature, Let's place it correctly. So again, camera, parallel projection, top view, I will go over tax and I will unhide the image. Wireframe. Good. My chair is selected. Rotation tool one click another trick. 90 degrees, letter M. I move my chair along the red axis, and this time I will change the position. I prefer to place the chair here next to this glass maker, and I will make a copy. Here we are. Again. I have to change the display mode, the camera, and unhide the image. It looks nice. So we can finish the class here. We are very close to the end of this work project. So I encourage you to follow my steps and keep practicing and I hope to see you in the next episode. 81. Barcelona Pavillion 10. Escenes: Hello guys and welcome to this new class. Inward, we will continue working with our Barcelona Pavilion. First of all, we'll polish up some details, and then finally, we will create some sense of our buildings. So here in the toilets that there are some windows missing in those holes, right? The easiest thing that we can do is to take these elements and make a copy, place it here, and then use the scale tool in order to don't lose the proportions of the frame. So Fred or scale tool, then we use the box stretching tool. Let's use it first in this vertical dimension. Here we are. Space key. Let's use it again. Now, turning on the x-ray first along these horizontal dimension to this, Let's turn off x-ray. Everything looks nice. Then I will make a copy. I will use this corner as a reference. One copy here, it seems that the length of the hole is not the same. No problem. Box stretching again, here we are a space key, perfect. Now I will select e.g. this element, I will make a copy. I will rotate this element 90 degrees. Here we are, letter M. I will select the mid point, zoom out, zoom in. Here we are. Again, I have to use the box stretching tool, X-ray, this Space key. Here we are. Now we have the windows and it is missing this door, right? So we can take one door from here, e.g. this one, I will make a copy, zoom out swimming, and I will place it here. Remember that this is a dynamic component. So as far as maybe I have to make some changes on it. I will make this component unique. Then I will rotate, first of all, the component, and I will place it again in the correct spot. If I use the trigger tool, we can check how is doing the door the rotation, maybe we can make the best of it. Yes. Move the door here and using the box is stretching tool at this dimension to this space key. And here we are trigger. We can leave it like that, although it seems that the glass is different, right? This more transparent and these new door. So letter B, Paint Bucket, I steal that material. I go inside my component. I select the glass letter B. Here we are. Let's go now with the roof. I will unhide the roof. You should know that we have here a whole, so let's do it. I will hide the rules again, and this time for doing this, I will use the guideline. So in order to be precise, I have to zoom in a lot. Here. I have my first guideline. I want another here and another one at this corner. And finally here, once I have these guidelines, I unhide the roofs looked up. Now I have this references. So I can click this roof, go inside this group. This is pretty geometry already rectangle tool, one click. Secondly, I select the correct area and I posted, I received the message on face. Here. I have my whole already wrong space key Escape. I can relate these guidelines and we can take any of these windows. I will place it firstly here, then I will rotate it one click and hold down. I want the product term to be green. So I click on the Left Arrow key, I released second click, click. Now I can place it in a more accurate way, let's say here. And I can scale it as well using the box into first in this dimension here, and then another dimension to this space key. Everything looks nice, so we are done with the details. I can close the further scale tool, the dynamic component where I would place it here and look because I will hide the roofs, because I will add a new tab called furnitures. Then I will select all the furniture's using the Shift key. I will move all of them to this new tag called furniture. So if I hide this duck, I don't have furniture. Visible anymore, do more things that we have to do time now for our final, since phi expand the scene stray, I have some of them. I will write all of them and we will do it from zero. So let's start here. At this entrance. I would use the AI tool that's roofs on. I will orbit a little bit and this image looks quite attractive, right? I will add the same and then I will work for make it better and better. So firstly, camera, two point perspective, then I will click the look around tool I high 2.38, let's say 1.8 better here, camera field of view, 35 degrees. Let's change it. And I will type in 60. Enter again, look around tool again, Camera two point perspective. Once we're happy with the result right button on our sin, update sin. Now let's work with the shadows. But first, remember that if I unhide the limits, we have here the position of the node. We have a plugin called solar north. This one, in order to set correctly the position of the North, if I click this first, awesome, We can see that the node is aligned with the green axis. By default, the North in SketchUp is always the same as the positive green axis. So if we want to change it, Let's click on Set North, and then let's follow this arrow. Here we are. Now we have this line in orange color pointing the correct direction. I can hide the image again. I can go again over my scene number one, I will turn on the saddles and I will change these values in order to get an attractive image. Once I am happy again, right button update, it looks like Around measure, but we can still improve it a little bit. In my opinion, the sky is too bright to blue, so we could go over styles, Edit Background settings, and here we can change the color, either the background or the sky. I will change a little bit the background as well. Let's select these different gray and maybe the sky, Let's change it. Maybe we have to make some proofs, something like that. E.g. okay, I think now it is better. I'm not so happy with a field of view here. So I'll go over camera field of view again. And I will say 45. I will assume in that say 1.8, I will change the position of the sun a little bit. Maybe here could be nice. Right button, update, update here, this window pops up, warning me about that. I didn't save the changes I did with the newest style. So I will say that I want to save that changes as animus style update a sin. I have saved already a new style. I go over a style, select the house. This third one, simple as Title III is the new one, that it is already saved. Let's make another scene. We'll orbital a little bit, look around more or less here could be nice. Camera, two-point perspective. I can play again with the position of the sun. And once I am happy with the result, again, add another one. This time from the interior, I would place myself here, look around, how to be careful with that pillar. Look around here, could be nice. Camera, two point perspective. Let's change the saddles. Maybe here are the same. And now finally, let's make some general views. One, e.g. from here we can say isometric view orbital, it'll wait, camera, parallel projection. And we can create a scene with the roofs and another scene without the roof. So I'll go over tax, I will hide the roofs. Maybe here, I can even turn off the saddles and again soon. So I have a C Number one here at the entrance. Has seen number two here from this side of the building, and the scene number three from the interior, looking at the statue. Finally, we made some general views from the outside. You see in the parallel projects you're on camera, one with the roofs, with saddles and another one without the roofs and without saddle. So time to say goodbye now, and in the next class, we will see how to export our sins in different formats as date peg or PDF. 82. Barcelona Pavillion 11. Export: Hello guys and welcome to this last class of this work project in where we will export our sins in different formats. In the previous episode, we prepared all this seems, so they are already here and then it is the correct moment to select e.g. let's start with a thin number, one double-click. And then we should go over File export to the graphic. Once here, we should name it. And the most important option here is to select the correct format for our file. Look that we have here different images options as the PECC or TIF, or p and d. Using these formats, we will rasterize the image and just keep in mind that the apec is a compressed file in where we will not be able to keep transparencies. And on the other hand, p and d does not compress the image. So the quality will be a little bit better and it keeps the alpha channel in order to save the transparencies. Normally apply it on our backgrounds. This option tiff is more of the same, allow us to keep the transparency as well. So imagine that I select PNG, then I go over options. We know already this window, we can control the image size. And we have this interesting option call line scale multiplier in order to adjust the thickness of our lines. And here is where we find the option called transparent background. However, if I go over Export 2D graphic and I select J peg, the upper part of this menu is exactly the same, but we will not be able to control the transparency of the background. We have this another option called David Beck compression, which should be always at its maximum quality. There isn't a specific class explaining this window now very deep way in where we did different examples using this line scale multiplier. So this time we will just say that here we have 0.5, we'll use the view size. Then the line scan multiplier has changed. I unclick this option and again 0.5 here, okay, and export. If I open this file, we can check the result. The image looks in general and quite nice. Then we should repeat this process with every sin once we have finished to export all of our sins in the apec, this is the result. We can open the first one, go to the next one, and then play with these images in different softwares. Maybe we want to make a presentation in PowerPoint or in InDesign, or just send them by email. But here we have all of them separated into different date back files coming back to sketch up, if I go over File Export again, and this time when I go over to the graphy, I select the option PDF file. The name will be again Barcelona Pavilion. And I go over options. Here we find different options about the drawing sites. They look a little bit confusing because then we can mark on or off these other options like so profiles. Of course we don't want them in our PDF, extend edges. We don't want to extend SDS neither, and so on. To be honest, in my opinion, we should not export our SketchUp file into PDF. And why not? Because we will not be able to achieve what really matters. We will not be able to create a multi-page PDF. All of our sins together in the same file, but we will get just one page for each scene. And then we will have to repeat the process as it happened with the apex. But this is not the main reason. The main reason is that we would lose the textures of our images. This PDF will vectorize all the limits, so the lines will be quiet, Chris, but the textures will be completely lost. I will show you, I will press. Okay, and if I go now to my folder, here we have our PDF and once it is already open, you can check, cow, we have lost all the textures. Now. There are just colors. We have just one bates. The lines are quite sharp. That is okay, but it is not worthwhile at all. So my suggestion here in case that you want to create a PDF using your different scenes is to export them as they beg, as we already did, and then use Acrobat Pro in order to create that multi-page file PDF. This is one solution. The other one is once we are here in Sketch tab again, is to send our model to lay out. Layout is another software which comes with SketchUp when we installed it. And it will help us a lot to create presentations. From there, we will be able to create a very sophisticated PDF. Anyways, we will learn about layout in the next episodes. So time to say goodbye now, congratulations because you have finished this work project, but the course is still not finished. So I will see you in the next episode. 83. Updates Sketchup 2022: Hello guys and welcome to this new class. Inward, we're going to see the new update of the new version of SketchUp, Version 2022. As it happens normally with a SketchUp, the changes are not quiet big, but we have few of them which deserve to be told. So we will focus just on the most important ones. The first thing is that here we can find a new tool called shirt schizo. If I click on it, this new bar will appear. And from here, we can search for any tool or commands, e.g. let's type in move I, type in m over v. Here it appears the move command, I can click on it and I have my command already pressed. The same happens with any extension. Imagine that we want to search for the plugin called sonar nodes. We type in solar north and there are no matches. This is because as this is a new version, I didn't download already that plugin. Let's do it. Extension, extension warehouse. Once here, solar north, I installed what plugging in these new SketchUp. Once the plugin is installed, if I use again this search tool, I type in solar, solar north appears immediately here. So in my opinion, SketchUp is very intuitive. All the panels on windows are easy to find, but if you are in trouble, you can always use this new tool, escape and let's jump to the next feature. The next interesting feature of this new version is the tool called Lasso Select. Now, thanks to it, I can make as an axiom in a very easy way. Imagine that I have a lot of copies of this guy. One here, one here, another one here, another one here, and one here. Thanks to these new selection tool, I can make an organic figure in order to select my objects easily. Cool, right, unrelated with this last explanation, there is another feature of an old tool which has improved dramatically. I'm talking about the Copy tool. You have just seen how I copied this guy. Few times. I had to select my entity, Move tool, tap, Control key, and then make a copy. But once I have finished that copy, I have to tap again, Control key again. First click, second click for the end position. Now with this version, if I select one entity Move tool and I tap Control key twice, then a new icon appears on the corner, which means that when I am making copies, I don't need to stop and start again. I can do it fluently just by clicking over and over again. So it is much more easier right now. The new improvement is related with the tax tray. If I expand this tray, you will find that new two buttons appear here, the one called tac tool and the one called color by tuck. This one actually was hidden inside these details menu now is available from this main menu, which can be very, very useful. But let's go deeper into this first option called dark tool. The first thing is that this option is available as well in the main toolbar. In this position, the name is tagged and the description says apply attack two entities in the model. So first of all, let's create some different tasks. 12345, we have the default dark color on that as usual. And then we have these different tags with these names and with these colors associated with all of them. Currently, all my entities are placed in the default tag, right? In the previous version, if I want it to move one entity to another tag, I had to select that entity. E.g. use this toolbar called tax. This was my favorite method we could use as well, the entity Info tray. But from here, if I expand this window, once my entity he selected, I can move it easily to e.g. tag number four. Nice. Now in this new version, 2022, for doing this task, first of all, I have to select what is my Active Tag currently is tag number four. And then just by clicking this new tool, and then I hover over a new entity like e.g. this one, just one click. And then this guy now has been moved to that tag for, if I want to make sure that this actually happened, then I can use this tool color by tag one, click on it, and I can see the columns associated with each star. Red is the color for tag for. So again, I will say that. My active tag now is D2. Then I click these new tool called dark, and then I just click on the guys that I want to move to that tattoo on here. We're furthermore, as it happens with the materials, if I tap Alt key, I can use the sample paint, but this time in order to steal the attack, or better said, make that the active tag, e.g. this one, the red one tag for one. Click on here and then apply that tag two different entities. One-click, one-click, one click, one-click. Easy, intuitive. It would allow us to have our model much better organized. I think this improvement is powerful, actually. One reminder here, don't confuse the pensive, which means the current tag in where I am drawing right now, with the active tag, which is the tag selected in blue color. Anyways, more things about the ducks. And in case that we want to be faster than we can use the sift key. Yes, one click on Shift key, these three red squares appear next to our tag icon, I select my active tack, Let's say dark one, the green one, and then yes, buy 1-click all the elements of this new entity which is going to be clicked on it will change the tag. So one click on here and Aldrin eventually to finish with this tool, if I place another component on my model, e.g. let's say I make some copies. So I hit Control twice. One copy here, another copy here, another copy here, and another one here. Clearly assuming there is another component. Now I say that my active tag is Back Three, the purple one, I hit the tag tool. If I click on Summary now, just this component will change the tag, right? But if previously I tap Control key, this new icon appears. And then when I hit similar, all the copies of these component will change the tag. So summing up sift key chains, all the entities inside that tack and Control key, change all the copies of that component, more things. The next improvement has to do with the free hand tool in this new version, when I use the free hand, you will see that the curve is much more accurate. In the previous version, our curve was almost polygonal. Here has improved quite a lot. And once I have just finished my curve and the tool is still on, if I hit Alt key, I will increase the number of wrap points of that curve during the curve, more accurate, more organic. And in the contrary, if I hit Control key, I will make that same curve more polygonal. To finish with this class, I would like to talk about the Arc tool. This is a tiny improvement, but actually I like it because it is related with the tangent arcs in this new version, when I want to draw a tangent arc, by default, the arc will be locked at tangent. So just with one click, my arc will be tangent to the previous one. And then I can draw organic curves much more easier if I tap Alt key, I unlocked that tangent mode, and it will be then like we are used to do in that previous version. Finally, but not least, now, I am in a SketchUp 2021. Remember that when we used the parallel projection camera, camera, parallel projection, we used to have problems with the visualization because our model was cut in some points when we orbit, we used to have problems. Here. We can appreciate how our model is cut and the visualization is not good. In order to refresh the model, I used to recommend to hit this command zoom extents. One click on here, and then our model used to recover its normal aspect. If we jump now to this new version, 2022 and we hit the parallel projection view. We will say that in this version, finally, a SketchUp has achieved to fix this problem, congratulation SketchUp, because now our model using the parallel projection is not at all. This is something good and it will make us to be less angry sometimes. So these are all important changes in these new version. You should know that I will always update the course with a new class related with the new versions of a SketchUp. So it means that you will a new video about the version 2023, the same with a 2024, 2025. And so on. This way, you will always be updated and you will not need to look for that information in other places. Time to say goodbye. Now, don't hesitate to leave a comment in case that you have any question. And I hope to see you in the next episode. 84. Updates Sketchup 2023: Hello people and welcome to this new class, or I'm going to tell you the most important updates in the new version sketch of 2023. I have to say that they are not so big, they are not important at all. But still we have something. So let's go for it. The first thing that we can notice is that sketch of 2023 is now able to import it files. This is a very nice step, mostly if you work with it. But the bad new here is that this importer is just available in this sketch up studio version, which is much more expensive than the normal sketchup pro. We can read it here. Import bit files into sketch up in a few clicks. In my opinion, this is quite strange and I think that in the future we will have this importer in Sketchup Pro as well. In case that you have this sketch up studio, you just have to follow these steps. Go to file import and here you will have this possibility file and your model. We'll be here ready to work on it. The next tool which deserves to be mentioned is the new flip tool. We can play the video and we will see how this tool works. Actually is quite simple. We used to use before a plugin in order to do this, for example, the Miro plug in. But now if I come to sketch a 2023, we'll find here in the transformation panel this new tool called flip. So once I select something, I just click on it and these three different planes in different colors will pop up. I just need to click on one of them, let's say the green one. And we can check how our figure is flipping along that direction. If I draw, for example, a cube, let's extrude it. Now, I will draw here another rectangle, push pull tool. And once we have this figure which is not symmetric anymore, if I selected flip tool, then I click on this green plane. One click, and here we have our symmetry. In addition, if I click control key, we'll be able to make a copy, one click again on this green plane, and here we have our copy and the flip altogether. To be honest, these both things are the most important updates in this sketch up version 2023, although we have some more. If we look carefully in this sketch up help page, we'll see that we have a window common installer. Okay, It says a new installation experience with more options including studio features. Well, this is not important. Then we have the bit importer, we saw it already. The flip tool and then this large model saving efficiency. For saving big models with improved efficiency using multi threading technology. We used to have some problems in the past when our model was so big, the file was corrupted sometimes. And then thanks to this new technology, our models, our files will be saved safely and in a better way, this is a good improvement. Then we have this another one called over lies. This is not very important. It's talking about the possibility to use some plugins at the same time as we are modeling in three D inside sketch. If I click on it, we can check that, for example, it is possible to use the solid inspector while we are modeling in three D. At the same time, then the solid inspector is going to say to us the problems that we need to fix while we are modeling. This is not a big deal one step backwards. And finally, we have this feature, various modeling updates and improvements including new select options, freehand tool updates and improvements to the axis tool. Let's see the most important ones. If I come back to Sketch of 2023 and I select the freehand, once I draw this new line, if I click Control Plots and I continue heating plats again, we will see how our line is divided in different segments. And if I click Control minus, those segments will be less and less. Thanks to it, we will have more control on this curve. In order to explain the next tool, I will draw a cycle. I will select the line right button, explode curve. Once this is done, push pull tool, second click control key, and I will make this another push pull tool. Till here. Well, in the previous versions, if we wanted to select just some specific entities as the edges or the surfaces, we had to use a plug in called Selection toys. Now in this version, we have a native tool in order to do almost the same. For example, if I select this upper part of the cylinder and I click right button, then I move over Select. And here we have more options as this option called the Select Edges or the Select Phases. I will click this one, the Select Edges. Now I have selected just the area and then I could erase it easily. This improvement is not bad at all. Not big, but not bad. The next one has to do with the eraser. In this version, the eraser works much more better. It is supposed to be much more sensitive, and actually it is. For example, if I hold down the left button off my mouse, and I go through all these edges, you can see how all of them have been selected and erased easily. In the previous version of Sketchup in 2022, for example, when we did the same operation, some of them were still alive sometimes. Now we can do it so fast and it will work perfectly. 100% accurate. This is good as well, is improving our workflow. As far as I love the eraser tool, I appreciate any improvement done on more things. The Axis. Remember that we have this tool called Axis. In order to change the position of the global axis, right? In the previous versions, this process was a little bit slow because we had to click many times this axis tool in order to use it. Now if I, for example, make a group here, and I click on this axis tool, and I want to change the position inside. For example, this group, I will click again. One click on here, another click on here. This is the previous mode for doing this stuff. Right click and click rotations, and let's say a slow process. But in this new version, 2023, I can just click twice, click, click, and then my axis will be placed there. Keeping that is important. Keeping the same position as they were previously. Again, it's not a big deal, but it is something. And finally, let's talk about the arc. If I draw, for example, a rectangle, and then I select this Arc tool, I draw this tangent arc. And once I have still on this tool tool, thanks to this new version, I can still change the radius. I should write down the new radius. Let's say five enter and you can see how this arc, although it was inside a save this rectangle say can still change the radius. This is all about the new features if we are talking about modeling. If we come back to this sketch page, then we can read that we have more improvements, but this time related with layout, not with sketch. The most important one here is the first one, the possibility to play with the references we are talking about Autocad files. I will click on it, and here we can find more and more details. The important thing here that you have to keep in mind is that now if you change your Autocad file and it is linked with layout as a reference, then that change will appear in layout as it happens with Sketch up. Again, it's not going to change our lives, this update, but Sketchup is continue improving to say goodbye. Now here is the name of this new figure. I hope that you like the class and don't hesitate that if there is any good update about Sketch up, I will make a new video as soon as possible as possible. 85. Layout. What is Layout?: Hello guys. I'm going to go into this new class in where we're going to talk about a new software called layout. When we started SketchUp, it comes with two more softwares, layout and style builder. In this last module of the course, we will learn layout and here we have the world compete. We can create a new document. We have these templates available. We can open a file from here. We will see here recent files. When we have some of them already saved in our computer, I can click on More Templates and then look at here, because we have the option called paper, the option call a storyboard, the option called title block. Let's open for this first class A3 landscape once here, as you can check, the interface is very similar to scatter. Actually, the first thing that we have to understand is that both softwares are linked and this will be a super powerful tool when we want to make a presentation using our SketchUp file. Because at the end of the day, that is the life meaning of this software. Layout is a software which will help us a lot in order to make presentations using our SketchUp models, the workflow is very similar to other softwares as PowerPoint or InDesign. We have different pages. I can create more or eliminate them. I have liars and they work not as it happens in a SketchUp, but as normal liars in software such as Photoshop, e.g. I. Mean, the layer above on the top is the one visible and it's covering all the rest which are placed just below a part of it. Thanks to this program, we will be able to introduce nodes, dimensions, and call-outs. Very easy way. But first of all, let's connect our layout document with our SketchUp documented. In order to do that, we have two different ways. The first one is once you are here in your layout document and you'll have a blank paper already open, then you should go over fire insert once here. If I expand this window, you will see the different kind of contents that you can't import here and SketchUp file, but as well you can import raster images, text, files, and tables. Let's keep insert double content. And then I will select the last version of our work project of the Barcelona Pavilion. One click on here and immediately one new viewport pops up in our paper. And inside we can find our Barcelona Pavilion model. If I open now the SketchUp model tray, you will read here the name of our file. Just below, under viewport we have the level is seen. If I expand this window, will find here all the scenes that we already saved in our SketchUp file. The last saved a SketchUp view. So e.g. if I click on a scene number one, we can find here the sin of the entrance that we already saved the same with C number two, number three, and so on. This is one of the ways to connect our layout with SketchUp. But normally, and now I will delayed this viewport and then we don't have any connection with the SketchUp anymore. If I jump into our sketch file, Here we are, I could work on here with my model. And once I'm ready, I want to connect my SketchUp file with layout. I can go over file sent to layout. Then the welcome page pops up. I will select again A3 landscape. And directly my document will appear with the viewport connected to our SketchUp file already there. Once we have an overview about layout, Let's finish the class here. And in the next one, we'll prepare our SketchUp document specifically for making an interesting presentation in layout. 86. Layout. Preparing our document : Hello guys. Let's continue preparing our SketchUp file in order to send it later to layout. As we already learned, the scenes in SketchUp are the key in order to do a nice presentation in layout. Currently, we have five things in our SketchUp document. One is the entrance, the next one is this view from the swimming pool is C Number three is a view from the interior. And then we have two different general views using the parallel projection camera. The first one with the roofs active, and the second one, the tax roofs disabled. Let's create a scene small. One will be a plant floor and the other one and elevation. Let's then go over top view. We can active the saddles and say at a scene, we can even change the name. So click on Show Details and name. Let's say plan floor. Now I will choose this another view, right? Or maybe better front. Let's turn on the roofs. And maybe in order to make it even more attractive, we can make a kind of section elevation. So I will click this upsilon Section Plane, one-click on here. The name is correct. I select my section plane and I will move it, Let's say till here could be interesting. I will make visible the section toolbar again, front view. Then I will turn off. This first option displays sex and plain I scrolling a little bit, taking mind that these Default tray is covering part of our section. And now, depending on your preferences, we can display the section fill or not. This is up to you. Furthermore, if we are working with sections, we can go over a Styles. Eddie, click on this last option. Just this section line width, maybe three is too much, let's say two. And we can change as well the section fill in case that we want. I will close the Default tray in order to adjust my section playing to the correct size. And once I am happy, again, window the full tray. So tray, I'll go again over a since are the same. We made that change in the style, so I will save it as a new style. Okay, create a scene name of the same sexism elevation. It seems that I didn't change the name of the previous scene, so I will do it again. Floor plan. Now it is already done. We can say that we are ready to export our SketchUp file to layout. So then, first of all, I have to go over File, Save my SketchUp file. Once this is done, if I jump over layout again and I recover the file as it was in the previous class. I need to relink the SketchUp file with the layout file, right? In order to do that, I have just to select the viewport right button, update, model reference. We have to wait a little bit. Then we can take that everything is going fine. If we go over the sim window, I expand it and we can check that here. Now we have two new scenes as the floor plan and section elevation. If I click on the floor plan, here we have our sin from a skit taking mine, that once we select our viewport right button, we just used the option update model reference. The reason was because the connection between us gets up and layout was already done. We did it in the first class. So we asked, had to update our presentation in layout with the changes made before in sketch. This another option just below relink model reference, if I heat it is asking me for another fire. We will use this option in case that we change the name of the file of schizo. Anyways, once here in layout, let's prepare our document, our presentation. First of all, I would suggest you too. Yes. The number of pages that you want to use, Let's say e.g. three pages. So I add one baits more, another one. Now, let's go again over page one. Let's focus now on this tray called SketchUp model. This is very, very important because it is the one connected with our viewports. We can select the scene from our SketchUp file. Look because here we have the possibility to change as well the width of the lines. If I go below, we have this option in where we can choose between vector and raster and hybrid. We will see it later in another episode. We find here another category called Camera. You can check, besides our viewport, we brought here all the information from a sketch. In this case, talking about this floor plan is sin, the camera view is stopped, but we can change it from here as well if we are not happy. So this means that our sins are our references. But here in layout, we can make changes as well. Let's go back again to top. We find that the ortho camera is active. It means that we are using the parallel projection camera. Here we find one of the most important options, a scale. If I expand this option, we find many different scales available. And the one that we are using right now is called current scale, and it has this value. The first thing that we have to do is to change the scale, let's say 1200, then our model is already in that scale, 1200. And when I make modifications in my viewport, e.g. I. Make it longer, the size of my model, the scale of my model is not going to change. I am changing now, just the viewport. So I can even got my model because my model is not going to change anymore. This is because when I just selected and human scale, this option called preserve a scale onresize turned on automatically. If I turn off this option, then when I change the size of the frame of my viewport, the scale of my model can change as well. Here you can read that the scale now is not 1200, now is smaller. So let's select again 1200 pre-service scale and resize terms on automatically. And let's make the size of our viewport a little bit bigger in order to allow our model to be completely. Here we are a part of this. We can rotate our viewport easily just by clicking and drag layout. I have to say that it's more click and drag, then click unreleased that it happens with a SketchUp. We can move as well the position of our viewport, again by clicking and drag and release. And in case that we want to make a copy, we can click and drag and hold down Control key. Then I released and I have a new viewport. In these new viewport, which is already selected, I can change the scene, let's say section elevation. And then at the floor plan, section elevation altogether. In order to do this, I will make this viewport short-term and look now because I will use this specific point which I can move as a reference, I will place it here. It is detecting the edges and end points of a sketch. Then I scroll out, I moved my viewport with that point to the correct reference, that wall. And once they are aligned, I can just move my viewport in its vertical line. I can use the shortcut H to pan my paper. Space key shortcut for the selection tool. Make a selection box and select both viewports at the same time and move them in order to adjust next to the central axis. Here we're imagine now that I am not happy with the style. I don't like that gray of the ground floor or that blue of the sky is fear. Then again, in this SketchUp model tray, if I move down over effects, I could change the position of the sun and then the shadows will be different. And I can as well, to change the style of my model. Select these simple as type two inward, either the ground floor and this guy is fear is completely white. One-click outside, and here we are. Let's make this viewport shorter. And once it's selected, I can say Edit Copy, then move over the pages tray. Let's go over page two and say Edit, Paste again. Here, let's change the scene a scene number one. Now let's go over page number three. Again, Edit, Paste and we can select a sin number 234. This is up to you. I will select a scene number two. So we have our document already said three pages with their main viewports assigned time to save our layout file. So I want you to go over File, Save As and type in here and aim e.g. Barcelona Pavilion, we can save it in the correct route. And I hope to see you in the next episode in where we will see a very important tool called Page Setup. 87. Layout. Setting up our document: Hello guys and welcome to this new class where we're going to see a very important tool called Document Setup. We have to go over file document setup. Once here, this window pops up and we have different categories, different options in order to change the settings of our document. This one called outer text, is not very important, but the next one, grid can be useful in case that we want to support ourselves with our grid in order to place the different objects ECT, I can control the kind of grid, lines or points, the spacing 10 mm or more, the color, the subdivisions, the color again. Anyway, if I close it and I come back again to my paper, you can see the grid around our viewport, right? So let's go again, document set up. I will hide the grid because I don't like to use it, but this is up to you. Here we find an option in order to fade the rest of the document when we select a group, like it happened in SketchUp, we had that option too. Thanks to this bar, we can make it darker or lighter and even hide this one called paper. One of the most important ones we find here the size of the paper, and in case that we want to change it once our document is already open, we should do it. From here. We can change the size, we can change the position of that paper, landscape or portrait, et cetera, et cetera. Another interesting option is the chance to include a margin, left, right, top or bottom margin. Again, the color and the possibility to print those margins. Then here another category called rendering resolution, display resolution and output resolution. We can change that resolution. We have three options, low, medium and high output resolution. I recommend you to use high resolution references. This is another interesting option because here will appear all the external references that are linked with our layout. Currently we have one right there, SketchUp file. We don't have anything else. But as I told you in another class, we can link as well images, AutoCad files, et cetera, et cetera. So from here we can update that reference, relink and link edit and birds. Finally, another important upsilon is the units. The format right now is decimal and millimeters, the precision 0.1 mm. So here is up to you. Maybe if you are an English speaker, decimal would not be comfortable for you. And maybe it's better fractional and work with inches, right? As far as I am from Spain, I haven't yet used to use the decimal format. Here. I will use centimeters precision. 0.01 is okay for me, so I can say Close. Now, if I use any of the drawing tools, e.g. this line and I want to draw a line in my measurements bar appears the length in centimeters, and with that precision to decimals, and I could type in here the length, e.g. 20 cm, I will delete it. So as you can see, this is a very intuitive panel. It is important that you are aware of the fact that you can use it once your file is already open, you can make changes from here. I hope that you like the class. And in the next one, we will start learning about how to add an edit dimensions. 88. Layout. Adding and editing dimension: Welcome to this new class. Inward, we're gonna see how to include dimensions in our paper document. The first thing that I want you to do is to collapse these SketchUp model tray collapse as well, the pages tray. Because in this class we will be working with the lawyers tray, the shape style tray, and the dimension style tray. So the first thing that we are going to do is to add a new layer. As I told you in another class, liars in layout work in a different way than in SketchUp. They work like in a normal software, I mean, as Photoshop, InDesign, et cetera, et cetera. The layer above is going to cover all the things below, all the layers which are placed below. Here in layout, this pencil, which is marking the active layer, is very important because if we create a new layer, this layer three, let's change the name. I will call it dimension. We want to draw dimensions actually. Then we need to place the pencil on this layer, on this specific layer. Remember that in SketchUp, I recommend it to you to not change the position of that pencil in order to draw always inside the untapped layer. Here is different. Once we have created our dimensions layer, then I want you to go over here, over this bar in where we find this tool called dimensions. Let's click on it and then we can already draw in our paper any dimensions. I will scroll in and we can check, format the style of this dimension. One tip here, if you want to use dimensions in your drawing, is much more better to set the dimension style before you draw all the dimensions in your papers. So then if I go over this tray called CEP style and I hover over a start arrow, I expand this window and I can change that arrow to e.g. this one in where I have a kind of item, I will do the same with this another option and arrow. And then if I go over this another panel text style, I can change the font family and maybe use one that I really like. E.g. let's say Calibri light, e.g. regular ten points could be. Okay. Let's make a proof. Here we are. Once we are happy, we are ready to add our dimensions. So I will scroll in and look because layout snaps to our SketchUp points. So first click on here, second click unreleased here. Then I pull up on third click unreleased here, and I have my dimension already there. I could repeat the same process from here. One click, released, second click and release, and I pull up till here. If I wanted now to continue adding dimensions following this line, then layout helps us a lot. Because if I just go to this end point of the next dimension and I click twice, click, click, then my dimension go directly at the end of the previous one. The thing now is that we don't have enough space for the texts. So in a situation like that, the best option is to use the shortcut space key in order to select the selection tool. Then I can hit this dimension, which actually is a group. Go inside this group by clicking twice. Then select just the text. And by clicking and dragging, I could change easily deposition, if I still don't like it, I could hover over the dimension style. Look that I don't have anything available. This is because I am selecting right now, just the texts, not the group of the dimension of the space key, I click outside, I select all the dimension group. Then here in the tray, I have the different options available and I could use e.g. these different options above. And then the texts goes directly above to the line center, below, vertical, horizontal, aligned, and perpendicular. In my opinion, for this dimension, the best option is the first one above, and of course not perpendicular but aligned. Then finally here we have the option for displaying the units. If I turn it off, we don't have the unit visible anymore. And that unit look because they are meters. We were working with centimeters in our documents setup. But here in this tray, we have. Our own units, we can change it easily from here, length, decimal or fractional. Then we can choose between inches, millimeters, centimeters, meters, or point. I think meters is okay for this specific building, we are doing a kind of presentation of an architectural building. Meters, in my case, works perfectly. Maybe we don't need to solve the unit. So in case that we want to repeat this dimension style into another dimensions, we have a very good option going here to the upper bar again and hitting this eye dropper called style. Click on here. Then let's still this style of this dimension. One click on here. The paint bucket is active now and ready to be used. And I will hit them on this another dimension because I don't want the unit, the meters visible here. So one click on here and we repeat the style of the original, again, the same. Here. As you can see, this is super good in order to be very fast, imagine now that we have this situation with this thirst and we decide that we want our dimensions in a more higher position of the paper because we don't want them to cross along these terms. So first of all, space key, I will select these three dimensions and I will unselect the viewport. Then I will relate the three of them. I will select these three dimensions which are good. And then if I hover over the line, these arrows will appear. Click and drag. I pull up and I can change easily the position and the height of these diamonds. Release one click outside. Here we are. Let's finish now, this side of the building. So again, dimension tool, again, I go to the end point of that dimension. The double-click now is not working because I did that change just before. So I have to repeat this same process with three clicks. And then now if I scroll out, I go to the next point, double-click, the rapid method is working perfectly. The next end point is placed here. Double-click here. The double click is not working. Anyways, when it's not working, we need to do it manually. So one click on here, I scroll out, second click, scroll out, third click, finally, double-click here. Now is working good. Let's do it in this, another side of the building. One-click here. Second click here, look because we don't find that green point. So we have to use the red 1 s click, click from here, double-click on from here, double-click when these DoubleClick is not working, we have to do it manually is not a big problem. Now it's a matter to give some style to these new dimensions of this side of the building. So I will select this one, look because the option is this one above and aligned. And this time maybe we can use center and perpendicular. One-click outside. It looks okay. So again, the eyedropper one-click and we apply these changes on this another dimension. Finally, another remarkable thing about this panel, and I will select again this dimension group is this option called extension lines. This extension lines are these ones from our object to our dementia. Layout offers as two options, gap and length. Both of them you have to understand that are working at the same time. If we length, it means that the length of our extension lines, the maximum length is this one. We can change it and say that we want 5 mm e.g. and then look this dimension, this specific dimension. Now the start and the end is just 5 mm. You are wondering why this line is still so long is because of this, another dimension by debated. Then we can find that the start and the end extension line is 5 mm long. On the other hand, we can play with the gap. I will select this time, this another dimension here, the gap is 3.175 mm and the length is 95.797 mm. So to understand the gap, I will scroll in and we will see how our extension lines before touching the point of the building have this gap. I will click out and we will see it better. We have this gap. It is very likely that we don't want those extension lines to go across our building anyways, in this case, in this specific project and this specific layout, I don't like long extension lines, so I will use the 5 mm length for all of the dimensions. First, I will draw this missing dimension, and then eyedropper. And let's use this style for all of the dimensions placed on the right side of the building. And then here, for this, another side, I should not use it because then the text is perpendicular, right? So control set. I will select this dimension, length 5 mm. Now again, eyedropper and I can copy the style easily. In all the rest. I could even select all the dimensions, hover over the line till I get these arrows and then click and drag. Say that I want my dimensions placed here, one click outside. And here we are taking mine that, as I told you, layout is a snapping to the points of SketchUp. So if we change any object of our SketchUp model when we refresh in layout our paper document, the dimensions will have changed as well. Anyways, once we are happy with the result, we will save our file. File, save time to say goodbye now. And in the next episode, we will see how to include levels and call out in our paper document. 89. Layout. Adding labels: Hello people and welcome to this new class. Inward, we're gonna talk about the labels. The labels are very similar to the dimensions in terms of how they work. We can find the tool here in the upper bar. Let's hit it. And then first thing is to check how is the default style for these labels. So one-click, another click, click, and let's scroll in. Let's type e.g. Barcelona Pavilion, pavilion escape. In my opinion, these default style is not very nice. I don't like it too much. So as it happened with the dimensions, we should arrange the settings of the label style in the first place before we start working. So once the tool is selected, we go over the same style tray. Let's change this Start arrow. I will select this one with the cycle in black and an arrow. The first one is just a straight line. So it's okay for me. Now let's go over the text style, the family font. It's completely up to you. I will stick with the category light, regular ten points. Now we are ready. That's labeled the swimming pool. One-click on the swimming pool and then look because the second click could be a straight line or an inclined line. In case that I do an inclined line, then I have another third click with these straight line. And finally, time for the texts. Look that the tool is measuring the area of the swimming pool automatically. This could be useful in case that you want it. Anyways, I will use the caps lock in order to type in the text swimming pool, one-click outside, and here we are. The other possibility to use this tool is one-click. And then if I want a straight line, not an inclined line, this second click can be a double-click, click, click, and we save time. Again. Swimming pool, one click outside. I prefer to use for this Barcelona Pavilion architecture, straight lines. I think that they suites much more better with these minimalism architecture. So in case that I want to erase anything in my paper document, I can use the eraser as it happened in SketchUp shortcut letter e, one click, and it is done again, labeled tool, one click on the toilets double-click toy. Now we are going to use a useful tool in order to support ourselves when we are using the label tool will find it on here, a range. But first we should select our labels, then a rents align and look here, we find different alignments to the left, to the right, top and bottom. We can even align the axis of those labels, let's say left. And then you can check how our levels are aligned to the left. Don't confuse these two with this another one. Now, let's go over the trace. First, we should select the labels again, and here on the text style, a part of the family and so on. We can change the color of that fond of course. And we have these alignments, left, center, and right. But here we are talking just about the texts, the texts accordingly to their leader line. Now, this alignment is left and maybe write can be better. Right? One-click outside and then you can check how the text is just next to the leader line, right? Let's repeat now this same axioms down here, labeled tool. I will label this table one-click, straight line, double-click, and look because here it appears automatically the name of this group. This is because this group is named in SketchUp. The name is maximized, which means me a stable. Anyways, we have here an arrow, we can expand it, and then we can check what entity. Actually we want to label that group with that name or just the phase, then we can label the area or the viewport. And this viewport is talking about layout. Note about our model in the sketch. Let's select mess Amir's and we can type in here our own text. Double-click table, one click outside, and we are done. Let's repeat this same process with this term. Double-click the name of this component and this time we have a component, not a group, and its name is Paul Toronto, barcelona. Again, we can expand this window, but actually we want to just change the text me as chair this time. And finally, I will label this wall, green marble wall. Look that on purpose, I didn't align these three labels. So now I will select the three of them are rents align, and this time bottom, it looks okay. Now I can hover over my selection. I find this icon, click and drag. And I can be more precise with the position of these elements. One leak outside and we are done. Scroll out, I just have to erase this first level. So letter T and One-click, Let's go now over another page. I can use this tool called next. So now I am placed in page number two. I could have used, well, the pages tray once here, labeled tool, first click, second click and look because here we have the possibility to change the position of our texts. Maybe we don't want to type in our texts at the right side. And then we have just to tap control. Actually you have to hold down control. Then you can check how our textbooks is moving to the left side. Another click on this type in again, green marble wall. Now we will repeat the same process with this pillar. So first click and before the second click, we hold down control and double-click. Let's name this label, gross pillar looked at here in the first one, there is another perpendicular little line. I will erase it and repeat this label before this second click is when I have to hold down Control and then double-click green, marble, warm. And finally, again, hold down Control, double-click orange marble wall. We erase this text, one-click outside time to arrange these labels. Select tool, selection box are ranked, align, let's say top. It looks okay, but the distance with the leader line, in my opinion is too much. So let's select them. Textile align, right? I think here is much more nicer. As you can see in this tool is not BP cool at all. It just needs some practice. So time to say goodbye. And in the next class we will see how to add line weight to objects. 90. Layout. Hybrid mode: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we are going to see how to transform our viewports into hybrids or a vector file in order may lead to play with the thickness of the lines. So this is a very, very interesting and important task in Layout. And we will start with this page in where we have this view of the building and pay attention because when I scroll in, you can check how our lines are kind of pixelated. So maybe it's okay for you, but if you want to be more flashy, then lay out, give us some options. We should go over the trace. And this time, as far as we want to play with SketchUp model, we want to go over the tray called a SketchUp model, select our viewport, then the tray is active already. We have selected the scene one. So all the changes that we are gonna do, I'm gonna happen just on this sin, not in all the scenes in our paper document. That is very, very important. And the first thing that we can do is to play with a line scale. Actually, this is the thickness, 0.5, and we can change it, we can make it wider. Let's say one point, you can appreciate the difference or we can do it thinner. Here we are. But the thing that we didn't do is to avoid to have our lines pixelated. For this task, we have this, another option. I will expand this window and we have three different features, vector, raster and hybrid. By default, we are working in layout with this raster option. Active raster, as you already know, means that we are working with pixels. These are kind of grid or the image made of pixels like when we are working in Photoshop. On the other hand, we have the option in order to work with vectors. This is us when we are exporting from a sketch up a PDF, our lines becomes vectors. So they will be very good defined, but we will lose the textures of our materials, of our images. Let's click it and then this window pops up vector rendering While good for line drawings cannot represent complex styles. Okay, then we can check how our lines right now are perfect, super polished. But as I told you, we lost all the textures of our materials. So this is not interesting for us, but don't worry, because Layout give us the solution, the midpoint, hybrid. With hybrid, we will have the best of both worlds. Let's click it. Hybrid rendering, while effective at representing complex styles, can take much longer to render than either a vector or raster. The time is not important, Let's say, okay, because actually it's not that long. And here we have the result. The lines are very sharp and accurate, not pixelated anymore, and we keep our textures perfectly drawn, right? The problem here, and this is because this image is a little bit complex, is that we have lost lines of different elements placed in the interior of this building. If I jump back to raster, you will see that here, e.g. this pillar has some lines as it happens with the rest of the elements, right? If I go over hybrid, okay, our lines becomes better, but we lost some details. Some lines better said, placed in the interior of the building. So this is up to you. Anyways, once we have selected Hybrid, we can still change the line scale and with vector to 0.10, looks okay for me. So let's keep it like that. Now, let's jump to this first page because I would like to show you how this tool works with a different case as this section elevation. So first of all, we have to select it, make sure that the scene is called section elevation. The line of scale, by default is 0.5 and we are working in the raster mode. As you can check, our lines sometimes are not even completed and the corners are like broken. This situation happens in more places, so it is time for using the hybrid mode. Okay, we have to wait a little bit and then check how our lines now look much more better. They are not broken anymore. We keep the textures. Everything looks very, very much nicer, right? We could even play with the thickness of those lines. So let's go over line scale. And instead of 0.5, let's say zero point to this line, scale is affecting all the drawing together. We will decrease all the lines in the same person dates. So maybe right now is even better. Let's check 0.3. I am happy with this. So let's go over the floor plan. One click on here, the viewport is locked, so I have to unlock the viewport instead of raster. Let's say again, hybrid. Remember that vector is good for the lines but not good for the textures. You can check here the result. So hybrid will be our favorite most of the times. Let's click it. Here we are. Let's play now with the line scale instead of 0.5, let's say 0.2. I think that now is much more better as far as here, we are not using a section plane. We're not cutting the building. It is just a floor plan. Maybe even 0.1 can be better. Once we are happy with the result, we can look again our viewport, this one and this one too. And we can save our document time to say goodbye now. And in the next episode, we will continue polishing up our document this time by adding different elements drawn here in layout. 91. Layout. Adding lineweigh and fill: Hello people and welcome to this new class. Inward, we are going to continue polishing our paper document. And specifically, we will focus on the elevation section or section elevation as you prefer in this class, we will learn another way to improve the quality of our drawing, this time using elements from layout. I'm talking about the drawing tools as the line or the rectangle. But first of all, let's add another layer called added elements. This one called dimensions, actually includes the labels to write. So I will change the name. I will name it dimensions and labels enter dimensions and labels should be above. So click and drag. Let's select this new layer added elements as the active one. We can focus now on our section elevation. If we look at our model carefully, we can check how we have some different graphic problems as this swimming pool, which is in gray color, or even these interior of the section plane, which is not, let's say, very, very clean. It happens the same with this roof. So let's improve it. This time, we will use the line tool. Once it is selected, the tool will recognize the geometry from SketchUp and we will create a site following the section cut. You will see how this say is followed by a fill in white collar. And don't worry if that still doesn't match the shape that you want to achieve. Because at the end, when we close that new figure, everything will be fine. In order to do this task correctly. I recommend you to, first of all, have changed the mode of your viewport to hybrid. Why? Because we want to be sure about the final thickness of our lines. And you will understand soon why. Here we have our CEP already drawn. As you can check, the field. Finally is perfectly placed. It is in white color and we can control it from here, shape, style, tray, and here we find two different options. We will use both of them, the fill and the stroke. We could even add a pattern, but this is not interested in right now. So I can have my field active or I can turn it off. And the same with the stroke width, the perimeter of that fill, I can change its color and its thickness as well. So this is very, very interesting because in case that we are happy with our lines after the hybrid mode, we don't need to use the stroke. We can turn it off and just use the fill. On the other hand, if we are not happy with our SketchUp lines after using the hybrid mode, we can use the stroke as a new line, as a new perimeter for our section or whatever. For this example, I will use just the field in white collar, one-click outside. And here we are. Let's do another example this time with this swimming pool, I will hit the rectangle tool, glue that. I can expand this tool, this rectangle. And we have different drawing options. I only use the first one rectangle. And then if I draw this rectangle in order to represent the swimming pool, I should select it. And then, first of all, go over this same style tray, fill and change the color. Let's say that we want to use this blue. And then we can transform the length and the height of this rectangle just by clicking and dragging. We don't want actually this blue rectangle above the section line. So we should be super accurate here, because those lines are from SketchUp. Here we are. Let's go to this other side here. It could be fine. If I want to be more precise. I can go over file documents, setup units and work with the precision instead of 0.01, I can say 0.0 001 close. And then here I will have a bigger margin. Anyways, if this method is complicated for you, we can always select this and other CEP and turn on the stroke. We can increase a little bit the thickness. And then when we select this blue shape, if we click right button or rents, we can send it to back. This way. We don't have to be worried about to align both elements perfectly and maybe is a faster method. Look here, we have this gap. I can go over here and close the gap. I will make this swimming pool higher till here because I don't want to. So a section line on the top of the swimming pool as far as it is water. And once I am happy with the result, I can go to the sample, paint. One-click. Still this style. Let's do it again in this another swimming pool. So one-click and second click. I will select my element. I will make it higher, clicking and drag. And now we have just the roof missing. Again, Rectangle tool, one click, second click. Let's select it. Should be white this time. So I'll click RDB to 55 in all the bars. As far as I used the stroke in the preview section line, I will use it here again. A stroke, 0.8 was the stroke that I used before. One click outside. It looks okay, so now I can check my new drawing. It looks better. Let's pan a little bit, scroll out. I think that now is much more cleaner. Remember that all of those new elements are inside these added elements layer. So if I hide it, I can see the previous state. And if I unhide the layer, this is the new state, much more cleaner, right? Previews. Now, maybe we don't need this stirs and we will learn how to make them disappear by using what is called a clipping mask. In the next class. 92. Layout. Clipping mask: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see a new tool called clipping mask. This tool could be quite interesting. So let's use it first in order to mask off this stirrers. Stirrers looks a little bit weird here. They are the projection of this and other esters from the floor plan. They are the same, but they are behind the building, behind this section elevation. So maybe in my opinion, they shouldn't be there. So here we could do different things. The first one is to add another element, like in the previous class. Say rectangle, one click, second quick, change the color, sample, paint, one-click paint bucket here. Now the fill is in white collar. I select this element, I move over the correct tray and I turn off the stroke one click outside, and now I select the element right button, arrange, send to back, one-click upside. And now this line is continuous because it's above this. Another element which is invisible. This is one option. Another option, I will select this element and I will delete it is to use a clipping mask. For doing this, I can use the rectangle tool. Again. I will just snap this corner. We'll make a new rectangle and pay attention here, because this new rectangle, which I am selecting right now, and I'm turning off the fill and turning on the stroke. This rectangle will be the new viewport. Everything inside this rectangle will be visible and everything out of this rectangle will be visible. So in order to do this, in order to use these clipping mask, I have to select the rectangle, the visible rectangle, then select as well, yes, the current viewport, right button, Create, clipping mask, one click on here, and here we are. Our new viewport is that previous rectangle which I just draw. And as you can see, we don't have the stairs anymore because those esters were placed out of this rectangle. One click outside and I am finished if I want to recover the previous state of the viewport and the stairs as well, then I have to click and find the new viewport, this rectangle, right button, release, clipping mask. And here we are. Now the rectangle is just a rectangle. Stairs are again here, and the viewport is the previous viewport. This is interesting because we can create, let's say, creative viewports, e.g. instead of the rectangle, I will use now the line and I will create a compound path which will be at the end, my new viewport, right? So let's follow the section plane to here, e.g. then I will go up, I will follow the roofs. I can turn on the stroke and turn off the Fill in order to draw easily. I continue drawing should always finally close my compound path. Here we are. Then it is the correct moment for selecting that compound path. We can check it here. And if we want a better check, we can use the Fill. And here we are. This is our compound path, which in the next future will be our viewport. All the things out of that compound path will not be visible. So I turn off the fill, the clipping mask is already selected. Now I need to select the viewport, the current viewport. So I hold down shift key, one-click both elements already selected. Right button, Create, Clipping, Mask, one-click outside. It seems that it didn't work correctly, but the stars are not there anymore, right? The thing is that this element is an added element and it is still there because it was out of the clipping mask from the beginning, right? So if I want this podium out, I should delete it by myself. And here we have the result of the clipping mask. This vision of the interior of our Barcelona Pavilion, I think is quite attractive. If I select that clipping mask, I can turn on the stroke and maybe now is better. So this is up to you. I think that I prefer to have these previous version of the section elevation using the first clipping mask. So I will undo my last axioms. And here we are without the stairs and with the first Clipping Mask active, let's save the changes file, save. And in the next class we will see how to draw titles and a scrapbook items. 93. Layout. Drawing titles and scrapbook items: Hello guys and welcome to this new class, where we're gonna go deeper into the tool update, model reference and relink model reference. We have seen this tool already, but during this episode, we'll see the beauty of this tool. You have to understand that a SketchUp and layout our link and what that means. Because we can save a lot of time if we are able to make the best of these two. Anyways, if you are wondering why this title block looks like that is because I made some arrangements. I modified some text. And finally, I added as a logo, this official image of the International Exposition in 1929, celebrate that in Barcelona. Anyways, during this class, we will mainly work in this second page. And the first thing that we're going to do is to select our viewport and make it a little bit shorter because in my opinion, it is too close to our title block once the viewport is selected, right button. Look because here we have two options. Update, model reference, we link reference, and there is a third one open with a sketch. This option allow us to open our SketchUp file from here, from layout. Let's do it. Here we are already in a sketch, ones here. Imagine that we move over the scenes. Let's click twice on the first one. This is seen as the one that we are using in layout. And imagine now that your client wants another version of the project or your teacher is asking you for another proposal. And then the fact is that we need to make some changes here in the main model, e.g. as far as we are playing with an iconic building of the architecture, let's do something kind of radical and we will change dramatically the material on these two different worlds. So I would select this green marble, Control a in order to select all the faces, then materials and supplies. Something like super crazy dial here, maybe this one, one-click here we are. Edit a little bit bigger. 1 m here is okay. One-click outside. Let's do the same in this, another war. This time, I will select this another one. It is okay. And once we are happy and we can realize already how our building now is, let's say another building, just thanks to those materials. Much more idea. We have to say, then we should go over File and Save or Save As if we save our file, our layout document will change automatically because it is linked with this file called right now Barcelona Pavilion ten. On the other hand, if we want to save this version with another name, we can do it. Save us and call it e.g. Barcelona Pavilion, new wolves, we save it. And then once again, in layout, we have our viewport already selected right button as far as we want to link our layout with another file, another sketch up a file with another name. Then instead of update model reference, we have to say relink mother reference. We searched the correct file, the Barcelona Pavilion, new walls open. We will need to wait a little bit. Here we have our viewport already updated right? Now, if I go to page number three, you can be surprised because here we don't have the view-port, update it, right? We're still have the previews marble. So again, we should select the viewport and follow the same steps as before in order to avoid this. And now I'll go one step back and I would click Control Set one step back again. We have now the previous marble again. So instead of selecting the viewport right button within model reference, we can go over File Document Setup references. And once here, we can check all the external references linked with our layout document. So this is the SketchUp file. Once we select this route, we can relink and select the new one. Barcelona Pavilion knew was open and close. Now we can see the new material applied on the walls. And if we move over the third page, the materials are already applied as well. So in case that you want to relink your SketchUp file, I recommend you to use this, another option, File, Document Setup references and do it from here. If we move now to page number one, maybe you will be surprised again when you find these two warnings. This word means are there because our viewports are locked, so we have to lock them. Once both of them are unlocked, we should go over File Document Setup references, then select our SketchUp file. And this time instead of relink, we will say update. I had to wait a little bit, but when I close it, the warnings have disappeared. Let's do now another thing. Let's change the geometry of something, e.g. these stairs. So I will go inside this group and I will post this element 1 m and a half. I will repeat this same axiom in the other side. Foosball 1.5, Enter, then File, Save, this time, just safe and I will move over layout. Once in layout, your viewports will be automatically updated and you will have to do nothing as you can check our esters have been modified, but we have kind of error regulate to explain you what is the reason? All depends on the point cute took when you did these dimensions. If I select this dimension, we can check how our point references are. This one here and this one here. And those points have never changed. On the other hand, this another dimension is using points from the stairs, actually the points of the geometry that we have changed in SketchUp, then the dimension is changing with the SketchUp geometric. So be careful with that. Now, we should do some changes as e.g. make this dimension longer. We could be late. This one, make this longer and draw a new one from here to here to avoid future problems, right? Let's use the sample paint. We still this dimension style and we apply it here in case that we change in the future, this platform, the dimensions will change as well without any problem. Anyways, we are ready to export our layout file to PDF, but this is something that we will do in the next and final episode. 94. Layout. On every page items: Hello guys and welcome to this new class in where we're going to see on a specific layer which is called on every page. So you should go over the lawyers tray, expanded on here. Layout by default creates this layer on every page, the thumbnail is a double page instead of just one like the rest of the layers. And this is a very useful tool because it will allow us to work with master items. And what is a master item? Well, a master item is an object which will appear exactly in the same position in every page. So we will save a lot of time if we use it correctly. One example, Let's go over the scrapbooks tray. I will expand it. I'll use this TB simple folder. And here I have this drawing which says Progress drawing, click and drag I released on my paper document. We can check that we have some visual problems because our element is not complete. Right here, it looks complete. And the reason is because our layer on every page is placed in the last position. It is placed under all the rest, right? So if we don't want to have programs like this one, we should move up this layer and place it in the very first position. Then we can set how our drawing now is perfectly correct. Once we have fixed this little problem, Let's place this element e.g. here we want to click outside and let's change the page. As you can see, the element appears in this pair. It's number two, exactly in the same position. And in page number three, more of the same one. We have understood the logic under this on every page layer. Let's see how can we add title block in our paper document. So I will eliminate this element. And in order to draw that title block, we have two options. We can do it manually using the drawing tools from layout, or we can use a template. If I go over fire, new layout offers us in this welcome page an option called title block. Here we have many different options. I recommend you to open most of these paper documents and check what is your favorite title block. For this example, I will use this one inside the rounded category A3 landscape. One-click here and you document will be opened. And here we have our title block. I can select it, go over edit, copy. The shortcut is Control plus C, Then go over my file and press Control V. A new window pops up and the message says entities will be pasted to layer on every page. This is correct. So here we have our title block perfectly pasted in the same position of the paper document as in the original loop that if I click outside and I tried to select it this time, this element is not a group with different objects, so I recommend you to do it by yourself. Select all the elements, right button, make group. If we move now to page number two, you can see how our different texts folders will remain the same, but the number of this title block is changing. Here we have number two and in page number three, the number is three. How can we do that in case that you wanna do it manually? Well, first of all, I will select my group, two clicks and go inside the group. I will select the number. We'll delete it, one-click outside. And now if I move over page number one, we can take how that text field is empty, right? So we'd have to do it by ourselves. First thing that we have to do, and I will scroll in a little bit, is to go inside the group, press the text tool, one click and create our text field. Once we have just to type in our text, then let's go over this upper bar text, insert our two texts. We have another option called customize our two texts. But in this example, we'll use insert our two text. So here we have many different a text options. The one we are looking for right now is page number one. Click on here and a strange code will appear immediately in our text field. But don't worry, everything is correct. We have just to click outside and then the correct number of our Bates pops up. We can select it and edited text style. Let's increase the size, 14 points. Let's align the number in the center of the box. There seems, okay, so one-click outside, another click outside. Here we are. Now, if we move over the next page, the number is changing correctly. The rest of the entities in this title block are not auto test. So if I go inside and I change this level, drawn by, let's say here, Caps Lock Manuel, that is my name, this K. Let's go over this second option, description and the title says sit description. Here is a good opportunity to learn another Autodesk. So I will go inside, I will select a specifically this box I delayed sit description. And instead of writing down normal decks, I go over text again, insert text, and this time I will use bait name, the code appears, so one-click outside, and now we can read page three. The reason of this title is because if we move over the pages, page number three has this name, page three. So we can change here the name of the page, swimming pool view, and then the name changes as well in this title block. So if we move now to page number two and we change here the name of the page. Let's name it as entrants. View Enter. We have a new description in our title block as well. And finally, let's do it again in our page one, let's call it floor plan section. We could continue editing and fulfilling all the different levels of this title block, even this logo. And for doing this, we should go over file insert and bring here our J Beck, not complicated at all. And then our document could be ready for the next step. So time to say goodbye. Don't hesitate to leave a comment in case you need it. And I will see you in the next episode in where we will go deeper into the tools, update, model reference and relink model reference. 95. Layout. Updating and relinking the Sketchup model: Hello guys and welcome to this new class, where we're gonna go deeper into the tool update, model reference and relink model reference. We have seen this tool already, but during this episode, we'll see the beauty of this tool. You have to understand that a SketchUp and layout our link and what that means. Because we can save a lot of time if we are able to make the best of these two. Anyways, if you are wondering why this title block looks like that is because I made some arrangements. I modified some text. And finally, I added as a logo, this official image of the International Exposition in 1929, celebrate that in Barcelona. Anyways, during this class, we will mainly work in this second page. And the first thing that we're going to do is to select our viewport and make it a little bit shorter because in my opinion, it is too close to our title block once the viewport is selected, right button. Look because here we have two options. Update, model reference, we link reference, and there is a third one open with a sketch. This option allow us to open our SketchUp file from here, from layout. Let's do it. Here we are already in a sketch, ones here. Imagine that we move over the scenes. Let's click twice on the first one. This is seen as the one that we are using in layout. And imagine now that your client wants another version of the project or your teacher is asking you for another proposal. And then the fact is that we need to make some changes here in the main model, e.g. as far as we are playing with an iconic building of the architecture, let's do something kind of radical and we will change dramatically the material on these two different worlds. So I would select this green marble, Control a in order to select all the faces, then materials and supplies. Something like super crazy dial here, maybe this one, one-click here we are. Edit a little bit bigger. 1 m here is okay. One-click outside. Let's do the same in this, another war. This time, I will select this another one. It is okay. And once we are happy and we can realize already how our building now is, let's say another building, just thanks to those materials. Much more idea. We have to say, then we should go over File and Save or Save As if we save our file, our layout document will change automatically because it is linked with this file called right now Barcelona Pavilion ten. On the other hand, if we want to save this version with another name, we can do it. Save us and call it e.g. Barcelona Pavilion, new wolves, we save it. And then once again, in layout, we have our viewport already selected right button as far as we want to link our layout with another file, another sketch up a file with another name. Then instead of update model reference, we have to say relink mother reference. We searched the correct file, the Barcelona Pavilion, new walls open. We will need to wait a little bit. Here we have our viewport already updated right? Now, if I go to page number three, you can be surprised because here we don't have the view-port, update it, right? We're still have the previews marble. So again, we should select the viewport and follow the same steps as before in order to avoid this. And now I'll go one step back and I would click Control Set one step back again. We have now the previous marble again. So instead of selecting the viewport right button within model reference, we can go over File Document Setup references. And once here, we can check all the external references linked with our layout document. So this is the SketchUp file. Once we select this route, we can relink and select the new one. Barcelona Pavilion knew was open and close. Now we can see the new material applied on the walls. And if we move over the third page, the materials are already applied as well. So in case that you want to relink your SketchUp file, I recommend you to use this, another option, File, Document Setup references and do it from here. If we move now to page number one, maybe you will be surprised again when you find these two warnings. This word means are there because our viewports are locked, so we have to lock them. Once both of them are unlocked, we should go over File Document Setup references, then select our SketchUp file. And this time instead of relink, we will say update. I had to wait a little bit, but when I close it, the warnings have disappeared. Let's do now another thing. Let's change the geometry of something, e.g. these stairs. So I will go inside this group and I will post this element 1 m and a half. I will repeat this same axiom in the other side. Foosball 1.5, Enter, then File, Save, this time, just safe and I will move over layout. Once in layout, your viewports will be automatically updated and you will have to do nothing as you can check our esters have been modified, but we have kind of error regulate to explain you what is the reason? All depends on the point cute took when you did these dimensions. If I select this dimension, we can check how our point references are. This one here and this one here. And those points have never changed. On the other hand, this another dimension is using points from the stairs, actually the points of the geometry that we have changed in SketchUp, then the dimension is changing with the SketchUp geometric. So be careful with that. Now, we should do some changes as e.g. make this dimension longer. We could be late. This one, make this longer and draw a new one from here to here to avoid future problems, right? Let's use the sample paint. We still this dimension style and we apply it here in case that we change in the future, this platform, the dimensions will change as well without any problem. Anyways, we are ready to export our layout file to PDF, but this is something that we will do in the next and final episode. 96. Layout. Export: Hello people and welcome to this new and last class of these SketchUp course. In this episode, we will see how to export our layout document into different formats. As you can see on the screen, we are working with the version of the Barcelona Pavilion in where we made some changes. But to be honest, I think that these changes are not improving the quality of the pavilion. So in order to export our final PDF, I would use the previous version. So I'll go over file documents setup. And here I will select my sketch up link. We'll say relink, and I will select the previous ketchup file open. Then we will have to wait a little bit because all the viewports have to be rendered again. And once it is done, we'll close this window. And we have this previous model of a SketchUp with the walls and with esters as they are in their reality, I would adjust the position of the North's. I'll go over page number three in order to do a little bit shorter the frame of the layout, I will select this dimension which is here. I don't know the reason. So once we are ready, we have polyester, all the details, then we should go over File Export. And here we have three options, images, PDF and d w, d, the oxygen that most of the times we are going to use is PDF. So let's start with PDFs. I will save this document in a specific folder. The name will be Barcelona Pavilion type of the format PDF. Then let's click on Save. This window pops up. We have different options. We can select the pages that we want to export. All is correct. The root is already there. Image resolution high is what I recommend. Image compression that say maximum quality. As far as our PDF can have different layers, we can create the same layers as in our layout document where this is up to you. I prefer to don't have any layer in my PDF document. And finally, we can mark this option, show export in PDF viewer. So let's export it. And here we have the result, page number one, number two, and page number three. Remember that our PDF, thanks to the hybrid mode, will have its lines perfectly sharp because they will work as vectors. So if I sue in, we will see the quality of those lines and at the same time, we will not lose the textures of the pictures because they are working as images. Back to Layout. Let's export now our document using the next ops, that option was called images. If I click it and I expand this window, we have two formats available, P and Z. And they pick, you have to know that they peg is compressed type of format. So we will lose a bit of quality in the image. And p and d is thought mainly in order to keep the transparency in the background, this format will clip alpha channel. Anyways, normally we will use date back. It is the most universal format for images in the wall. So one click on here and say, then we have to select the pages that we want to export, the size, width, and height in pixels, and the resolution. Taking mine that 96 pixels per inch is a good resolution in case that you want to send that image by e-mail, not in case that you want to print it. If you want to print it at least 150. And in case that you have a really high standards, then 250 or 300 pixels per inch. Finally, again, we can mark so export in image viewer. So let's say Export. And once it's done, I have my presentation separated into different J peg images. This can be useful in case that I want to create a PowerPoint presentation or I want these images to place them in my InDesign document, something like that. I close it. You can see now the folder in where I have the PDF document. And then these three images called Barcelona Pavilion one, Barcelona Pavilion to Barcelona Pavilion three, back in layout. Once again, if we move over File Export, we have the first option, d w, d, or d, f. This is the outer cut format, right? I would click on it. Then we can select these both Formats, DWG, DXF. We will lose the textures of our images, but we will keep the lines as vectors. To be honest, I don't think that this is the purpose of layout presentation. To send these lines to our target, anyways, we will save it. Again. We have here more or less the same options, the pages that we want to export, the format liars and other possibilities, export and accept. And here we have that file ready to be opened in Outlook. To be honest, if we wanted to use this option to export our layout presentation in DWT, I would recommend you to do it from SketchUp, not Layout. Remember that in SketchUp we have as well that option available. We should go over File export to the graphic. Here. We should select AutoCad d w, d phi. Anyways, remember that your layout file is always linked with your SketchUp model. And the main purpose of this software is to help you in order to make presentations in a more attractive and complete way, always using your 3D models made before in sketch. At the same time, it will help you to save time in case that you want to make changes in that 3D model. And this gets up and it will help you as well to include dimensions, titles, nodes, call-outs, and so on. Time to say goodbye. Now, I really hope that you have enjoyed this course. It's been a long time together learning this amazing program, SketchUp layout with, in my opinion, is a part of SketchUp. I would be super happy if you leave a comment and I can hear from you. And in case that you are interested in, keep learning with me, I can recommend you the aluminum course in where we will learn how to render our 3D model to get photorealistic images and in where we will be using as well this Barcelona Pavilion, which I am sure that you know already, super good Bye-bye. 97. Plugin Artificial Intelligence Veras: People and welcome to this new glass in where we are going to talk about a new plugging in set called as this plugging is about. Ai powered visualization is one of the best right now Currently. As you already know, this new technology is under developing. It means that this plugging is in its childhood, I would say. Anyways, it is incredible and it has a lot of power to help us in our designs. First of all, I recommend you to go to the website. You only have to type in veras in Google, you will find it ECD. Then once you are here, if you want to download this login, scroll down, and finally here you will find this Ops Windows Free Trial. Just click on it, start the download process. When you open your Sketsup again, you will find this plugin already in style. Here we have the icon. If you don't find it, remember go to this upper bar, right click, and look for the Veras login. Good. Once we are here, let's see how this plugging works and what he can do. First of all, keep in mind that you have two main options. You can use this plugging with your three D models or with images, Jpeg images or whatever. Let's start with the three D models. Let's use, in this case, this auditorium. This three D model which we already learned how to model during the course and it is attached with the course. You can use it by yourself and then first of all, place the camera in a good position. For example. I think that here could be nice. I will use the hand maybe here. Let's save this scene. Create a scene. Here we are. Then we click on the Veras flagging one. Click on here. Pay attention now because the flagging is going to ask us for our email. In this three trial version, we'll be able to make 30 renders with each email. But we will be able as well, to change the e mail. Eventually, we can use it endlessly as far as I already used and consumed the renders associated with my E mail. I will make up a new one. For example, Manuel Three Gmail.com Next one, random password. Make sure that you will remember it. That's a safe. Here we are, inside the plugging, you will see that it works in a very easy, easy way. You can even read the tips. I will close it, because during this class, the tips come from me. First of all, we see up here three levels. Explore, compose, and refine. We have here our canvas, some prompts done by the fault, by the plugging up here. One button just for our renders our images in a specific fold. If we move to the right, we can play with the settings and just log out above this bar. Look carefully because here we can read renders remaining still 30 because we haven't used any of them. Of course, we can buy the plugging and have more benefits. Furthermore, in the left side, we have the option for saving the selected image as whatever we can hide the original renderings. And then compare our new images with the previous one. And we can even refresh the preview image. But currently on our canvas, we see that the building is not complete. If I come back to the sketch of canvas, I will have to adjust my camera here. The first step is to place the building in the middle and give it some air around, for example. Here I will update the scene, update, come back to the plug in and then refresh. We can check the improvement but still is not 100% correct. We repeat the process. I will move a little bit the building to the left, I will update. Then we go to the Veras plugging and we refresh the preview image. Here we are now is perfect. Let's start using this first menu on the right side which is associated with this level Explore. What we find here is nine prompts made by the fault by the P. What is a prompt? What a prompt means? Well, we can read here prompt and then modern design with large windows, timber building during autumn, and some specifications about the strength 60, the commetry of the right, zero and the material of the right. The prompts are words which we create in order. To the AI some information about what we want. Then the AI will create something accordingly to those words. The more quality and the more information the prompts, the better image the AI will do. That is how it works. We can even buy prompts in other websites. We can find as well three prompts. We can create our own prompts based in our experience. We will become better and better with the prompts. This one, the title is Timber Autumn Realistic, but if we change to the next one, the title is Forest in Realistic. Just explore those prompts. Let's make our first proof as far as this building is quite modern. Let's go here to this prompt, which is called Parametric X machine. The prompt says, articulated facade, rectilinear contrast surfaces with sharp edges and sharp corners reflected and make my surfaces class and steel. And so then we have the width and the high of the image. The free version, we cannot change these dimensions. Once we are happy we hit Render, we'll have to wait accordingly with the power our computer. Once it is done, we have here our first imag, not bad, this is when the game starts for you. You have to compare the image with the prompts, change the prompts, and play with the settings. So anyways, we have here our first Imag, which is going to be saved automatically in a specific fold. If I go here one click, then by the fault the plugging is going to save the images in this folder, call renderings inside this route. But I recommend you to go to the Settings, then here we can read Saved Renderings folder. We can change that path and make a new one easier for us. For example, I have mine placed in a folder called Images, Easy to cut. The name of that folder in my case is Verus. Once this is explained, let's move on to the next level. This level, this opsim here, call compose, will allow us to customize our, let's say settings to get a very personal image. Let's understand then the meaning of these different attributes. First of all, we have geometry over right. A value, in this case 75, associated with slide. The less this value is, the more respect the E will have with our project. With the geometry of our project, imagine that we move this slide bar completely to the left geometry of the right value zero. It means that in theory, the E will not change at all the geometry. Based on my experience, on the proofs I already made, I have to say that still with this value, with zero, the geometry sometimes is changed. On the contrary, if we move the slide bar completely to the right, will be allowing the I to change dramatically the geometry 0 project. Let's jump now to the next attribute, material over right. You can imagine now the meaning maximum value means that the materials that we are using already in our project, or the materials that are already applied in our Emacs will be completely over, will change dramatically. If we move this slide bar to the left value zero, then we will not allow the AI to change the material anyways, as it happened with the geometry. Materials will be changed little, but they will be changed. Then we have the width and high and four different levels. They can be on or off. Now we have the turbon nature level. On this atmospheric level, we can turn off them as you can imagine because it is very intuitive. If we turn on the first one interior, the AI will create something specific about interiors. This one is for aerial views turbo Nature is in order to allow the AI to create more things related with nature. Atmospheric is playing with shadows, sun and mainly with the F. Then we find here a box where we have all of our prompts. I can erase all of them and write whatever I have in my head. This is one of the funny things about this new technology. Talking about prompts, I have to say that we have to learn a lot. It's not that easy. As you can imagine. When you start writing down your own prompts, you will see that maybe you don't have as many ideas as you wish. That's the reason because sometimes we will use prompts from different websites in order to help us. What I want to explain here is that maybe Be one specific lesson just talking about prompts. Anyways, for this example, I will write here, I am sure that you know this amazing architect and the good thing about sad is that her architecture is very unique. Then we have this another slide bar called Prompt Strength. This is talking about again, the tolerance for following the prompt. Then we find this button called, as I told you before, it's not possible to use it in this trial version. Summing up means that we will be able to use one code already used in one image that we already like. Then we want to use that code in order to generate another image. Similar. Because the thing here, and this is something new, is that with the same values, AI will generate different images every time. If we are able to keep that code of one specific image, then we'll be able as well to control more the final result of our image. Let's go with our first experiment. Geometry override 100 material over right 100. With high we cannot touch it as an interior, as area view could be turbonature, atmospheric prompt strength 100 render. Here we have the result after 12 seconds, 0.7 in my case. As you can check, the geometry is quite different materials because we are working with the modeling skates where we didn't apply materials. We just have glass and white walls that the prompt is clearly visible in this. Let's do another render without touching anything. Here we are a completely different image, a completely different building with the same settings. In my opinion, this one is more attractive. I really like it, to be honest. It could be a building from Venus or Saturn, something like that. I could imagine aliens walking around here. Anyways, let's change now the settings geometry of the right zero material of the right zero. We keep this aerial view on the prompt from the strength 100% render. As you can check, the result here is the geometry didn't change at all. Materials a little bit. If we want to compare this Imats with the original one, we can go here to this I click, and then we can compare both models. Final, try Geometry over right. This time let's say 65 material, right, 70. The rest of the attributes are not touched. Render, here we are. Let's compare the Imats with the previous model. The geometry is different materials as well, and we still have something related with Taji, but to be honest, I don't like this building. I will make another proof. This one looks a little bit better, but still I don't like. Man, let's become crazy. Geometry of a right 100, 100 material, right? Let's click on all these levels all together. On prompt Sahadi, let's add something else. Reflective glass, urban, back round, touristic sky, people around. That's from strength. 100 grander look. We lost completely our treaty model and now we have two glass boxes floating in the middle of a forest. This is not even close to what I was looking for. Let's do another test. Here we are. As you can see, we have to balance the intensity our slide bars. Otherwise, we lose control completely. Imagine now that we choose, for example, the image as our favorite one. Then we want to refine something. We have this, this third level called refine. We should now select some specific area that we want to refine. One click on here, and then we can start selecting a new area in our image that we want to refine. We close the area. We can modify the previous values which are already here that we used for doing this image. Or we can just click on Render Selection. Here we have another version for that facade. Maybe we like it even more or even less. I don't finish this lesson. I'll explain to you rapidly how we should use this plagging in case that we want to use images instead of threat models. First of all, we have to go to file Import. Then we select our input, we place our imags in our cavas. Then let's rotate this image as we already know how to do it in. Once it is well placed, we again have to just place the camera in the correct position. We can again make scene and we go to the veras plugin and we refresh our cameras exactly the same as we did before. If you find problems refreshing, then log out and log in again. Here we are. We correct a little bit the position, update the scene, we go back to our plugin, we refresh the image. Once we are happy we start playing with the plugging as we already know. If I use a default prompt for the first one render, we can check the result and compare it with our previous image. Let's use now this another style. Here we have our living room. Let's compare with the previous and original one. And the result is quite interesting, right? If we want to play with the image, it is the same as we did before. Remember that we have 30 shots and then you just have to change the email. Well, time to say goodbye. But firstly, I would like to remind you that this playing was just a few weeks, two months maximum ago. It is a baby. Imagine the things that he will do in the future. The power inside is endless. It will transform completely our way of working. Don't doubt that I will be updating the course with important advances, important improvements related with AI, with this plugging, and with new technologies, which can appear suddenly in the next years.